^ 


GIFT  OF 
W^C.   Davis 


i 


J» 


•     ^ 


EtSmUCTION 


FOB 


,    HEAVY   ARTILLERY; 
I 


PBEPABED  BY  A 


BOARD  OF  OFFICERS, 


FOR  THE  USE  OF  THE 


ARMY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


^ './  ;U  i 


WASfflNGTON: 

GIDEON  AND   CO.,   PRINTERS. 

1851. 


/ 1  5-/ 


•  ••,-••  • 


\ 


West  Point,  N.  Y., 

August  23, 1850. 
Bvt.  Lt.  Col.  W.  G.  Freemak, 

^sst.  Adjt.  Gen.,  Head  Quarters  U,  S.  Ai-my, 

Mw  York,  K.  Y. 
Sir  :  The  Board  of  Officers  convened  by  General  Orders,  No.  12, 
dated  July  27,  1849,  has  the  honor  to  submit  herewith  "  a  complete 
system  of  instruction  for  Siege,  Garrison,  Sea-coast,  and  Mountain 
Artillery." 

B.  HUGER,  Capt.  of  Ord.  and  Bvt.  Col. 

C.  F.  SMITH,  Capt.  2d  Jlrt.  and  Bvt.  Col. 
F.  TAYLOR,  Capt.  1st  Art.  and  Bvt.  Lt.  Col. 
R.  ANDERSON,  Capt.  U  Art.  and  Bvt.  Maj. 
J.  W,  PHELPS,  Capt.  AthArt. 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

Washington,  May  10,  1851. 
The  system  of  "Instruction  for  Heavy  Artillery,"  pre- 
pared by  a  Board  of  Army  Officers,  pursuant  to  orders  from  the 
General-in-Chief,  having  been  approved  by  the  President  of  the 
United  States,  is  hereby  adopted,  and  published  for  the  use  of 
the  Army ;  and,  under  the  act  of  May  12,  1820,  for  the  observance 
of  the  Militia  of  the  United  States. 

C.  M.  CONRAD, 

Secretary  of  War. 


iy!4434.2 


■^  4> 


CONTENTS. 

PART    I. 
SERVING  HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 


ARTICI.E:  I. 

Page. 
(Service  of  the  ftiece    .      ^ 1 

liesson  1. 

Service  of  a  gun  mounted  on  a  siege  carriage     .        ,         .6 

Service  of  an  8-inch  howitzer  mounted  on  a  24-pdr.  siege  car- 
riage   19 

jLesson  3. 

Service  of  a  10-inch  siege  mortar      .         .         .         .         ,30 

licsson  4. 
Service  of  an  8-inch  siege  mortar      .        .         ...      39 

Service  of  a  coehom  mortar 41 

Ijesson  6* 

Service  of  a  10-inch  sea-coast  mortar         ....      43 

Service  of  a  13-inch  sea-coast  mortar         ....      45 
A 


VI  CONTENTS. 

liesson  8. 

Page. 

Service  of  a  stone  mortar 46 

liCsson  9. 

Service  of  a  gun  mounted  on  a  barbette  carriage         .        .      47 
Ijesson  10. 

Service  of  an  8-inch  sea-coast  howitzer  mounted  on  a  bar- 
bette carriage 58 

liesson  11. 

Service  of  a  10-inch  sea-coast  howitzer  mounted  on  a  bar- 
bette carriage 59 

liesson  13. 

Service  of  a  gun  mounted  on  a  casemate  carriage        ,         ,      60 
liesson  13. 

Service  of  an  8-inch  columbiad  mounted  on  a  casemate  car- 
riage   67 

liesson  14. 

Service  of  a  24-pdr.  howitzer  mounted  on  a  flank  casemate 
carriage       .         .         . 68 

liesson  15. 

Service  of  an  8-inch  columbiad  mounted  on  a  columbiad  car- 
riage   73 

Ijessou  16. 

Service  of  a  10-inch  columbiad  mounted  on  a  columbiad  car- 
riage   80 

ARTlCIiE!   11. 

Ibrmation  of  a  company  into  detachments  for  the  service  of  a  bat- 
tery of  several  pieces       .......       81 

Service  of  a  battery  of  several  pieces 83 


CONTENTS.  VU 

ARTICIiE    III. 

Page. 

Pointing  guns  and  howitzers       ...•••  85 

Pointing  mortars 89 

Table  of  tangents  and  tangent  scales 92 

Ricochet  Jiring          ...•••..  93 

Firing  hot  shot 96 

J^ightjinng ,       .         .         .         .101 

Phtforms 102 


PART    II. 
MECHANICAL  MANOEUVRES. 


ARTICIiE    I. 

Ckneral  directions 109 

ARTICIiE    II. 

Prelinmary  manceuvres •     115 

liesson  If* 

A  gun  lying  upon  the  ground  to  place  blocks  under  the 

chase  and  reinforce 115 

To  remove  the  blocks 117 

To  slew  the  gun 118 

To  move  the  gun  short  distances  to  the  front  or  rear  ,  .119 
To  move  the  gun  short  distances  by  rolling  it  ,  .  .119 
To  roll  the  gun  up  an  inclined  plane  .         .         .         .119 

licsson  IS. 

A  howitzer  lying  upon  the  ground  to  place  blocks  under  the 
chase  and  reinforce •        .     122 


VUl  CONTENTS. 

Page. 

To  remove  the  blocks -,  123 

To  raise  the  howitzer  upon  its  muzzle       ....  123 

To  slew  the  howitzer  while  standing  upon  its  muzzle  .         .  124 

Ijesson  19. 

A  mortar  lying  upon  the  ground  to  raise  it  upon  its  muzzle,  125 

To  slew  the  mortar 126 

To  slew  the  mortar  bed 126 

To  place  a  long  roller  under  a  mortar  bed  ,         ,         ,  127 

To  remove  the  long  roller 128 

To  limber 129 

To  unlimber 130 

To  move  a  piece,  or  its  carriage,  to  the  front  or  rear   .        ,  130 
To  cross-lift  a  piece          .         .         .         .         .         .         .131 

Ij  essou  523. 

A  gun  being  on  its  carriage  to  place  a  short  roller  under  the 

reinforce 132 

A  howitzer  being  on  its  carriage  to  place  a  short  roller  under 

the  reinforce 133 

To  remove  the  short  roller        ..,,,,  133 

To  insert  handspikes  in  the  trunnion  holes         .         ,         .  134 

To  remove  the  handspikes        ......  135 

liesson  33. 

To  shift  a  gun  from  the  trunnion  holes  to  its  travelling  bed  .  136 

To  shift  a  gun  from  its  travelling  bed  to  the  trunnion  holes  .  138 
To  shift  a  howitzer  from  the  trunnion  holes  to  its  travelling 

bed 138 

To  shift  a  howitzer  from  its  travelling  bed  to  the  trunnion 

holes 138 

To  change  a  limber  when  the  gun  or  howitzer  is  on  its  tra- 
velling bed 140 

To  change  the  limber  of  a  loaded  mortar  wagon  .         ,  140 


CONTENTS.  IX 

ARTICIiE    III. 

Page. 
Manceuvres  toith  the  handspike     .         .         ,         .         ,         ,     141 

licsson  34. 

To  mount  a  gun  upon  its  carriage 141 

To  dismount  the  gun 144 

To  mount  a  howitzer  upon  its  carriage      .        •        .         .  145 

Ta  dismount  the  howitzer 145 

liessou  ^5, 

To  mount  a  howitzer  as  a  field  piece         •        •        ,        .146 
To  dismount  the  howitzer        .•••••     147 

liesson  36. 

To  mou  nt  a  siege  mortar  upon  its  bed       .         .         ,        ,     149 
.  To  dismount  the  mortar 150 

liesson  37. 

To  mount  a  siege  mortar  upon  the  mortar  wagon        .        .     152 
To  dismount  the  mortar  ......     154 

liesson  38. 

To  mount  a  gun  upon  the  mortar  wagon    ....  157 

To  dismount  the  gun 160 

To  mount  a  howitzer  upon  the  mortar  wagon     ...  162 

To  dismount  the  howitzer 163 

lies  son  39. 

To  shift  a  gun  from  one  carriage  to  another        .         .         .     164 
To  shift  a  howitzer  from  one  carriage  to  another        .        •     166 

liCsson  30. 

To  shift  a  gun  from  the  mortar  wagon  to  its  carriage  .  167 

To  shift  a  gun  from  its  carriage  to  the  mortar  wagon  .  168 

To  shift  a  howitzer  from  the  mortar  wagon  to  its  carriage  .  169 

To  shift  a  howitzer  from  its  carriage  to  the  mortar  wagon  .  169 

A* 


X  CONTENTS. 

liesson  31. 

-  Page. 

To  change  or  to  grease  a  wheel 170 

To  dismount  a  carriage  and  its  limber        ....  171 

To  remount  the  carriage  and  its  limber       ....  174 

To  dismount  the  mortar  wagon          .         .         .         .         .  175 

Tojemount  the  mortar  wagon           .         .         .         .         .  17G 

To  lower  a  barbette  carriage  from  its  chassis,  the  piece  being 

mounted 177 

To  remount  the  barbette  carriage  upon  its  chassis       .         .  179 

To  grease  the  rollers  of  a  barbette  carriage,  the  piece  being 

mounted 180 

To  grease  the  forks  of  the  traverse  wheels         .         .         .  181 

liCssou   33. 

To  place  the  chassis  for  a  24-pdr.  howitzer  carriage  for  a 

flank  casemate  in  position 182 

To  mount  the  howitzer    .......  183 

To  mount  the  carriage  upon  its  chassis       ....  183 

To  dismount  the  howitzer  carriage  from  its  chassis,  the 

piece  being  mounted     .         .         .         .         ,         .         .  184 

To  dismount  the  howitzer 185 

ARTICIiE   IV. 

Manceuvres  with  machines           .         .         ,         .         .         .  186 

The  lifting  jack 189 

Manceuvres  with  the  lifting  jack  .         .         .         .         ,         .191 

licssou  34. 

A  piece  lying  upon  the  ground  to  place  blocks  under  the 

chase  and  reinforce       .......  191 

To  remove  the  blocks 192 

licssou  35. 

To  shift  a  piece  from  the  trunnion  holes  to  its  travelling  bed,  193 

To  shift  a  piece  from  its  travelling  bed  to  the  trunnion  holes,  194 


CONTENTS.  X] 

liesson  36. 

Pag-e. 

To  mount  a  siege  gun 195 

To  dismount  the  gun 198 

To  mount  an  8-inch  siege  howitzer    .....  199 

To  dismount  the  howitzer         ......  199 

To  change,  to  grease,  or  to  raise  a  wheel  ....  200 

The,gin 201 

The  siege  gin 202 

Manceuvres  with  the  siege  gin       ......  204 

liesson  39'. 

To  put  the  gin  together 204 

To  reeve  the  fall 205 

To  carry  the  gin  when  put  together            .         ,         ,         .  205 

To  raise  the  gin 206 

To  move  the  gin  when  raised 207 

To  lower  the  gin 207 

liessou  3S. 

To  mount  a  gun ,        .  208 

To  dismount  a  gun 211 

To  mount  a  howitzer       .......  211 

To  dismount  a  howitzer  .         .         .         .         .         .         .211 

To  sling  a  mortar  mounted  on  its  bed         ....  211 

To  sling  a  mortar  without  its  bed 212 

Garrison  and  casemate  gins        ' 214 

The  use  of  the  gin  as  shears         .  •       .         .         .         .         .  215 

Manceuvres  with  the  gin  as  shears          .....  216 

liesson  39. 

To  raise  a  piece  over  the  crest  of  a  parapet  or  edge  of  a  wall,  216 

To  lower  a  piece  over  the  crest  of  a  parapet  or  edge  of  a 

wall  into  the  ditch 221 

To  raise  a  piece  and  pass  it  through  a  casemate  embrazure 

or  any  similar  opening           ......  221 

To  pass  a  piece  through  a  casemate  embrazure  or  any  simi- 
lar opening  and  lower  it  into  the  ditch             .         .         .  223 


Xll  CONTENTS. 

Pag-e. 

The  sling  cart ,         .  225 

Manoeuvres  with  the  sling  cart 226 

IJessou  40. 

To  sling  a  siege  gun,  howitzer,  or  mortar  .        .        .  226 

To  lower  a  siege  gun,  howitzer,  or  mortar  to  the  ground     .  227 

To  sling  a  sea-coast  howitzer  or  columbiad         ,         .         .  228 

To  sling  a  10-inch  columbiad 228 

To  sling  a  siege  mortar  mounted  on  its  bed        ,         ,         .  228 

To  sling  a  sea-coast  mortar 229 

To  transport  a  siege  piece  short  distances  by  a  limber  .  229 

To  raise  a  piece  upon  one  or  more  blocks  by  a  limber  .  229 

To  sling  a  piece  on  two  limbers  so  that  it  may  be  transported 

with  horses 230 

The  casemate  truck 231 

Manceuvres  with  the  casemate  truck      .....  232 
liessott  41. 

To  place  a  casemate  chassis  on  the  truck  ....  232 

To  lower  the  chassis  to  the  ground 233 

To  remove  the  chassis  from  the  casemate  ....  234 

,To  place  a  gun  carriage  on  the  truck         ....  234 

To  lower  the  gun  carriage  to  the  ground    ....  234 

To  shift  the  gun  carriage  from  the  truck  to  its  chassis  .  234 

To  shift  the  gun  carriage  from  its  chassis  to  the  truck  .  235 

Ijesson  49. 

To  place  a  heavy  gun  on  the  truck 236 

To  remove  a  heavy  gun  from  the  truck  and  place  it  on  two 

blocks 237 

To  place  a  heavy  gun  on  the  truck  by  a  gin         .        .  237 
l4essou  43. 

To  mount  a  gun 238 

To  dismount  a  gun  .......  238 

Liesson  44. 

To  remove  or  to  grease  the  truck  wheels  when  the  gun  is 

mounted 239 


CONTENTS.  XIU 

PART    III. 
MISCELLANEOUS. 


ARTICIiS:    I. 

Page. 

To  embark  and  disembark  artillery  and  ordnance  stores     .         .241 

ARTICXiE    II. 

Tables  of  dimensions  and  weights  of  guns,  carriages,  shot,  shells, 
machines,  and  implements ;  of  charges  for  shells  ;  of  ranges 

for  heavy  ordnance;  Sfc.  ......  245 

Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  guns          .         .         .  246 
Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  columbiads  and  how- 
itzers             247 

Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  mortars     .         .         ,  248 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  shot        .....  248 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  shells     .         «         .         .         .  249 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  spherical  case  shot  .         .  250 

Weights  of  carcasses       .......  250 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  grape  shot      ....  251 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  canister  shot  ....  251 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  grenades         ....  251 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  canisters         ....  252 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  a  stand  of  grape     .         .         .  252 

Principal  dimensions  of  siege  gun  carriages  and  limbers      .  253 

Principal  weights  of  siege  gun  carriages  and  limbers  .         .  254 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  mortar  beds  , .         .         .         .  254 

Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  barbette  carriages        .  255 

Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  casemate  carriages       .  256 

Weight  of  lifting  jack 257 

Dimensions  and  weights  of  gins 257 

Dimensions  and  weight  of  the  sling  cart    ....  258 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Dimensions  and  weight  of  the  mortar  wagon     .        .         ,  258 

Lengths  and  weights  of  finished  implements      .         .        .  259 

Weights  of  implements 260 

Dimensions  of  cartridge  bags  ......  261 

Manner  of  strapping  shells 262 

Charges  for  shells  for  mortars  ......  262 

Charges  for  shells  for  columbiads  and  heavy  guns      .         .  263 

The  number  of  balls  in  a  pile 263 

Ranges  of  heavy  ordnance 265 


LIST    OF   PLATES 


Page. 

No.  1.  24-pdr.  »iege  Gun 18 

JVo.  2.  24'pdr,  Gun  on  a  siege  carriage 18 

No.  3.  24-pdr.  Gun  on  a  siege  carriage — horizontal  preyection  .  18 
No.  4.  24-pdr.  Gun  on  a  siege  carriage — in  travelling  position  .  18 
No.  5.  Gunner's  Level,  Breech-sight,  Friction  Tvbe,  Lanyard  .  18 
No.  6.  Sponge,  Rammer,  Ladles  and  Tongs  for  hot  shot,  Car- 
tridge, Shells,  Spherical  Case,  Chrape,  Canister  .  .  18 
No.  1.  8-inch  Siege  Howitzer,  Qvmn,  Loading  Tongs       .        .    29 

No.  8.  8-inch  Siege  Mortar  and  Bed 46 

No.  9.  Siege,  Sea-coast,  Coehorn,  and  Stone  Mortars— horizon- 
tal projection 46 

No.  10.  32-pdr.  Sea-coast  Gun 69 

iVb.  11.  24-pdr.  Gun  on  barbette  carriage 59 

iVo.  12.  32-pdr.  Gun  on  barbette  carriage— horizontal  projection,    69 

No.  13.  Sea-coast  Howitzer 69 

No.  14.  8-inch  Columbiad  on  a  casemate  carriage       .        .        .67 
No.  15.  24-pdr.  Howitzer  on  a  flank  casemate  carriage       .        .    72 
No.  16.  24-pdr.  Howitzer  on  a  flank  casemate  carriage — horizon- 
tal projection  72 

No.  17.  8-inch  Columbiad 80 

No.  18.  8-inch  Columbiad  carriage 80 

No.  19.  8-inch  Columbiad  carriage — horizontal  projection  .  .  80 
No.  20.  Platform  for  Siege  Gun  or  Howitzer    .        .        .        .108 

iVo.  21.  Platforms  for  Mortars 108 

No.  22.  Block,  Half  Block,  Skid,  Shifting  Plank      .        .        .  114 
No.  23.  Manoeuvring  Handspike,  Long  Roller,  Short  Roller, 
Half  Roller,  Gun  Chock,  Wheel  Chock,  Roller  Chock, 

Trunnion-loop ,.  114 

No.  24.  To  shift  a  piece  from  the  trunnion  holes  to  its  travelling 

bed 140 

JVo.  25.  To  change  a  limber  when  the  piece  is  on  its  travelling  bed,  140 
No.  26.  To  mount  a  Gun  upon  its  carriage  ....  146 
No.  27.  Mortar  toagon 166 


XVI  LIST    OF    PLATES. 

Page. 
No.  28.  Morim  wagon— horizontal  projection    ....    156 
No.  29.  To  mount  a  Siege  Mortar  on  the  Mortar  wagon    .        .    156 
No.  30.  Th  mount  a  Chin  on  the  Mortar  wagon  .        .        .        .163 
No.  31 .  To  mount  a  Gun  on  the  Mortar  wagon  without  using  a 

windlass 163 

No,  32.  To  shift  a  Gun  or  Howitzer  from  one  carriage  to  another,    166 

No.  33.  To  change  a  Wheel 176 

No.  34.  To  lower  a  Barbette  carriage  from  its  chassis,  the  piece 

being  mounted 181 

No.  35.  Lifting  Jack,  Lifting  Block,  Field  and  Siege  Gin       .     188 

No.  36.  Garrison  Gin 188 

No.  31 .  Sling  Cart,  Sling  Chain 188 

iVo.  38.  Hand  Sling  Cart,  Casemate  Truck        .        .        .        .188 
No,  39.  Crown  for  head  of  Gin,  Knots,  Loops,  Hitches    .        .    188 


ERRATA. 


Page  10,  line  9.  After  "motions"  add:  "at  the  words  One — 
Two — Three — Four — Five  :" 

Page  25,  line  36.  Between  "  posts,"  and  "  break  "  insert :  "  take 
the  chocks,  and  " 

Page  26,  line    3.    Omit :  "except  that  the  wheels  are  not  chocked." 

Page  51,  line  19.  After  "motions'*  add:  "at  the  words  One — 
Two — Three — Four — Five  :" 


INSTRUCTION 

FOB 

HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 

PART    I. 

SERVING  HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 

ARTICLE    1. 

SERVICE   OF   THE   PIECE. 


1.  The  cannoneer,  previous  to  receiving  instruction 
in  Heavy  Artillery,  should  be  thoroughly  instructed 
in  the  School  of  the  Piece,  Field  Artillery. 

2.  The  manner  of  serving  heavy  artillery  varies 
with  the  kind  of  piece,  and  the  carriage  upon  which  it 
is  mounted. 

3.  There  are  four  kinds  of  heavy  pieces  in  the  land 
service,  viz:  the  Gun,  the  Howitzer,  the  Mortar, 
and  the  Columbiad. 

They  are  distinguished  according  to  their  use,  as 
Siege,  Garrison,  and  Sea-coast  Artillery. 

For  their  service  six  distinct  kinds  of  carriages  are 
necessary,  viz:  the  Siege,  the  Barbette,  the  Casemate, 
the  Flank' Casemate,  the  Columbiad,  and  the  carriage 


■"  * 


ST' 


'/  SJBSlVlip^^Oi'   THE    PIECE. 


[part  1. 


upon  which  the  Mortar  is  mounted,  which  is  techni- 
cally called  its  bed. 

Siege  Artillery  is  used  in  the  attack  of  places;  and 
as  it  follows  armies  in  their  operations,  is  mounted  upon 
carriages  which  serve  for  its  transportation. 

Garrison  Jlrtillery  is  employed  in  the  defence  of 
forts,  more  especially  those  of  the  interior;  and  Sea- 
coast  Artillery^  consisting  of  the  heaviest  calibres,  is 
used  for  the  defence  of  the  sea-coast.  Their  carriages 
do  not  subserve  the  purpose  of  transportation;  the  bar- 
bette carriage  may,  however,  be  used  for  moving  its 
piece  for  short  distances,  as  from  one  front  of  a  work 
to  another. 

The  following  are  the  kinds  and  calibres  of  Heavy 
Artillery  used  in  the  land  service  of  the  United  States: 


Kind  of  Ordnance. 


Guns 


Howitzers 


COLUMBIADS 


Mortars 


Siege  and  Garrison  . 
Sea-coast    .... 


Siege  and  Garrison  .    .  j 
Sea-coast     .... 


Siege 

Sea-coast 

Stone 
Coehorn 


Calibre. 


12-pdr. 
18-pdr. 
24-pdr. 
32-pdr. 
42-pdr. 

8-inch 
24-pdr. 

8-inch 
10-inch 

8-inch 
10-inch 

8-inch 
10-inch 
10-inch 
13-inch 
16-inch 
24-pdr. 


Material. 


Iron. 


Bronze. 


4.  The  detachment  for  serving  a  piece  is  formed 
into  two  ranks,  and  numbered  from  right  to  left.  The 
odd  numbers  form  the  rear  rank,  and  serve  on  the  right 


ART.    1.]  GENERAL   DIRECTIONS.  3 

of  the  piece;  the  even  numbers  and  the  gunner  form 
the  front  rank,  and  serve  on  its  left.  The  right  file  is 
numbered  1  and  2;  the  next  file  3  and  4;  the  gunner 
is  uncovered,  and  generally  on  the  left  of  no.  4;  and 
on  his  left  are  as  many  files  as  are  deemed  necessary, 
numbered  5  and  6,  7  ajjd  8,  &c. 

5.  A  piece  is  in  battery  when  it  is  in  the  proper 
position  to  be  fired. 

The  right  of  a  piece,  when  in  battery,  is  the  right  of 
the  cannoneer  when  facing  to  the  object  to  be  fired  at; 
the  front  is  the  direction  towards  which  the  muzzle 
points. 

The  term  battery  is  applied  to  one  or  more  pieces,  or 
to  the  places  where  the  pieces  are  fired. 

A  platform  is  the  support  upon  which  a  piece  is 
manoeuvred  when  in  battery. 

6.  The  detachment  is  marched  to  the  battery  by  a 
flank.  It  is  halted,  and  faced  to  the  front,  when  its 
centre  is  opposite  to  the  middle  of  the  platform,  and  (if 
there  be  room)  four  yards  from  it. 

7.  To  cause  the  cannoneers  to  take  their  posts,  the 
instructor  commands: 

1.  Detachment,  to  your  posts. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  detachment  is  faced  to  the 
right  by  the  chief  of  piece.  ; 

At  the  second  command,  it  files  to  the  left,  and  the 
two  ranks  separate;  the  rear  rank  marching  to  the  right 
of  the  piece,  and  the  front  rank  to  the  left,  in  lines 
parallel  to  its  axis.  As  each  man  arrives  at  his  post, 
he  halts  and  faces  to  the  piece;  nos.  1  and  2  one  yard 
from  the  epaulment,  parapet,  or  scarp,  their  breasts 
eighteen  inches  outside  of  the  wheels  of  the  carriage 
or  cheeks  of  the  mortar  bed,  as  the  case  may  be;  and 
the  other  numbers  and  the  gunner,   dressing  on  nos.   1 


4  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

and  2  respectively,  at  intervals  of  one  yard,  except  that 
between  nos.  3  and  5  there  is  an  interval  of  two  yards. 
With  the  mortar,  nos.  1  and  2  are  opposite  to  the  front 
manoeuvring  bolts,  and  nos.  3  and  4  opposite  to  those 
in  the  rear. 

Under  the  fire  of  the  enemy,  the  men  will  be  directed 
to  cover  themselves  by  the  parapet  as  much  as  may  be 
consistent  with  the  execution  of  their  duties. 

8.  The  chief  of  piece  (a  non-commissioned  officer) 
assists  the  instructor  in  effecting  a  correct  execution  of 
the  movements.  While  at  the  battery,  he  will  gene- 
rally be  one  yard  outside  of  the  cannoneers  of  the  left, 
facing  the  piece,  and  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  platform 
or  rearmost  part  of  the  carriage.  He  communicates, 
and  attends  to  the  execution  of,  all  orders  he  may 
receive  in  relation  to  the  service  of  his  piece;  as,  for 
instance,  the  kind  of  ammunition  to  be  used,  the 
weight  of  charge,  the  kind  and  length  of  fuze,  &c. 

9.  The  movements  of  the  cannoneers  at  the  battery 
are  in  double-quick  time. 

10.  Posts  are  changed  at  the  discretion  of  the  in- 
structor. 

11.  To  allow  the  detachment  to  rest,  the  instructor 
commands : 

In  place — rest;  or,  Rest. 

The  cannoneers  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

In  the  first  case,  the  men  remain  at  their  posts ;  in 
the  second  case,  they  may  leave  their  posts,  but  will 
remain  near  the  piece. 

To  resume  the  exercise,  the  instructor  commands : 

Attention — Detachment. 

At  which  command,  all  resume  their  posts  and  hand- 
spikes. 


ART.    1.]  GENERAL   DIRECTIONS.  5 

12.  Until  the  cannoneer  becomes  well  versed  in  his 
duties  at  the  piece,  the  instructor  will  himself,  by  way 
of  example,  occasionally  execute  the  movements  which 
he  orders.  In  the  intervals  of  rest  he  will  minutely 
instruct  the  men  in  the  names  and  uses  of  the  imple- 
ments, and  in  the  nomenclatures  of  the  piece,  its  car- 
riage or  bed,  and  of  the  parts  of  the  fortification  near 
the  battery.  In  the  course  of  the  instruction  he  will 
require  every  man  to  point  out  and  designate  by  name 
all  the  parts  enumerated  in  these  nomenclatures,  and 
to  answer  questions  relative  to  the  service  of  the  piece; 
such  as  the  weight  of  charge,  the  manner  of  making 
cartridges  and  wads,  of  heating  shot  and  throwing  hot 
shot,  of  laying  platforms,  pointing,  &c.  And  although 
he  is  to  consider  precision  of  movement  as  highly 
essential,  yet  he  is  to  inculcate  that  something  more  is 
necessary  than  a  merely  mechanical  performance  of 
duty.  He  will,  therefore,  endeavor  to  impress  upon 
the  cannoneer  not  only  the  habit  of  a  soldier-like  man- 
ner of  working  his  gun,  but  an  accurate  understanding 
of  all  the  elements  necessary  to  the  efficiency  of  its 
fire. 

13.  To  leave  the  battery,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Detachment y  rear. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  detachment  is  faced  from 
the  epaulment  by  the  chief  of  piece. 

At  the  second  command,  it  marches  to  the  rear — the 
cannoneers  of  the  left  closing  upon  those  of  the  right — 
files  to  the  right,  and  is  halted  and  faced  to  the  front 
by  the  chief  of  piece,  so  as  to  bring  its  centre  opposite 
to  the  middle  of  the  platform,  and  four  yards  from  it. 
The  chief  of  piece  places  himself  upon  the  right. 

The  detachment  is  marched  from  the  battery  by  a 
flank. 


SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE. 


[part  1, 


^       1.ESSOIV    I, 
Service  of  a  Oum  ntounted  on  a  siege  carriage* 

(Plates  I,  II,  III,  IV,  V  akd  VI.) 


Seven  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  six  other 
cannoneers. 

14.  The  piece  is  in  battery  upon  its  platform. 
The  implements,  &c.,  are  arranged  as  follows: 


Handspikes    .  . 


Spoiis;e    . 
Rammei' 


Pass-box 


Tube-pouch 


Three  on  each  side  of  the  carriage, 
leaning  against  the  epaulment, 
in  line  with  the  cannoneers. 

One  yard  behind  and  parallel  to  the 
line  of  cannoneers  of  the  right, 
the  sponge  uppermost,  the  sponge 
and  rammer-heads  turned  from 
the  epaulment,  and  supported 
upon  a  prop. 

Against  the  epaulment,  outside  of 
the  pile  of  balls. 

Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the 
lanyard,  which  is  habitually 
wound  in  the  form  of  St.  An- 
drew's cross  upon  its  handle. 
Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the 
cascable. 


ART.    1.] 


SIEGE    GUN. 


Ounner's-pouch  .  . 


Chockii) 


Tent-coTev 


Tompion 


Containing  the  gunner's  level, 
breech-sight,  fingerstall,  priming 
wire,  gimlet,  vent-punch,  and 
chalk.  Suspended  from  the  knob 
of  the  cascable. 

One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  near 
the  ends  of  the  hurter. 

Covering  the  vent. 

In  the  muzzle. 

Leaning  against  the  epaulment,  out- 
side of  the  pile  of  balls. 


When  several  guns  are  served  together,  there  will  be 
only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to  each 
battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same  battery 
there  will  be  one  worm,  one  ladle,  and  one  wrench. 

The  balls  are  regularly  piled  on  the  left  of  the  piece, 
near  the  epaulment,  and  close  to  the  edge  of  the  plat- 
form. 

The  wads  are  placed  between  the  epaulment  and  the 
balls,  partly  resting  on  them. 

15.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  directs  them  to  place  their  muskets 
against  the  epaulment,  and  then  explains  to  them  the 
names  and  uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomencla- 
tures of  the  gun,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

16.  To  cause  the  implements  to.be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands : 


Take  implements. 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable; 
takes  off  the  vent-cover,  handing  it  to  no.  2  to  place 
against  the  epaulment,  outside  of  the  pass-box;  gives 
the  tube-pouch  to  no.  3;  equips  himself  with  his  own 


8  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

pouch  and  the  fingerstall,  wearing  the  latten  on  the 
second  finger  of  the  left  hand;  levels  the  piece  by  the 
elevating  screw;  applies  his  level  to  ascertain  the  high- 
est points  of  the  base-ring  and  swell  of  the  muzzle, 
which  he  marks  with  chalk;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  after  passing  two  handspikes  each  to 
nos.  3  and  4,  take  each  one  for  himself.  Nos.  5  and  6 
receive  theirs  from  nos.  3  and  4. 

17.  The  handspike  is  held  in  both  hands;  the  hand 
nearest  to  the  epaulment  grasping  it  near  the  small  end 
and  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  back  of  the  hand 
down,  elbow  touching  the  body;  the  other  hand  back 
up,  the  arm  extended  naturally;  the  butt  of  the  hand- 
spike upon  the  platform  on  the  side  farthest  from  the 
epaulment,  and  six  inches  in  advance  of  the  alignment. 

18.  When  the  cannoneer  lays  down  his  handspike, 
he  places  it  directly  before  him,  about  six  inches  in 
advance  of,  and  parallel  to  the  alignment,  the  small  end 
towards  the  epaulment;  and  whenever  he  thus  lays  it 
down  for  the  discharge  of  any  particular  duty,  he  will 
resume  it  on  returning  to  his  post  after  the  completion 
of  that  duty. 

19.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands: 

1.  From  battery. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  his  right. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5  and  6,  facing  from  the  epaulment, 
embar:  nos.  1  and  2  under  the  front  of  the  wheels; 
nos.  3  and  4  through  the  rear  spokes  of  the  wheels, 
near  the  felly,  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the  cheeks; 
and  nos.  5  and  6  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command 
Heave,  which  will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be 
necessary.     He  sees  that  nos.  5  and  6  guide  the  trail 


•       ART.   1.]  SIEGE    GUN.  9 

in  prolongation  of  the  directrix  of  the  embrazure,  and 
as  soon  as  the  face  of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from 
the  epaulment,  commands  Halt.  All  unbar,  and 
resume  their  posts.     Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  wheels. 

2.  Load  by  detail — Load. 

20.  Nos.  1,  2  and  4  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  out  the  tompion,  and  places  it  near  the 
vent-cover. 

No.  1  faces  once  and  a-hialf  to  his  left;  steps  over  the 
sponge  and  rammer;  faces  to  the  piece;  takes  the 
sponge  with  both  hands,  the  backs  down,  the  right  hand 
three  feet  from  the  sponge-head,  the  left  hand  eighteen 
inches  nearer  to  it;  returns  to  the  piece,  entering  the 
staff  in  the  embrazure;  places  the  left  foot  in  line  with 
the  face  of  the  piece,  half  way  between  it  and  the 
wheels;  breaks  to  the  right  with  the  right  foot,  the 
heels  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  direction  of  the  piece, 
the  left .  leg  straightened,  the  right  knee  bent,  the  body 
erect  upon  the  haunches;  and  rests  the  end  of  the 
sponge  in  the  muzzle,  the  staff  in  the  prolongation  of 
the  bore,  supported  by  the  right  hand,  the  right  arm 
extended,  the  left  hand  flat  against  the  side  of  the 
thigh. 

No.  2  steps  to  the  muzzle,  and  occupies  a  position  on 
the  left  of  the  piece  corresponding  to  that  of  no.  1  on 
its  right.  He  seizes  the  staff  with  the  left  hand,  back 
down,  near  to  and  outside  of  the  hand  of  no.  1. 

No.  3  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embars  under 
the  breech,  and  maintains  the  piece  in  a  convenient 
position  for  inserting  the  sponge,  until  he  receives  a 
signal  from  the  gunner  to  unbar.  He  then  lays  down 
his  handspike;  steps  over  the  rammer  and  seizes  the 
staff  with  both  hands,  as  prescribed  for  the  sponge;  and 
stands  ready  to  exchange  with  no.  1. 

No .  4  takes  the  pass-box  and  goes  to  the  rear  for  a  car- 
tridge; returns  with  it,  and  places  himself,  facing  the 
piece,  about  eighteen  inches  to  the  rear  and  right  of 
no.  2. 


10  SERVICE    OP   THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

The  gunner  places  himself  near  the  stock,  the  left 
foot  advanced;  closes  the  vent  with  the  second  finger 
of  the  left  hand,  bending  well  forward  to  cover  himself 
by  the  breech;  turns  the  elevating  screw  with  the  right 
hand,  so  as  to  adjust  the  piece  conveniently  for  loading; 
and  makes  a  signal  for  no.  3  to  unbar. 

21.  In  the  mean  time,  nos.  1  and  2  insert  the  sponge 
by  the  following  motions : 

1st  motion.  They  insert  the  sponge  as  far  as  the  hand 
of  no.  1,  bodies  erect,  shoulders  square. 

2</  motion.  They  slide  the  hands  along  the  staff  and 
seize  it  at  arm's  length. 

3d  motion.  They  force  the  sponge  down  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  first  motion. 

ith  motion.  They  repeat  the  second  motion. 

5th  motion.  They  push  the  sponge  to  the  bottom  of 
the  bore.  No.  1  replaces  the  left  hand  on  the  staff,  back 
up,  six  inches  nearer  to  the  muzzle  than  the  right. 
No.  2  places  the  right  hand,  back  up,  between  the 
hands  of  no.  1. 

If  in  executing  these  motions,  or  the  corresponding 
ones  with  the  rammer,  it  be  found  that  the  sponge  or 
rammer  is  at  home  at  the  third  or  fourth  motion,  then 
what  is  prescribed  for  the  fifth  motion  will  be  performed 
at  the  third  or  fourth.  The  knee  on  the  side  towards 
which  the  body  is  to  be  inclined  is  always  bent,  the 
other  straightened;  and  the  weight  of  the  body  added, 
as  much  as  possible,  to  the  effort  exerted  by  the  arms. 

3.  Sponge. 

22.  Nos.  1  and  2,  pressing  the  sponge  firmly  against 
the  bottom  of  the  bore,  turn  it  three  times  from  right 
to  left,  and  three  times  from  left  to  right;  replace  the 
hands  on  the  thighs;  and  withdraw  the  sponge  by  mo- 
tions contrary  to  those  prescribed  for  inserting  it. 

Remark.  To  handle  the  sponge  when  it  is  new  and 
fits  tight,  it  may  become  necessary  for  nos.  1  and  2  to 
use  both  hands.  In  this  case  it  will  be  inserted  and 
withdrawn  by  short  and  quick  motions. 


ART.    1.]  SIEGE    GUN.  11 

No.  2  quits  the  staff,  and  turning  towards  no.  4, 
receives  from  him  the  cartridge,  which  he  takes  in 
both  hands, .  backs  down,  and  introduces  into  the  bore 
bottom  foremost,  seams  fo  the  sides;  he  then  grasps 
the  rammer  in  the  way  prescribed  for  the  sponge. 

No.  1,  rising  upon  the  right  leg  and  turning  towards 
his  left,  passes  the  sponge  above  the  rammer  with  the 
left  hand  to  no.  3,  and  receiving  the  rammer  with  the 
right,  presents  it  as  prescribed  for  the  sponge,  except 
that  he  rests  the  rammer-head  against  the  right  side  of 
the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  sponge  is  withdrawn,  passing 
the  rammer  under  the  sponge  into  the  embrazure  with 
the  right  hand,  receives  the  sponge  from  no.  1  with 
the  left,  replaces  it  upon  the  prpp,  and  resumes  his 
post. 

No.  4,  setting  down  the  pass-box,  takes  out  the  car- 
tridge and  presents  it  in  both  hands  to  no.  2,  the  choke 
to  the  front;  returns  the  pass-box  to  its  place;  and  picks 
up  a  ball,  and  afterwards  a  wad,  should  one  be  required. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  cartridge  by  the  mo- 
tions prescribed  for  forcing  down  the  sponge. 

4.  Ram. 

23.  Nos.  1  and  2,  drawing  the  rammer  but  to  the 
full  extent  of  their  arms,  ram  with  a  single  stroke. 
No.  2  quits  the  staff,  and  turning  towards  no.  4, 
receives  from  him  the  ball  and  wad,  whilst  no.  1 
throws  out  the  rammer,  and  holds  the  head  against  the 
right  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece.  No.  2,  receiving 
successively  the  ball  and  wad,  introduces  them  into  the 
bore,  the  ball  first,  and  seizes  the  staff  with  the  left 
hand.     No.  4  then  resumes  his  post. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  ball  and  wad  together 
by  the  same  motions,  and  ram  in  the  same  manner  as 
prescribed  for  the  cartridge.  No.  2  quits  the  rammer; 
sweeps,  if  necessary,  the  platform  on  his  own  side; 
passes  the  broom  to  no.  1;  and  resumes  his  post.  No. 
1  throws  out  the  rammer,  and  places  it  upon  the  prop 


12  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

below  the  sponge;  finishes  the  sweeping;  and  resumes 
his  post. 

The  gunner  pricks,  leaving  the  priming  wire  in  the 
vent;  resumes  his  post;  and,  if  firing  beyond  point- 
blank  range,  adjusts  the  breech-sight  to  the  distance. 

5.  In  battery. 

24.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and  with 
nos.  3,  4,  5  and  6,  all  facing  towards  the  epaulment, 
embar :  nos.  1  and  2  through  the  front  spokes  of  the 
wheels,  near  the  felly,  under  and  perpendicularly  to 
the  cheeks;  nos.  3  and  4  under  the  rear  of  the  wheels; 
and  nos.  5  and  6  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  stock. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  commands  Heave,  and 
the  piece  is  run  into  battery;  nos.  5  and  6  being  care- 
ful to  guide  the  chase  into  the  middle  of  the  embrazure. 
As  soon  as  the  wheels  touch  the  hurter,  he  commands 
Halt.  All  unbar,  and  nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  resume 
their  posts. 

6.  Point. 

25.  No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike;  passes  the  hook 
of  the  lanyard  through  the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front 
to  rear;  and  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard  with  the 
right  hand,  the  hook  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger. 

Nos.  5  and  6  embar  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the 
trail,  near  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

The  gunner,  placing  himself  at  the  stock,  as  at  the 
command  Load,  withdraws  the  priming  wire,  and, 
aided  by  nos.  5  and  6,  gives  the  direction;  causing  the 
trail  to  be  moved  by  commanding  Left,  or  Right,  tap- 
ping, at  the  same  time,  on  the  right  side  of  the  breech 
for  no.  5  to  move  the  trail  to  the  left,  or  on  the  left 
side  for  no.  6  to  move  it  to  the  right. 

He  then  places  the  centre  point  of  the  breech-sight 
accurately  upon  the  chalk  mark  on  the  base-ring,  and 
by  the  elevating  screw  gives  the  proper  elevation,  rec- 
tifying the  direction,  if  necessary. 


ART.   1.]  SIEGE    GUN.  13 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises 
on  the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word  Ready,  making  a 
signal  with  both  hands,  at  which  nos.  5  and  6  unbar, 
and  resume  their  posts;  takes  the  breech-sight  with  the 
left  hand;  and  goes  to  the  windward  to  observe  the 
effect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3  inserts  the  tube  in  the  vent;  drops  the  handle, 
allowing  the  lanyard  to  uncoil  as  he  steps  back  to  his 
post,  holding  it  slightly  stretched  with  the  right  hand, 
the  cord  passing  between  the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand 
up;  and  breaks  to  the  rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot, 
the  left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

At  the  word  Ready,  nos.  1  and  2  take  the  chocks, 
and  breaking  off  with  the  feet  farthest  from  the  epaul- 
ment,  stand  ready  to  chock  the  wheels. 

26.  In  directing  the  piece  to  be  fired,  the  instructor 
will  designate  it  by  its  number,  as,  for  example: 

7.  Number  one — Fire. 

No.  3  gives  a  smart  pull  upon  the  lanyard. 

Immediately  after  the  discharge  of  the  piece,  nos.  1 
and  2  chock  the  wheels,  and  resume  the  erect  position. 
No.  3  resumes  the  erect  position,  and  rewinds  the  lan- 
yard in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its  handle,  returning 
it,  if  dry,  to  the  tube-pouch.  The  gunner,  having 
observed  the  effect  of  the  shot,  returns  to  his  post. 

27.  Whenever  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  by  a  lock^ 
portfire^  or  slow-match,  it  will  be  done  by  no.  3,  as  pre- 
scribed for  no.  4,  in  the  instruction  for  field  artillery. 

28.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes, 
the  series  of  commands    beginning  with  From  bat- 

TERY. 


14  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE,  [PART    1. 

Vo  chauge  poBfg, 

29.  To  change  posts,  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Change  posts. 

2.  March. 

3.  Call-off. 

At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  lay  down  their 
handspikes;  place  their  equipments  on  the  parts  of  the 
carriage  nearest  to  them;  and  face  to  their  left. 

At  the  second  command,  they  step  off,  each  advanc- 
ing one  post;  no.  2  taking  that  of  no.  1.  Nos.  2  and 
5  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  trail;  no.  2  on  the  outside 
of  all  the  cannoneers.  On  arriving  at  their  posts,  they 
face  to  the  piece,  and  equip  themselves. 

At  the  third  command,  they  call-off,  according  to  the 
posts  they  are  to  occupy. 

Vo  toad  foi'  action, 

30.  The  cannoneers  having  been  sufficiently  instruct- 
ed in  the  details  of  the  movements,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

Load  for  action — Load. 

The  piece  is  run  from  battery,  loaded,  run  into  bat- 
tery, pointed,  and  prepared  for  firing,  by  the  following 
commands  from  the  gunner:  From  battery — Load — 
In  battery — Point — Ready. 

At  the  command,  or  signal,  from  the  instructor  to 
commence  firing,,  the  gunner  gives  the  command  Fire, 
and  continues  the  action  until  the  instructor  directs  the 
firing  to  cease. 

Vo  cease  firing, 

31.  To  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  the  instructor  com- 
mands: 

Cease  firing. 


ART.   1.]  SIEGE    GUN.  15 

Whether  the  cannoneers  are  loading  by  detail  or  for 
action,  the  piece  is  sponged  out,  and  all  resume  their 
posts.  If  the  cartridge  has  been  inserted  the  loading 
will  be  completed,  unless  the  instructor  should  other- 
wise direct. 

Vo  secure  piece,  a»td  replace  itnpleauentg, 

32.  To  discontinue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  hav- 
ing ordered  the  firing  to  cease,  and  caused  the  piece  to 
be  run  into  battery,  gives  the  following  commands: 

1.  Secure  piece. 

No.  2  returns  the  tompion  to  the  muzzle.  The  gun- 
ner puts  on  the  vent-coverj  which  he  receives  from 
no.  2,  and  depresses  the  piece. 

2.  Replace  implements. 

Nos.  1  and  2  replace  the  handspikes  against  the 
epaulment,  those  of  nos.  3,  4,  5  and  6  being  passed 
to  them  by  nos.  3  and  4  for  that  purpose.  The  gun- 
ner hangs  the  pouches  upon  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

Vo  leave  tite  batiery, 

33.  The  instructor  causes  the  muskets  to  be  taken; 
forms  the  detachment  in  rear  of  the  piece;  and  marches 
it  from  the  battery  as  prescribed  in  no.  13. 

Remarks. 

34.  The  service  of  a  24-pdr.  siege  gun,  as  it  respects 
running  from  and  to  battery,  and  pointing,  is  performed 
by  five  men,  as  prescribed  for  the  siege  Howitzer  in 
Lesson  II.  Five  men  suffice  for  the  service  of  the  18 
and  12-pdrs.  To  perform,  however,  all  the  duties  inci- 
dent to  a  battery  of  heavy  artillery  on  a  war  establish- 
ment, including  transportation  and  the  mechanical 
manoeuvres,  the  details  for  its  daily  service,  at  three 


16  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

reliefs,  should  allow,  at  least,  twenty  privates  to  each 
piece. 

Vo  serve  the  piece  with  redtwed  nutubers. 

35.  The  smallest  number  of  men  with  which  heavy 
pieces  can  be  served  with  facility,  has  been  given  as 
five.  It  may  be  necessary,  however,  from  the  men 
being  disabled,  or  from  other  circumstances,  to  serve  a 
gun  with  a  less  number. 

With  four  men.  They  will  be  told  off  as  gunner,  and 
nos.  1,  2  and  3,  In  this  case,  no.  2  will,  in  addition 
to  his  own  duties,  perform  those  of  no.  4. 

With  three  men.  They  will  be  told  off  as  gunner,  and 
Nos.  1  an_d  2.  No.  1  performs  the  duties  prescribed 
for  no.  3,  as  well  as  his  own.  No.  2  performs  those 
of  no.  4,  as  in  the  preceding  case. 

When  no.  2  serves  ammunition,  he  goes  for  the  car- 
tridge, and  places  the  pass-box  behind  his  post,  before 
assisting  no.  1  to  sponge. 

OPrangporiaiioti, 

36.  The  transportation  of  a  24-pdr.  gun  requires  ten 
horses  and  five  drivers;  an  18-pdr.  eight  horses  and  four 
drivers;  a  battery  wagon  six  horses  and  three  drivers; 
and  spare  carriages — at  the  rate  of  one  for  every  five 
pieces-— require,  each,  six  horses  and  three  drivers. 

Chwi'ges,  Sfc, 

37.  The  ordinary  service  charge  of  powder  for  heavy 
guns  is  one-fourth  the  weight  of  the  shot.  For  firing 
double  shot  it  is  one-sixth  that  weight.  The  breaching 
charge  is  one-third  the  weight  of  the  shot. 

Range  of  a  24-pdr.,  at  an  angle  of  1°  30',  {point-hlanky)  charge 

6  lbs 950  yards. 

Range  of  a  24-pdr.,  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  6  lbs.  .  1900  " 
Range  of  an  18-pdr.,  at  an  angle  of  1°  30',  charge  4|  lbs.  800  " 
Range  of  an  18-pdr.,  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  4|  lbs.  .  1600      " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300      " 

The  range  of  a  12-pdr.  is  about  the  same  as  that  of  an  18-pdr. 


ART.   1.]  SIEGE    GUN.  17 


12° 

12° 

13° 

4° 

4° 

4° 


Greatest  elevation  that  a    24-pdr.  carriage  admits 
Greatest  elevation  that  an  18-pdr.  carriage  admits 
Greatest  elevation  that  a    12  pdr.  carriage  admits 
Greatest  depression  that  a    24-pdr.  carriage  admits 
Greatest  depression  that  an  18-pdr.  carriage  admits 
Greatest  depression  that  a    12-pdr.  carriage  admits 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 

38.  Wads  are  not  generally  necessary,  except  when 
firing  at  angles  of  depression;  and  then  only  one  is 
used,  and  that  on  the  ball.  When,  however,  the  piece 
has  been  fired  so  often  that  the  ball  has  caused  a  lodg- 
ment in  the  bore,  it  is  well  to  use  wads  differing  in 
length,  according  to  the  position  and  extent  of  the  lodg- 
ment, between  the  shot  and  the  cartridge. 

Hay  wads  may  be  made  by  twisting  hay  into  a  rope 
of  about  one  inch  in  diameter,  folding  it  together  of  any 
desired  length,  and  then  winding  the  folds  from  one 
end  to. the  other,  leaving  the  wad  a  little  larger  than 
the  bore. 

Breachfhg  batteries* 

39.  Breaching  batteines  established  against  walls  are, 
First  To  make  a  horizontal  section  the  length  of  the 

desired  breach  along  the  scarp,  at  one-third  its  height 
from  the  bottom  of  the  ditch,  and  to  a  depth  equal  to 
the  thickness  of  the  wall. 

Secondly,  To  make  vertical  cuts  through  the  wall, 
not  farther  than  ten  yards  apart,  and  not  exceeding  one 
to  each  piece;  beginning  at  the  horizontal  section,  and 
ascending  gradually  to  the  top  of  the  wall. 

Thirdly.  To  fire  at  the  most  prominent  points  of  the 
masonry  left  standing;  beginning  always  at  the  bottom, 
and  gradually  approaching  the  top. 

Fourthly.  To  fire  into  the  broken  mass  with  How- 
itzers until  the  breach  is  practicable. 

Breaches  of  more  than  twenty  yards  in  length  have 
been  opened  by  way  of  experiment,  and  rendered  prac- 
2# 


18  SERVICE    OF   THE    PIECE.  [PART.   1. 

ticable,  in  less  than  ten  hours,  by  about  two  hundred 
and  thirty  24-pdr.  balls  and  forty  shells  in  on«  case, 
and  by  three  hundred  18-pdr.  balls  and  forty  shells  in 
another. 

Itapidity  of  Uring, 

40.  Iron  guns  sustain  long-continued  and  rapid  firing 
better  than  brass  guns.  An  iron  gun  should  sustain 
twelve  hundred  discharges,  at  the  rate  of  twelve  an 
hour;  but  whatever  may  be  the  rate  of  fire,  it  is 
deemed  unsafe  after  that  number  of  discharges.  As 
many  as  twenty  an  hour  have  been  made  for  sixteen 
consecutive  hours. 

^Penetration  of  »hot, 

41.  The  penetration  of  balls  increases  to  a  certain 
extent  with  their  calibre.  The  mean  result,  from  seve- 
ral experiments,  gives  tlie  penetration  of  a  24-pdr.  ball, 
with  the  charge  of  one-third  of  its  weight,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  one  hundred  yards,  as  follows: 

Feet.    Inches. 

In  earth  of  old  parapets 8  6 

In  earth  recently  thrown  up 15  0 

In  oak  wood,  sound  and  hard  -----    4  6 

In  rubble  stone  masonry    ------1  10 

In  brick 3  0 


t     '->  ^, 


<5i  b 


(^c>rs'*"-i'^Keoo^ 


1^ 


Lt.RJT  Rush,  2fArt.  Helc 


VWCltUandSc. 


^^ 


24  J) dr.  gun  on  a  Siege  Carriage. 


J^l  Manoeuvring  boles 

..  2  If-ail  plate. 

„  3  Lock  chain  hook. 

-  4  lock  cTudn  bole. 

»  5  ITave  bands. 

»  6  linch  washer. 

.  /  linchpin. 


Lt.RJUiush  2*Art.J)elt. 


DM^CUlland  Sc. 


■■■^^m 


UJtJUiiiih,  2* Art.  BeU. 


J).J^CUUand  Sc. 


)#■ 


.*4 


is,-   •  t 


Q. 


O: 


a 


<w 


X 


■r 


It 


# ' 

#^^ 

^ 

«v 

.■*  '^ 

•■.».'•■• 

.^''•% 

.<-  ::■ 

* 

t* 

■  « 

^t^: 


•i- .  ■ 


ii' 


f"' 


's. 


^ 


*        +■•■ 


PLATE   6. 


Cartridge. 


Grape. 


Canister. 


U.R.HJhia\2^Art.r>elt. 


.'   ^  '\\,,\\'     \     /  '*:^'^£^^T 


'#•  ...  ■"•■^•c 


4--.*: 


.::^'-:.v-;::-. 


i      ,      .,,^   ,••  -■     '-    F-    ,  .    i     ,  ■ 


'  >^  *V.'^ 


J  :^':.  -:>'   ■„- 


r^^ 


'r, :  ;;i  v: :  '< 


ART.   1.] 


8-INCH    SIEGE    HOWITZER. 


19 


liESSON    II. 

Service  of  an  8-«mcA  Siege  Ittneitser,  mounted  on  a  'H'k-pdr. 
siege  carriage* 


(Plate  VII.) 


Handspikes 


Sponge  and  Bam- 


Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

42.  The  piece  is  in  battery  upon  its  platform. 
The  implements,  &c.,  are  arranged  as  follows: 

Three  on  the  left  of  the  carriage, 
and  two  on  the  right,  leaning 
against  the  epaulment,  in  line 
with  the  cannoneers. 

On  props,  eighteen  inches  behind 
and  parallel  to  the  cannoneers  of 
the  right,  the  sponge-head  turned 
towards  the  epaulment. 

Containing  fuzes,  a  pair  of  sleeves, 
and  a  priming-wire,  bent  at  right 
angles  at  the  point,  for  withdraw- 
ing the  cartridge  used  in  instruc- 
tion. Suspended  from  the  knob 
of  the  cascable. 

Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the 
lanyard,  wound  in  St.  Andrew's 
cross  upon  its  handle.  Sus- 
pended from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 


Havresack 


Tube-pouch 


20 


SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE. 


[part  1. 


Criuu&er's-pouch  .  . 


Ijoading-tongs 
Quadrant  .  .  .  . 
Plummet  .  .  .  . 
Scraper  .  .  .  .  . 

li^iper 

Splints     .... 


Crrummet-'fvad 


Chocks 


Tent-corer 
Tompion  ' 
Quoin    •  • 


Containing    the     gunner's    level 
breech-sight,  fingerstall,  primin 
wire,   gimlet,    vent-punch,    an 
chalk.    Suspended  from  the  knob 
of  the  cascable. 

In  a  basket,  or  on  a  shelf,  against 
the  epaulment,  outside  of  and 
near  the  handspikes  of  the  left. 

On  the  end  of  the  hurter,  near  no.  2. 

One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  near 
the  ends  of  the  hurter. 

Covering  the  vent. 

In  the  muzzle. 

Under  the  breech. 

Leaning  against  the  epaulment,  out- 
side of  the  basket  or  shelf. 

When  several  howitzers  are  served  together,  there 
will  be  only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches 
to  each  battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same 
battery  there  will  be  one  wrench. 

One  shell  and  one  bombazine  cartridge  bag  for 
instruction — the  bag  filled  with  sawdust,  and  having 
loops  of  thread  at  the  choke  end — are  at  the  magazine, 
or  other  safe  place  in  rear  of  the  piece. 

43.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  directs  them  to  place  their  muskets 
against  the  epaulment,  and  then  explains  to  them  the 
names  and  uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomencla- 
tures of  the  howitzer,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

44.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
iHstructor  commands: 


Broom 


Take  implements. 


ART.   1.]  8-INCH    SIEGE    HOWITZER.  21 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable;  takes 
off  the  vent-cover,  handing  it  to  no.  2  to  place  against 
the  epaulment,  outside  of  the  basket;  gives  the  tube- 
pouch  to  no.  3,  and  the  haversack  to  no.  4;  and  equips 
himself  with  his  own  pouch  and  the  fingerstall,  wear- 
ing the  latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand. 

No.  2  puts  on  the  sleeves. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  4  equips  himself  with  the  havresack,  which  he 
wears  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side;  takes  out 
the  sleeves;  and  assists  no.  2  to  put  them  on. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  after  passing  handspikes  to  nos.  3  and 
4  and  the  gunner,  take  each  one  for  himself.  The  gun- 
ner, receiving  his  from  no.  4,  lays  it  in  the  alignment, 
the  small  end  towards  the  epaulment,  and  two  yards  to 
his  right.  The  other  handspikes  are  held,  laid  down, 
and  resumed,  as  prescribed  in  nos.  17  and  18. 

The  gunner  directs  no.  3  to  raise  the  breech  to  ena- 
ble him  to  level  the  piece;  applies  his  level  to  ascer- 
tain the  highest  points  of  the  base-ring  and  muzzle- 
band,  which  he  marks  with  chalk;  and  resumes  his 
post. 

45.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands : 

1.  From  battery. 


The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  his  right. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  facing  from  the  epaulment,  em- 
bar  :  nos.  1  and  2  through  the  rear  spokes  of  the 
wheels,  near  the  felly,  under  and  perpendicularly  to 
the  cheeks;  and  nos.  3  and  4  under  the  manceuvring 
bolts. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command 
Heave,  which  will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be 
necessary.  He  sees  that  nos.  3  and  4  guide  the  trail 
in  prolongation  of  the  directrix  of  the  embrazure,  and 
as  soon  as  the   wheels  are  about  one  yard  from  the 


22  SERVICE    OF   THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

epaulment,  commands  Halt.     All  unbar,  and  resume 
their  posts.     Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  wheels.    - 

2.  Load  by  detail — Load. 

46.  Nos.  1,  2  and  4  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  out  the  tompion,  and  places  it  near  the 
vent-cover;  sweeps,  if  necessary,  his  side  of  the  plat- 
form; passes  the  broom  to  the  right  side  of  the  piece; 
and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  1  faces  to  his  right,  and  seizes  the  sponge-staff 
at  its  middle  with  the  right  hand,  back  up;  places  him- 
self at  the  muzzle;  forces  the  sponge  to  the  bottom  of 
the  chamber;  and  grasps  the  staff  with  both  hands :  all 
nearly  as  in  field  artillery. 

No.  3,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embars  under 
the  breech  or  knob  of  the  cascable,  until  he  receives  a 
signal  from  the  gunner  to  unbar,  when  he  resumes  his 
post. 

No.  4  goes  to  the  rear  for  a  cartridge  and  shell;  puts 
the  cartridge  in  his  havresack;  takes  the  shell  in  both 
hands;  returns  and  places  it  on  the  grummet-wad; 
and  stands,  facing  the  piece,  about  eighteen  inches  to 
the  rear  and  left  of  no.  2. 

The  gunner  places  himself  near  the  stock,  as  in  no. 
20,  and  closes  the  vent  with  the  second  finger  of  the 
left  hand;  adjusts  the  piece  with  the  quoin  to  about  one 
degree's  elevation;  and  makes  a  signal  for  no.  3  to 
unbar. 

3.  Sponge. 

47.  No.  1,  pressing  the  sponge  firmly  against  the 
bottom  of  the  chamber,  turns  it  three  times  from  right 
to  left,  and  three  times  from  left  to  right;  draws  it  out 
to  the  front  of  the  chamber;  wipes  out  the  bore;  rein- 
serts the  sponge  along  the  upper  side  of  the  bore  as  far 
as  the  chamber;  draws  it  entirely  out,  pressing  it  upon 
the  lower  side  of  the  bore;  turns  the  sponge  over 
towards  the  embrazure;  and  presents  the  rammer-head 


ART.    1.]  8-INCH    SIEGE    HOWITZER.  ^ 

against  the  right  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece,  holding 
the  staff  in  both  hands,  backs  down. 

No.  2,  as  soon  as  the  sponging  is  completed,  takes 
the  tongs  and  occupies  a  position  at  the  muzzle  corres- 
ponding to  that  prescribed  for  no.  1  on  the  right;  turns 
to  his  left  on  the  right  heel,  advancing  the  left  foot,  and 
presents  the  tongs  in  both  hands,  the  left  hand  nearest 
him,  the  tongs  opened,  their  legs  in  the  same  vertical 
plane. 

No.  4  takes  out  the  cartridge  and  inserts  it  as  far  as 
its  middle  in  the  tongs,  choke  foremost,  the  seam  down- 
wards; removes  the  stopper  from,  and  inserts  the  fuze 
into,  the  fuze  plug;  scrapes  its  end;  and  takes  the 
wiper. 

No.  2,  having  received  the  cartridge  in  the  tongs, 
makes  a  face  and  a-half  to  his  right  on  the  right  heel, 
and  breaks  off  with  the  left  foot;  places  the  right  hand 
against  the  head  of  the  left  cheek  of  the  carriage,  and 
with  the  left  hand  introduces  the  cartridge  into  the 
chamber,  keeping  the  legs  of  the  tongs  in  a  vertical 
plane;  then  slightly  withdrawing  and  closing  the  tongs, 
he  presses  them  in  the  direction  of  the  axis  of  the 
piece  against  the  end  of  the  cartridge,  and  shoves  it 
home.  Withdrawing  the  tongs,  he  makes  a  face  and 
a-half  to  his  left  on  the  right  heel,  and  puts  the  hooks 
of  the  tongs  into  the  ears  of  the  shell,  which  he  lifts 
and  holds  about  two  feet  from  the  ground,  whilst  no. 
4  wipes  it. 

No.  1,  as  soon  as  the  tongs  are  withdrawn,  inserts 
the  rammer,  and  holds  it  with  the  head  against  the 
cartridge,  the  staff  in  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

4.  Ram. 

48.  No.  1  presses  firmly  upon  the  cartridge;  throws 
out  the  rammer,  and  places  it  upon  the  props;  sweeps, 
if  necessary,  his  side  of  the  platform;  passes  the  broom 
to  the  left  side  of  the  piece;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  2  introduces  the  shell,  and  shoves  it  home  in  a 
manner  similar  to  that  prescribed  for  the  cartridge; 


24  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

withdraws  the  hooks,  and  looks  to  see  that  the  fuze  is 
in  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

If  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  horizontally,  or  at  an  angle 
of  depression,  no.  4,  having  replaced  the  wiper,  hands 
a  splint  to  no.  2,  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  2  presses  the  splint  under  the  shell  with  the  left 
hand;  replaces  the  tongs  and  broom;  and  resumes  his 
post. 

The  gunner  pricks,  leaving  the  priming-wire  in  the 
vent,  and  resumes  his  post. 

5.  In  battery. 

49.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and  with  nos 
3  and  4,  all  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embar:  nos. 
1  and  2  through  the  front  spokes  of  the  wheels,  near 
the  felly,  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the  cheeks;  and 
nos.  3  and  4  under  the  rear  of  the  wheels. 

The  gunner,  seizing  his  handspike,  embars  under  one 
of  the  manoeuvring  bolts;  gives  the  command  Heave; 
and  guides  the  piece  to  the  middle  of  the  embrazure. 
As  soon  as  the  wheels  touch  the  hurter,  he  commands 
Halt.     All  unbar,  and  resume  their  posts. 

6.  Point. 

50.  Nos.  1  and  4  embar  under  and  perpendicularly 
to  the  trail,  near  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

No.  2,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embars  under 
the  breech  or  knob  of  the  cascable. 

No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike;  passes  the  hook  of 
the  lanyard  through  the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to 
rear;  and  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard  with  the 
right  hand,  the  hook  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger. 

The  gunner,  placing  himself  at  the  stock,  as  at  the 
command  Load,  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and, 
aided  by  nos.  1  and  4,  gives  the  direction;  causing  the 
trail  to  be  moved  by  commanding  Left,  or  Right, 
tapping,  at  the  same  time,  on  the  right  side  of  the 


ART.   1.]  8-INCH    SIEGE    HOWITZER.  25 

breech  for  no.  1  to  move  the  trail  to  the  left,  or  on  the 
left  side  for  no.  4  to  move  it  to  the  right. 

He  then  places  the  centre  point  of  the  breech-sight 
accurately  upon  the  chalk  mark  on  the  base-ring,  and 
commands  Lower,  or  Raise,  tapping,  at  the  same 
time,  on  the  upper  side  of  the  knob  of  the  cascable 
with  the  left  hand,  and  drawing  out  the  quoin  with  the 
right,  in  order  to  elevate,  or  tapping  upwards  on  the 
lower  side,  and  shoving  in  the  quoin,  in  order  to  de- 
press the  piece;  rectifying  the  direction,  if  necessary. 

If  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  point-blank,  horizontally, 
or  at  an  angle  of  depression,  he  does  not  apply  the 
breech-sight. 

If  the  piece  is  masked  from  the  object  fired  at,  he 
places  himself  astride  the  stock,  or  in  rear  of  the  trail, 
and  gives  the  direction  by  the  plummet. 

To  give  the  elevation  when  the  piece  is  masked,  or 
when  the  desired  range  is  greater  than  the  breech-sight 
ranges,  he  applies  the  quadrant  to  the  upper  surface  of 
the  lock -piece,  making  the  allowance  due  to  its  incli- 
nation with  the  axis  of  the  piece,  which  ought  to  be 
previously  determined. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises 
on  the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word  Ready,  making  a 
signal  with  both  hands,  at  which  nos.  1,  2  and  4  un- 
bar, and  resume  their  posts;  takes  the  breech-sight 
with  the  left  hand;  and  goes  to  the  windward  to  observe 
the  effect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3  inserts  the  tube  in  the  vent;  drops  the  handle, 
allowing  the  lanyard  to  uncoil  as  he  steps  back  to  his 
post,  holding  it  slightly  stretched  with  the  right  hand, 
the  cord  passing  between  the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand 
up;  and  breaks  to  the  rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot, 
the  left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  on  resuming  their  posts,  break  off  with 
the  feet  farthest  from  the  epaulment,  inclining  well  to 
that  side  in  order  to  avoid  the  blast. 


26  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  L 

7.  J^umher  one  (or  the  like) — Fire. 

51.  Executed  as  in  no.  26,  except  that  the  wheels 
are  not  chocked. 

What  is  prescribed  in  no,  27  will  apply  to  this  piece. 

52.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands  beginning  with  From  battery. 

Vo  unload. 

53.  The  piece  having  been  -run  from  battery,  the 
instructor  directs  no.  2  to  take  out  the  shell  and  car- 
tridge; no.  4  carrying  them  to  their  place  in  rear  of  the 
piece.  No.  3  assists  No.  2,  by  raising  the  breech  until 
the  shell  rolls  to  the  muzzle. 

Vo  scrape  ilte  piece, 

54.  In  the  course  of  firing  it  may  become  necessary 
to  scrape  the  piece.  To  cause  this  to  be  done,  the 
instructor  directs  the  piece  to  be  moved  from  battery, 
and  then  commands: 

Scrape  the  piece. 

Nos.  1  and  2  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  the  scraper  and  wiper,  giving  the  latter 
to  no.  1 ;  thoroughly  scrapes  the  chamber  and  bore; 
draws  out  the  scrapings  with  the  spoon;  rejarns  the 
scraper  to  its  place;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  1,  enveloping  the  sponge-head  in  the  wiper, 
wipes  out  the  bore,  and  returns  the  wiper  to  no.  2, 
who  replaces  it;  puts  the  sponge  upon  the  props;  and 
resumes  his  post. 

Vo  citange  posts, 

Vo  toad  fot'  action. 

To  cease  living, 

Vo  secure  piece f  and  replace  itnpleutents, 

Vo  leave  tite  battery. 


ART.   1.]  8-lNCH    SIEGE   HOWITZER.  27 

Executed  as  in  nos.  29,  30,  31,  32  and  33;  no.  4 
assisting  no.  2  to  take  off  the  sleeves. 

To  ferve  the  piece  teith  redttced  numbers. 

Executed  as  in  no.  35. 

Vrau»poriatiitu, 

55.  The  transportation  of  an  8-inch  siege  howitzer 
requires  eight  horses  and  four  drivers. 

tyhitrffegf  i(t, 

56.   Greatest  charge  of  powder 4  lbs. 

Greatest  charge,  shell  filled  with  bullets 3  lbs. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 3  lbs.  9  oz. 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 1  lb. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 4  oz. 

.  Greatest  elevation  the  carriage  admits 15° 

Greatest  depression  the  carriage  admits 10° 

Range  at  an  angle  of  1°,  charge  4  lbs 430  yards. 

Range  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  4  lbs 1150      " 

Range  at  an  angle  of  15°,  charge  4  lbs 2300     " 

E*roof  range  of  powder 300     " 

Weight  of  shell 45  lbs. 

Weight  of  the  shell  filled  with  bullets      .....  65  lbs. 

The  black  fuze  burns  to  the  inch 2" 

The  red  fuze  burns  to  the  inch 3" 

The  green  fuze  burns  to  the  inch 4" 

The  yellow  fuze  burns  to  the  inch 5" 

At  2°     elevation,  black  fuze,  full  charge. 
At  30.25      do.       red  do.       do. 

At  4°.  25      do.       green      do.       do. 
At5°.25     do.      yellow    do.       do. 

A  proper  charge  for  enfilading,  at  the  distance  of  600 
yards,  on  a  horizontal  plane,  relief  of  the  epaulment 
seven  feet,  elevation  2°  .75,  red  fuze,  is  three  pounds. 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 

Vo  prepare  autntuniiitw, 

51.  If  the  ammunition  for  howitzers  is  to  be  pre- 
pared and  issued  by  the  artillery,  two  men,  numbered 
5  and  6,  are  added  to  each  detachment  for  that  pur- 


500  to    600  yds. 
-=  K  I    800  to    900   « 
«  £       900  to  1000    " 
^M  I  1000  to  1100    « 


28  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

pose.     They  are  sent  to  the  magazine,  where  they  are 
provided  with  the  following  implements  and  stores: 

1  Set  of  potrder  measures. 

1  Funnel. 

1  Fnze-niallet. 

1  Fuze-setter. 

1  Fnze-plug  reamer. 

1  Rasp. 

1  Basket.     Containing  fuze-plugs. 

a  Crrummet-wads,  or  )  On   which   to  place  the  shells  while 

a  Hollow  blocks.         )      putting  in  the  charge. 

1  Wiper. 

1  Budge-bar  rel. 

1  Bark  lantern. 

Toiv.     For  stoppers. 

Cartridge  bags.     Of  bombazine. 

Twine. 

Po-wder. 

Musket  bullets. 

Incendiary  composition. 

They  first  fill  and  tie  a  number  of  cartridges,  accord- 
ing to  the  directions  received  from  the  battery,  and 
then  prepare  a  corresponding  number  of  shells. 

To  fill  the  cartridges.  One  holds  the  bag,  while  the 
other  (by  means  of  the  funnel)  pours  in  the  powder. 
The  cartridges  thus  filled  are  placed  upright  in  a  box 
until  tied,  when  they  are  transported  to  the  budge- 
barrel. 

Cartridges  of  reduced  charges  for  ricochet  firings  may 
be  made  thus: 

The  charge  having  been  poured  into  the  bag,  a  wad 
of  hay  about  six  inches  in  length  is  placed  upon  it. 
This  wad  is  made  by  laying  wisps  of  hay  evenly 
together  so  as  to  form  a  cylinder  nearly  of  the  diameter 
of  the  cartridge  bag.  The  wad  is  tied  about  an  inch 
from  each  end,  and  the  ends  are  cut  squarely  off,  so  as 
to  present  an  even  surface  to  the  powder.  In  handling 
these  cartridges  the  powder  end  of  the  bag  should 
always  be  kept  downwards. 


«>   ''    »' 


I 


\^ 


■.^:j». 


•>-%kV-, 


•^..,..   rl  ^  >    .V  . 


^-  i*' 


.  ^ 


>     . 


*  >'■• 


■V  '^- 


't  c  c 


%    ^ 


x4* 


•^     ,    < 


<^  ^, 


M. 


ART.    1.]  8-INCH    SIEGE    HOWITZER.  29 

To  prepare  the  shells.  No.  5  places  one  upon  a  grum- 
met-wad; cleans  it,  if  necessary,  with  a  rasp;  drives 
in  a  fuze-plug  until  it  does  not  project  more  than  the 
tenth  of  an  inch;  and  reams  it  out  with  the  reamer. 
No.  6,  transferring  it  to  the  other  grummet-wad, 
charges  it  with  powder;  puts  in  a  stopper  of  tow; 
marks  it  with  chalk;  and  places  it  conveniently  for 
No.  4. 

If  the  shell  is  to  be  loaded  with  bullets  or  incen- 
diary composition,  it  is  charged  before  the  fuze-plug  is 
driven.  It  should  contain  about  three  hundred  and 
twenty  bullets,  and  one  pound  and  a  quarter  of  powder. 

If  filled  only  with  powder,  no.  6  marks  the  shell 
with  a  cross;  if  with  incendiary  composition,  he  makes 
a  circle  around  the  fuze-plug;  and  if  with  bullets,  he 
makes  two  circles  on  one  side.  The  shells  thus  dif- 
ferently charged  are  kept  separate. 


4 


30 


SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE. 


[part  1. 


I. essoN    III. 

Service  of  a  XOHttch  Siege  JfKwtar, 

(  Plates  VIII  and  IX. ) 


Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

58.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  &c.,  are  arranged  as  follows: 

Two  on  each  side  of  the  bed, 
against  the  cheeks,  leaning  upon 
the  four  mancevring  bolts,  the 
Handspikes  ....  small  ends  towards  the  epaul- 
ment,  those  of  the  front  hand- 
spikes even  with  the  front  of  the 
cheeks. 

Containing  fuzes,  and  a  pair  of 
sleeves.  Attached  to  the  tompion, 
and  lying  upon  the  mortar. 

Containing  the  priming-wire,  fric- 
tion tubes,  and  the  lanyard,  wound 
in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its 
handle.  Attached  to  the  tompion, 
and  lying  upon  the  mortar. 

Containing  the  gunner's  level,  gim- 
let, vent-punch,  and  chalk.  At- 
tached to  .the  tompion,  and  lying 
upon  the  mortar. 


Harresack 


Vube-pouch  .... 


Ouiuier's-pouch 


ART.    1.]  10-INCH    SIEGE    MORTAK.  31 


Qnadraiit  .  .  . 
Plummet  .  .  . 
Pointing-cord 
Hcrapcr   .... 

Wiper 

Shell-hooks 


In  a  basket,  between  the  cheeks  of 
the  mortar  bed. 


Tompion In  the  muzzle. 

Qtioin    .  .  .  t>  .  •  . 


Under  the  mortar  upon  the  bolster, 
its  handle  to  the  left. 


Pointings-stakes 
Maul 


With  the  basket. 


When  several  mortars  are  served  together,  there 
will  be  only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to 
each  battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same 
battery  there  will  be  one  hammer-wrench. 

One  shell  and  one  paper  cartridge  bag  for  instruction, 
are  at  the  magazine  or  other  safe  place  in  rear  of  the 
piece. 

59.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  directs  them  to  place  their  muskets 
against  the  epaulment,  and  then  explains  to  them  the 
names  aiTd  uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomencla- 
tures of  the  mortar,  its  bed,  and  the  battery. 

60.  To  cause  the  pointing-stakes  to  be  established  in 
position,  the  instructor  commands: 

Plant  the  pointing-stakes. 

The  gunner,  assisted  by  nos.  1  and  2,  plants  the 
stakes,  as  prescribed  in  pointing  Mortars,  no.  193. 

No.  1,  having  driven  the  pointing-stakes,  drives 
another  stake  one  yard  behind  his  post  for  holding  the 
wiper,  and  replaces  the  maul  near  the  basket. 

The  gunner  lays  the  slaok  of  the  pointing-cord  at  the 
foot  of  the  epaulment,  leaving  the  plummet  at  the  stake 
in  rear  of  the  piece. 

All  resume  their  posts. 


32  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

61.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands: 

Take  implements. 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  front  of  the  piece;  gives  to 
no.  1  the  sleeves  and  the  wiper;  to  no.  2  the  basket 
and  maul;  to  no.  3  the  tube-pouch  and  broom;  and  to 
no.  4  the  havresack;  equips  himself  with  the  gunner's 
pouch;  applies  his  level  to  ascertain  the  line  of  metal, 
which  he  marks  with  chalk;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  1  places  the  wiper  upon  the  stake  behind  him, 
and,  assisted  by  no.  3,  puts  on  the  sleeves. 

No.  2  removes  the  tompion,  which  he  places  with  the 
basket  and  maul,  one  yard  behind  him,  and  lays  the 
shell-hooks  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the 
basket. 

No.  3  lays  the  broom  on  the  ground  behind  him,  and 
equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  4  equips  himself  with  the  havresack,  which  he 
wears  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

All  take  their  handspikes. 

62.  The  handspikes  are  held  as  in  no.  17.  When 
laid  down,  they  are  returned,  except  in  one  case,  to 
their  places  on  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

63.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands: 

1.  In  battery. 

The  gunner,  making  a  half-face  to  his  right,  steps 
off,  left  foot  first,  and  places  himself  two  paces  in  rear 
of  the  platform,  facing  the  piece. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  em- 
bar  :  nos.  1  and  2  under  the  front  manoeuvring  bolts, 
and  nos.  3  and  4  under  those  in  the  rear,  engaging  the 
butts  of  their  handspikes  about  three  inches. 


ART.   1.]  10-INCH    SIEGE    MORTAR.  33 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command 
Heave,  which  will  be  repeated  as  •  often  as  may  be 
necessary.  As  soon  as  the  piece  is  on  the  middle  of 
the  platform,  he  commands  Halt.  All  unbar,  and  re- 
sume their  posts. 

2.  Load  by  detail — Load. 

64.  Nos.  1,  3  and  4  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

The  gunner,  talking  the  scraper,  places  himself  in 
front  of  the  muzzle,  and  scrapes  the  bore  and  chamber;, 
draws  out  the  scrapings  with  the  spoon;  returns  the 
scraper  to  the  basket;  and  again  places  himself  at  the 
muzzle,  one  yard  in  its  front. 

No.  1,  turning  to  his  right,  takes  the  wiper  with  the 
right  hand;  faces  to  his  left,  and  places  the  left  foot 
near  the  manoeuvring  bolt,  the  right  in  front  of  the 
muzzle,  the  left  hand  upon  the  face  of  the  piece; 
thoroughly  wipes  out  the  chamber  and  bore;  and  re- 
sumes his  post. 

No,  3,  as  soon  as  the  piece  is  wiped,  clears  the  vent 
with  the  priming-wire;  sweeps  the  platform,  if  neces- 
sary; and  resumes  his  post  and  handspike. 

Nos.  2  and  4,  facing  to  their  right — no.  2  holding  his 
handspike  at  the  middle  under  the  left  arm,  butt  end 
foremost,  and  taking  the  shell-hooks  in  the  right — go  to 
the  rear  for  a  cartridge  and  shell.  While  no.  4  is 
getting  the  cartridge,  no.  2  inserts  the  shell-hooks  in 
the  ears  of  the  shell,  and  passes  the  small  end  of  the 
handspike  through  the  ring.  In  carrying  the  shell  they 
hold  the  handspike  with  their  right  hands,  no.  4  at  the 
small  end  and  in  advance  of  no.  2.  Passing  by  the 
left  of  the  piece,  between  the  gunner  and  the  muzzle, 
they  rest  the  shell  upon  the  platform  against  the  middle 
of  the  transom. 

No.  1,  placing  the  wiper  upon  the  handspike,  receives 
the  small  end  of  the  handspike  from  no.  4,  who  gives 
the  cartridge  to  the  gunner. 

The  gunner  advances  the  left  foot,  and  places  the 
left  hand  upon  the  face  of  the  piece;  introduces  the 


34  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

cartridge  into  the  mouth  of  the  chamber  with  the  right 
hand,  and  carefully  pours  in  the  powder;  returns  the 
cartridge  bag  to  no.  4;  and  distributes  the  powder 
evenly  over  the  bottom  of  the  chamber.  In  firing  with 
paper  fuzes,  he  receives  one  from  no.  4,  and  inserts  it 
in  the  fuze-plug. 

No.  4,  returning  the  cartridge  bag  to  the  havresack, 
takes  the  wiper. 

Nos.  1  and  2  raise  the  shell  and  hold  it  about  a  foot 
from  the  ground,  while  no.  4  wipes  'it;  they  then  lift 
it  into  the  muzzle. 

The  gunner  steps  forward,  and  with  the  left  hand 
over  the  handspike,  the  right  hand  under  and  nearer  to 
it,  seizes  the  shell-hooks  and  assists  to  lower  the  shell 
gently  into  its  place.  No.  2  then  withdraws  his  hand- 
spike from  the  ring,  and  resumes  his  post.  No.  1  takes 
his  handspike.  The  gunner  adjusts  the  shell  so  that 
the  fuze  is  in  the  axis  of  the  piece;  throws  the  shell- 
hooks  to  their  place  behind  no.  2;  and,  if  firing  with 
wooden  fuzes,  uncaps  the  fuze. 

No.  4,  as  soon  as  he  wipes  the  shell,  returns  the 
wiper  to  its  place;  takes  the  slack  of  the  pointing-cord, 
which  he  lays  over  the  left  manoeuvring  bolts,  leaving 
its  end  at  the  rear  pointing-stake;  and  resumes  his  post 
and  handspike. 

3.  Point. 

65.  Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  em- 
bar  upon  the  bolster,  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the 
piece. 

The  gunner  taking  the  quadrant  from  the  basket,  ap- 
plies it  to  the  left  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand,  and  inserts  or  draws  out  the  quoin  with  the 
right,  giving  the  command  Raise,  or  Lower,  until  the 
piece  is  at  the  elevation  required — usually  45°.  Re- 
turning the  quadrant  to  the  basket — nos.  1  and  2  at 
the  same  time  unbarring  and  resuming  their  posts — 
he  places  himself  in  rear  of  the  rear  pointing-stake, 
and  holding  the  pointing-cord  in  the  left  hand  and  the 


ART.    1.]  10-INCH    SIEGE    MORTAR.  35 

plummet  in  the  right,  gives  the  direction;  commanding 
Mortar  left — Mortar  right — Muzzle  left — Muz- 
zle RIGHT — Trail  left — Trail  right,  as  may  be 
required. 

To  throw  the  mortar  to  the  left.  Nos.  2  and  4  facing 
each  other,  embar  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts.  Nos. 
1  and  3  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embar  under  the 
notches  near  them.  When  all  are  ready,  the  gunner 
gives  the  commands  Heave — Steady.  The  cannon- 
eers remain  embarred  until  he  gives  some  other  com- 
mand, or  makes  the  signal  to  unbar. 

To  throw  the  mortar  to  the  right.  Nos.  1  and  3  em- 
bar under  the  manoeuvring  bolts.  Nos.  2  and  4  embar 
under  the  notches. 

To  throw  the  muzzle  to  the  left.  Nos.  1  and  3,  facing 
towards  the  epaulment,  embar  under  the  front  notches; 
no.  1  under  the  inside  of  the  left  notch. 

To  throw  the  trail  to  the  left.  Nos.  1  and  3,  facing 
towards  the  epaulment,  embar  under  the  rear  notches; 
no.  3  under  the  inside  of  the  left  notch. 

The  muzzle  or  trail  is  thrown  to  the  right,  in  a  simi- 
lar manner  to  the  preceding,  by  nos.  2  and  4. 

The  direction  having  been  given,  the  gunner  gives 
the  word  Ready,  and  makes  a  signal  with  both  hands; 
leaves  the  plummet  at  the  stake;  returns  the  pointing- 
cord  to  the  foot  of  the  epaulment;  and  goes  to  the 
windward  to  observe  the  effect  of  the  shot. 

Nos.  1,  2  and  4,  taking  their  handspikes  with  them, 
go  four  yards  in  rear  of  the  platform,  and  face  to  the 
front;  no.  4  between  nos.  1  and  2,  their  handspikes 
held  erect  by  the  right  side,  the  right  arm  extended 
naturally. 

No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike  six  inches  in  his  front, 
parallel  to  the  edge  of  the  platform,  and  makes  ready 
a  friction  tube,  as  in  no.  25;  advancing  the  right  foot, 
he  puts  the  tube  in  the  vent;  rises  on  the  left  leg,  and 
moves  three  paces  to  the  rear  in  prolongation  of  the 
right  cheek;  faces  to  the  front;  holds  the  handle  of  the 
lanyard  with  the  right  hand,  the  lanyard  slightly 
stretched,   the  cord  passing  between  the  fingers,  back 


36  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART   1, 

of  the  hand  up;  and  breaks  to  the  rear  a  full  pace 
with  the  left  foot,  the  left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

Remark.  To  discharge  the  mortars  now  in  use  by 
means  of  a  friction  tube,  the  lanyard  should  be  passed 
under  a  rope  attached  to  and  tightly  drawn  between  the 
rear  manoeuvring  bolts,  or  through  a  loop  of  rope 
attached  to  the  rear  right  manoeuvring  bolt. 

4.  J^umber  one  (or  the  like) — Fire. 

QQ.  Executed  as  in  no.  26. 

On  the  discharge  of  the  piece,  all  resume  their  posts 
except  the  gunner,  who  waits  to  observe  the  effect  of 
the  shot.  As  soon  as  the  shot  strikes  he  resumes  his 
post. 

What  is  prescribed  in  no.  27  will  apply  to  this  piece, 
omitting  the  word  '^  lock.'' 


)> 


67.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  causes 
the  piece  to  be  moved  towards  the  rear  of  the  platform, 
directs  nos.  2  and  4  to  take  out  the  shell  and  carry  it 
to  the  rear,  and  then  resumes  the  series  of  commands 
beginning  with  In  battery. 

Vo  change  posts. 
Vo  load  for  acii4tu, 
Vo  cease  Uring. 

Executed  as  in  nos.  29,  30  and  31,  except  that  in 
changing  posts  no.  2  passes  by  the  front  of  the  piece. 

Vo  secure  piece^  and  replace  intptetnents^ 

68.  To  discontinue  the  exercise,  the  instructor,  hav- 
ing ordered  the  firing  to  cease,  and  caused  the  piece  to 
be  placed  as  at  the  command  In  battery,  gives  the 
command : 

Replace  implements. 


ART.    1.]  10-INCH    SIEGE    MORTAR.  37 

All  lay  down  their  handspikes.  No.  2  puts  in  the 
tompion,  and  assists  no.  1  to  pull  up  the  pointing- 
stakes.  The  gunner  receives  the  implements  from  the 
cannoneers,  and  replaces  them  between  the  cheeks. 


Vo  leave  the  battery. 

Executed  as  in  no.  33, 

Vranspatrtatiou, 


f- 


69.  One  mortar  wagon  is  allowed  to  each  10-inch 
siege  mortar  and  bed;  to  transport  which  requires  eight 
horses  and  four  drivers, 

Cltarges,  Sfc, 

70.    Greatest  charge  of  powder 4  lbs. 

Ordinary  service  charge 3    " 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder ,.        5    " 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 2    " 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 5  oz. 

Range,  charge  4  lbs.,  time  of  flight  21" 2100  yds. 

Range,  charge  3  lbs.,  time  of  flight  19" 1700    '• 

Range,  charge  2  lbs.,  time  of  flight  14" 1000    " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300    " 

Weight  of  the  shell 90  lbs. 

Fire  balls,  according  to  their  size,  are  fired  from 
mortars  of  corresponding  calibres.  With  a  charge  of 
one-twenty -ffth  of  its  weight  the  ball  is  thrown  from 
six  hundred  to  seven  hundred  yards. 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


Vo  prepare  ammunitiau, 

71.  If  the  ammunition  for  mortars  is  to  be  prepared 
and  issued  by  the  artillery,  two  men,  numbered  5  and 
6,  are  added  to  each  detachment  for  that  purpose. 
Their  duties  at  the  magazine  are  similar  to  those  pre- 
scribed in  no.  57. 


38  SERVICE    OF   THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

Should  wooden  fuzes  be  used,  in  addition  to  the 
implements  therein  mentioned,  a  fuze-saw  will  be 
required  for  reducing  the  fuzes  to  the  proper  lengths. 
The  shell  being  first  charged,  the  fuze,  cut  at  the  right 
length,  is  then  driven. 

The  paper  fuze  is  marked  with  the  number  of  seconds 
which  it  burns  per  inch.  It  may  be  cut  with  a  knife 
to  any  desired  length. 

Vime  of  night, 

72.  The  time  of  flight  for  siege  mortars,  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  45°,  with  ordinary  charges,  is  nearly  equal  to 
the  square  root  of  the  range  in  feet  divided  by  four. 
The  experimental  length  of  the  fuze  may  be  given  ac- 
cording to  this  rule. 

Vo  ascertain  the  distance  by  tite  report  of  nre^mrms* 

73.  Multiply  the  number  of  seconds  which  elapse 
between  seeing  the  flash  and  hearing  the  report  by 
1100;  the  product  will  be  nearly  the  distance  in  feet. 

Rapidity  of  Ariug* 

74.  Siege  mortars  can  be  fired  conveniently  at  the 
rate  of  twelve  rounds  an  hour  continuously;  but  they 
may,  in  case  of  need,  be  fired  with  greater  rapidity. 


y- 


ART.   1.]  8-INCH    SIEGE    MORTAR.  39 


I 


liESSON     IT. 
Service  mt  an  S~i9tch  Siege  Jftortar, 

(  Plates  VIII  and  IX.  ) 


Three  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  two  other 
cannoneers. 

75.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  Sic,  omitting  two  handspikes,  and 
adding  one  grummet-wad,  are  the  same  as  prescribed 
for  the  10-inch  siege  mortar  in  no.  58.  They  are 
arranged  as  prescribed  in  that  number.  The  wad  is  in 
the  basket. 

76.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  is  the  same  as  that 
prescribed  in  Lesson  III,  with  the  following  modifica- 
tions : 

At  the  command  Take  implements,  no.  1  performs 
the  duties  enjoined  on  no.  3,  and  no.  2  those  of  no. 
4,  each  in  addition  to  his  own.  No.  2  assists  no.  1  to 
put  on  the  sleeves,  and  places  the  wad  on  the  platform 
in  front  of  the  transom. 

77.  At  the  command  In  battery,  no.  1  embars 
under  the  right  front  manoeuvring  bolt.  No.  2  embars 
under  the  left  rear  manoeuvring  bolt. 

78.  At  the  command  Load,  no.  1,  having  wiped  out 
the  mortar,  places  the  wiper  upon  the  stake;  pricks; 
and,  if  necessary,  sweeps  the  platform. 


40  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

No.  2,  laying  down  his  handspike,  goes  for  a  car- 
tridge and  s^ell;  carries  the  shell  in  the  right  arm; 
passes  between  the  gunner  and  the  muzzle,  and  places 
it  on  the  wad;  gives  to  the  gunner  the  cartridge,  and — 
if  firing  with  paper  fuzes — a  fuze;  and  takes  the  wiper 
from  the  stake. 

The  gunner,  on  returning  the  scraper  to  the  basket, 
takes  the  shell-hooks  and  lays  them  on  the  ground  be- 
tween himself  and  the  muzzle.  Having  carefully 
poured  in  the  powder,  he  returns  the  cartridge  bag  to 
no.  2,  and  distributes  the  powder  evenly  over  the  bot- 
tom of  the  chamber;  puts  the  fuze  in  the  fuze-plug; 
inserts  the  hooks  in  the  ears  of  the  shell;  raises  it  about 
a  foot  from  the  ground  and  holds  it,  while  no.  2  wipes 
it;  and  then  places  it  in  the  bore. 

No.  2  replaces  the  wiper  upon  th€  stake;  lays  the 
slack  of  the  pointiiig-cord  over  the  left  manoeuvring 
bolts;  and  resumes  his  post. 

79.  At  the  command  Point,  nos.  1  and  2  embar 
under  either  of  the  front  or  rear  notches,  as  required. 
At  the  signal  from  the  gunner,  no.  1  prepares  to  fire 
the  piece,  as  prescribed  for  no.  3,  in  no.  65, 

*  Vransportaiion. 

80.  One  mortar  wagon  will  carry  three  8-inch  siege 
mortars,  with  their  beds;  to  transport  which  requires 
eight  horses  and  four  drivers. 

Charges,  *%;. 

81.  Greatest  charge  of  powder 2  lbs. 

Ordinary  service  charge 1  lb.  12  oz. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 2  lbs.  9  oz. 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 1  lb. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 4  oz. 

Range,  charge  2  lbs  ,  time  of  flight  20"      ....  1837  yds. 
Range,  charge  11  lb.,  time  of  flight  14"      ....    943    *« 

Proof  range  of  powder 300    " 

Weight  of  shell      . 45  lbs.    ' 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


ART.   1.]  COEHORN    MORTAR.  41 


li  E  S  S  O  N     V  , 


Service  of  a  Coehm'n  Jfloriar* 


(  Plate  IX.  ) 


Three  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  two  other 
cannoneers. 

82.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  &c.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  8-inch  siege  mortar  in  no. 
75.     A  24-pdr.  shell  is  used. 

83.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  is  the  same  as  that 
prescribed  in  Lesson  IV. 

To  prepare  its  ammunition,  and  to  transport  it  by- 
hand  with  ease,  two  additional  men  are  required.  The 
gunner  carries  the  basket  and  implements. 

84.  It  is  fired  either  from  behind  intrenchments,  like 
other  mortars,  or  it  may  accompany  troops  in  effecting 
lodgements  in  towns  and  fortified  places. 

85.  As  the  shell  is  without  ears,  it  should  be  strapped 
with  tin,  having  loops  attached,  through  which  a  cord 
is  passed  for  the  purpose  of  lowering  it  into  the  bore. 
The  chamber  being  cylindrical,  a  sponge  is  used, 
which  is  handled  by  no.  1. 


42  SERVICE    OF   THE   PIECE.  [PART  1. 

86.  Greatest  charge  of  powder 8  oz. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 1  lb. 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell ...  8  oz. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 2  oz. 

Range,  charge  8  oz 1200  yds. 

Range,  charge  6  oz 900    '* 

Range,  charge  4  oz 430    " 

Proof  range  of  powder 300    " 

Weight  of  shell 17  lbs. 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


ART.   1.]  10-INCH    SEA-COAST    MORTAR.  43 


liESlSON     VI. 
Serrice  of  a   t.O'dnch  Sew^oaai  Jftbrftn; 

(  Plate  IX. ) 


Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

87.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  ^c,  with  the  addition  of  one 
sponge,  are  the  same  as  prescribed  for  the  10-inch 
siege  mortar  in  no.  58.  .  They  are  arranged  as  pre- 
scribed in  that  number,  except  that  the  sponge  is  placed 
upon  props  one  yard  behind  no.  1,  the  sponge-head 
turned  towards  the  epaulment. 

88.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  is  the  same  as  that 
prescribed  in  Lesson  III,  with  the  following  modifica- 
tions : 

No.  1,  after  wiping  the  bore,  sponges  out  the  cham- 
ber; for  this  purpose  mounting  upon  the  right  cheek 
and  bolster. 

To  scrape  the  bore,  and  to  put  in  the  cartridge  and 
shell,  the  gunnet  mounts  upon  a  block  in  front  of  the 
muzzle. 

The  cartridge — its  bag  being  of  bombazine  or  flan- 
nel— is  put  directly  into  the  chamber  by  the  gunner, 
and  rammed  by  no.  1. 

To  lift  the  shell  into  the  muzzle,  nos.  2  and  3  mount 
the  cheeks,  and  are  assisted  respectively  by  the  gun- 
ner and  px).  1. 


44  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

In  giving  the  elevation,  nos.  1  and  2  are  assisted  by 
Nos.  3  and  4. 

Before  priming,  no.  3  pricks  a  second  time. 

Charges,  Sfc. 

89.  Greatest  charge  of  powder       . 10  lbs. 

Charge  of  shell  filled  with  powder 5    " 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 2    *' 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 5  oz. 

Range,  charge  10  lbs.,  time  of  flight  36" 4250  yds. 

Proof  range  of  powder 300    '* 

Weight  of  shell 90  lbs. 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


ART.   1.]  13-lNCH    SEA-COAST   MORTAR.  45 


liESSON    VII. 
Service  of  m  13-»m«*  Sem^HUHut  JfKortmr, 


(  Plate  IX.  ) 


Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

90.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  &c.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  10-inch  sea-coast  mortar  in 

no.  87. 

91.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  differs  in  no  respect 
from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  VI. 

ChwrgeSf  AV. 

92.  Greatest  charge  of  powder 20  lbs. 

Ckarge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 11    " 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 6    *' 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 6  oz. 

Range,  charge  20  lbs.,  time  of  flight  (about)  40"     .     .  4325  yds. 

Proof  range  of  powder 300    " 

Weight  of  the  shell        200  lbs. 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


46  SERVICE    OF   THE   PIECE.  [PART  1. 


Ii£SSON    Till. 
Service  of  a  Sione  Jflorttn'* 

(  Plate  IX.  ) 


Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

93.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  &c.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  10-inch  sea-coast  mortar  in 
no.  87. 

94.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  differs  in  no  respect 
from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  VI. 

A  wooden  bottom  is  placed  over  the  mouth  of  the 
chamber  to  receive  the  basket  which  contains  the 
charge  of  stones. 

Charges f  Sfc» 

95.  With  a  charge  of  a  pound  and  a-half  of  powder, 
and  one  hundred  and  twenty  pounds  of  stones,  at  an 
elevation  of  60°,  the  stones  are  thrown  from  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  to  two  hundred  and  fifty  yards. 

With  fifteen  6-pdr.  shells,  fuze  fifteen  seconds, 
charge  of  powder  one  pound,  elevation  33°,  the  shells 
may  be  thrown  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  and  fifty 
yards. 

96.  As  the  shells  are  liable  to  burst  on  leaving  the 
bore,  the  piece  is  fired  by  a  slow  match  applied  to  a 
train  of  quick  match,  giving  the  men  time  to  place 
themselves  under  cover. 


J-*^. 


,  ■->% 


-i 


"  4» 


,*i^ 


^    =^    !>         ts 


^   ^    g    §    i 


.^1 


U.RMRiLsn.2'ArtJ3tlt 


DJd^CUMaiut  Sc. 


li^# 


* 


¥  ^;^:. 


4     ■I 


K 

r^ 

fti-^-. 

""^■— X 

1          -         1 

^; 

cy- 

\ 

^1  c       S       -^^ 

dim  1 1 

-^  '^l  -".  ^«  '-T  ^  K 
^     =     =..    =     .     . 


^        it 


URS.RiLSh..  2^ArtJ)^Jt 


DJUXlelland  So 


t^^ 


1^   ,  * 


ART.   1.] 


BARBETTE    GUN. 


47 


liESSON    IX. 
Service  of  a  Cfutt  ntounted  on,  a  barbette  carriage, 

(  Plates  X,  XI  and  XII.  ) 


Remark.  The  instruction  for  a  barbette  gun,  although 
in  many  respects  precisely  the  same  as  that  for  a  siege 
gun,  is  given  in  full,  because  the  siege  gun  is  seldom 
found  in  the  forts  on  the  sea-board. 

Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 


97.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  &c.,  are  arranged  as  follows; 


Kandspikes 


Sponge 
Rammer 


Pass-box 


Two  on  each  side  of  the  carriage, 
leaning  against  the  parapet,  in 
line  with  the  cannoneers. 

One  yard  behind  the  cannoneers  of 
the  right,  the  sponge  uppermost, 
the  sponge  and  rammer-heads 
turned  from  the  parapet,  inclined 
slightly  from  the  piece,  and  sup- 
ported upon  a  prop;  or,  when 
this  cannot  be  done  conveniently, 
placed  against  the  wall,  the 
sponge  and  rammer-heads  near- 
est the  piece. 

Against  the  parapet,  outside  of  the 
pile  of  balls. 


48 


SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE. 


[part  1. 


Tube-pouch 


Crunner's-pouch 


Chocks 


Vent-corer 
Tompion    . 

Brooiu     .  . 


Budge-barrel 


Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the 
lanyard,  wound  in  St.  Andrew's 
cross  upon  its  handle.  Sus- 
pended from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 

Containing  the  gunner's  level, 
breech-sight,  fingerstall,  priming- 
wire,  gimlet,  vent-punch,  chalk- 
line,  and  chalk.  Suspended  from 
the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  at 
the  foot  of  the  parapet,  inside  the 
handspikes. 

Covering  the  vent. 

In  the  muzzle. 

Leaning  against  the  parapet,  out- 
side of  the  pile  of  balls. 

Containing  cartridges,  at  the  safest 
and  most  convenient  place  in  rear 
of  the  piece. 


When  several  guns  are  served  together,  there  will  be 
only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to  each 
battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same  battery 
there  will  be  one  worm,  one  ladle,  and  one  wrench. 

The  balls  are  regularly  piled  on  the  banquette,  on 
the  left  of  the  piece. 

The  wads  are  placed  between  the  parapet  and  the 
balls,  partly  resting  on  them. 

98.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  explains  to  them  the  names  and 
uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures  of  the 
gun,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 


ART.    1.]  BARBETTE    GUN.  49 

99.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands: 

Take  iMPLEMENts. 

The  gunner  mounts  upon  the  tongue;  takes  off  the 
vent-cover,  handing  it  to  no.  2  to  place  against  the 
parapet,  outside  of  the  pass-box;  gives  the  tube-pouch 
to  no.  3;  equips  himself  with  his  own  pouch  and  the 
fingerstall,  wearing  the  latter  on  the  second  finger  of 
the  left  hand;  levels  the  piece  by  the  elevating  screw; 
appUes  his  level  to  ascertain  the  line  of  metal,  which, 
with  the  assistance  of  no.  2,  he  marks  with  the  chalk- 
line;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  after  passing  handspikes  to  nos.  3  and 
4,  take  each  one  for  himself. 

100.  The  handspike  is  held  in  both  hands;  the  hand 
nearest  to  the  parapet  grasping  it  near  the  small  end 
and  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  back  of  the  hand 
down,  elbow  touching  the  body;  the  other  hand  back 
up,  the  arm  extended  naturally;  the  butt  of  the  hand- 
spike upon  the  ground  on  the  side  farthest  from  the 
parapet,  and  six  inches  in  advance  of  the  alignment. 

101.  When  the  cannoneer  lays  down  his  handspike, 
he  places  it  directly  before  him,  about  six  inches  in 
advance  of,  and  parallel  to  the  alignment,  the  small  end 
towards  the  parapet;  and  whenever  he  thus  lays  it 
down  for  the  performance  of  any  particular  duty,  he 
will  resume  it  on  returning  to  his  post  after  the  comple- 
tion of  that  duty. 

102.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece 
to  be  executed  by  the  following  commands : 

1.  Prom  battery. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  his  right. 
5 


50  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  facing  from  the  parapet,  embar, 
near  the  tire :  nos.  1  and  2 — first  placing  the  chocks  on 
the  rails  in  front  of  the  rollers — through  the  front 
spokes  of  the  wheels,  over  the  front  manoeuvring  bolts; 
and  nos.  3  and  4  through  the  rear  spokes,  under  the 
rear  manoeuvring  bolts. 

Should  there  be  no  rear  manoeuvring  bolt,  nos.  3  and 
4  embar  under  the  braces,  near  the  manoeuvring  staples. 

All  bping  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command 
Heave,  which  will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be 
necessary.  As  soon  as  the  face  of  the  piece  is  about 
one  yard  from  the  parapet,  he  commands  Halt.  All 
unbar,  and  resume  their  posts.  Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the 
rollers. 

2.  Load  by  detail — Load, 

103.  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  out  the  tompion,  and  places  it  near  the 
vent-cover. 

No.  1  faces  once  and  a-half  to  his  left;  steps  over  the 
sponge  and  rammer;  faces  to  the  piece;  takes  the 
sponge  with  both  hands,  the  backs  down,  the  right 
hand  three  feet  from  the  sponge-head,  the  left  hand 
eighteen  inches  nearer  to  it;  returns  to  the  piece, 
placing  the  left  foot  on  the  rail  of  the  chassis  in  line 
with  the  face  of  the  piece,  the  right  in  the  most  conve- 
nient position;  and  rests  the  end  of  the  sponge  in  the 
muzzle,  the  staff  in  the  prolongation  of  the  bore,  sup- 
ported by  the  right  hand,  the  right  arm  extended,  the 
left  hand  flat  against  the  side  of  the  thigh. 

Remark.  In  order  that  nos.  1  and  2  may  load  with 
facility  without  standing  on  the  chassis,  a  banquette 
should  be  placed  between  the  head  of  the  chassis  and 
the  wall,  or  a  platform  attached  to  the  head  of  the 
chassis. 

No.  2  steps  upon  the  rail  on  his  side,  and  occupies  a 
position  on  the  left  of  the  piece  corresponding  to  that 
of  no.  1  on  its  right.  He  seizes  the  staff  with  the  left 
hand,  back  down,  near  to  and  outside  of  the  hand  of 
no.  1. 


ART.   1.]  BARBETTE    GUN.  51 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  sponge  is  inserted  in  the  bore, 
steps  over  the  rammer  and  seizes  the  staff  with  both 
hands,  as  prescribed  for  the  sponge;  returns  to  his  post; 
and  stands  ready  to  exchange  with  no.  1. 

No.  4  takes  the  pass-box  and  goes  to  the  rear  for  a 
cartridge;  returns  with  it,  and  places  himself,  facing 
the  piece,  about  eighteen  inches  to  the  rear  and  right 
of  no.  2. 

The  gunner  mounts  upon  the  tongue  of  the  chassis, 
placing  the  left  foot  about  six  inches  from  the  rear  tran- 
som of  the  gun  carriage,  and  breaks  well  to  the  rear 
with  the  right  foot,  the  toe  to  the  right;  closes  the  vent 
with  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand,  bending  well 
forward  to  cover  himself  by  the  breech;  and  turns  the 
elevating  screw  with  the  right  hand,  so  as  to  adjust  the 
piece  conveniently  for  loading. 

104.  In  the  mean  time,  nos.  1  and  2  insert  the  sponge 
by  the  following  motions: 

1st  motion.  They  insert  the  sponge  as  far  as  the  hand 
of  no.  1,  bodies  erect,  shoulders  square. 

^d  motion.  They  slide  the  hands  along  the  staff  and 
seize  it  at  arm's  length. 

Bd  motion.  They  force  the  sponge  down  as  prescribed 
in  the  first  motion. 

4:th  motion.  They  repeat  the  second  motion. 

5th  motion.  They  push  the  sponge  to  the  bottom  of 
the  bore.  No.  1  replaces  the  left  hand  on  the  staff, 
back  up,  six  inches  nearer  to  the  muzzle  than  the  right. 
No.  2  places  the  right  hand,  back  up,  between  the 
hands  of  no.  1. 

If  in  executing  these  motions,  or  the  corresponding 
ones  with  the  rammer^  it  be  found  that  the  sponge  or 
rammer  is  at  home  at  the  third  or  fourth  motion,  then 
what  is  prescribed  for  the  fifth  motion  will  be  performed 
at  the  third  or  fourth.  The  knee  on  the  side  towards 
which  the  body  is  to  be  inclined  is  always  bent,  the 
other  straightened;  and  the  weight  of  the  body  added, 
as  much  as  possible,  to  the  effort  exerted  by  the  arms. 


52  service  of  the  piece.  [part  1. 

3.  Sponge. 

105.  Nos.  1  and  2,  pressing  the  sponge  firmly  against 
the  bottom  of  the  bore,  turn  it  three  times  from  right 
to  left,  and  three  times  from  left  to  right;  replace  the 
hands  on  the  thighs;  and  withdraw  the  sponge  by  mo- 
tions contrary  to  those  prescribed  for  inserting  it. 

Remark.  To  handle  the  sponge  when  it  is  new  and 
fits  tight,  it  may  become  necessary  for  nos.  1  and  2  to 
use  both  hands.  In  this  case  it  will  be  inserted  and 
withdrawn  by  short  and  quick  motions. 

No.  2  quits  the  staff,  and  turning  towards  no.  4, 
receives  from  him  the  cartridge,  which  he  takes  in  both 
hands,  backs  down,  and  introduces  into  the  bore  bottom 
foremost,  seams  to  the  sides;  he  then  grasps  the  ram- 
mer in  the  way  prescribed  for  the  sponge. 

No.  1,  rising  upon  the  right  leg  and  turning  towards 
his  left,  passes  the  sponge  above  the  rammer  with  the 
left  hand  to  no.  3,  and  receiving  the  rammer  with  the 
right,  presents  it  as  prescribed  for  the  sponge,  except 
that  he  rests  the  rammer-head  against  the  right  side  of 
the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  sponge  is  withdrawn,  passing 
the  rammer  under  the  sponge  with  the  right  hand,  re- 
ceives the  sponge  from  no.  1  with  the  left,  replaces  it 
upon  the  prop,  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  4,  setting  down  the  pass-box,  takes  out  the  car- 
tridge and  presents  it  in  both  hands  to  no.  2,  the  choke 
to  the  front;  returns  the  pass-box  to  its  place;  and  picks 
up  a  ball,  and  afterwards  a  wad,  should  one  be  required. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  cartridge  by  the  mo- 
tions prescribed  for  forcing  down  the  sponge. 

4.  Ram. 

106.  Nos.  1  and  2,  drawing  the  rammer  out  to  the 
full  extent  of  their  arms,  ram  with  a  single  stroke.  No. 
2  quits  the  staff,  and  turning  towards  no.  4,  receives 
from  him  the  ball  and  wad,  while  no.  1  throws  out  the 
rammer,  and  holds  the  head  against  the  right  side  of 


ART.   1.]  BARBETTE    GUN.  53 

the  face  of  the  piece.  No.  2,  receiving  successively 
the  ball  and  wad,  introduces  them  into  the  bore,  the 
ball  first,  and  seizes  the  staff  with  the  left  hand.  No. 
4  then  resumes  his  post. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  ball  and  wad  together 
by  the  same  motions,  and  ram  in  the  same  manner  as 
prescribed  for  the  cartridge.  No.  2  quits  the  rammer; 
sweeps,  if  necessary,  the  platform  on  his  own  side; 
passes  the  broom  to  no.  1;  and  resumes  his  post.  No. 
1  throws  out  the  rammer,  and  places  it  upon  the  prop 
below  the  sponge;  finishes  the  sweeping;  and  resumes 
his  post. 

The  gunner  pricks,  leaving  the  priming-wire  in  the 
vent,  and,  if  firing  beyond  point-blank  range,  adjusts 
the  breech-sight  to  the  distance. 

5.  In  battery. 

107.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  rollers,  and  with 
nos.  3  and  4,  all  facing  towards  the  parapet,  embar: 
nos.  1  and  2  through  the  front  spokes  of  the  wheels, 
near  the  tire,  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts;  and  nos.  3 
and  4  under  the  braces,  near  the  manoeuvring  staples. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  commands  Heave,  and 
the  piece  is  run  into  battery;  the  gunner  following  up 
the  movement.  As  soon  as  the  rollers  touch  the  hur- 
ters,  he  commands  Halt.  All  unbar,  and  nos.  1,  2,  3 
and  4  resume  their  posts. 

6.  Point. 

108.  No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike;  passes  the 
hook  of  the  lanyard  through  the  eye  of  a  tube  from 
front  to  rear;  and  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard  with 
the  right  hand,  the  hook  between  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger. 

Nos.  1  and  4  go  to  the  traverse  wheels,  and,  facing 
towards  the  parapet,   embar  under  the  fork-bolts   or 
under  the  wheels.     No.  1,  in  passing  from  and  to  his 
post,  moves  on  the  outside  of  no.  3. 
5* 


54  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  aided 
by  nos.  1  and  4,  gives  the  direction;  causing  the  trail 
to  be  moved  by  commanding  Left,  or  Right,  tapping, 
at  the  same  time,  on  the  right  side  of  the  breech  for 
no.  1  to  move  the  chassis  to  the  left,  or  on  the  left  side 
for  no.  4  to  move  it  to  the  right. 

He  then  places  the  centre  point  of  the  breech-sight 
accurately  upon  the  chalk  mark  on  the  base-ring,  and 
by  the  elevating  screw  gives  the  proper  elevation,  rec- 
tifying the  direction,  if  necessary. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises 
on  the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word  Ready,  making  a 
signal  with  both  hands,  at  which  nos.  1  and  4  unbar, 
and  resume  their  posts;  takes  the  breech-sight  with  the 
left  hand,  and  receiving  the  tube  from  no.  3,  inserts  it 
in  the  vent;  dismounts  from  the  tongue;  and  goes  to 
the  windward  to  observe  the  effect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3  drops  the  handle,  allowing  the  lanyard  to  un- 
coil as  he  steps  back  to  his  post,  holding  it  slightly 
stretched  with  the  right  hand,  the  cord  passing  between 
the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up,  and  breaks  to  the 
rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  the  left  hand  against 
the  thigh. 

At  the  word  Ready,  nos.  1  and  2  take  the  chocks, 
and,  breaking  oflf  with  the  feet  farthest  from  the  para- 
pet, stand  ready  to  chock  the  rollers. 

109.  In  directing  the  piece  to  be  fired,  the  instructor 
will  designate  it  by  its  number,  as,  for  example : 

7.  J^umber  one — Fire. 

No.  3  gives  a  smart  pull  upon  the  lanyard.  j 

Immediately  after  the  discharge  of  the  piece,  nos.  1 
and  2  chock  the  rollers,  and  resume  the  erect  position. 
No.  3  resumes  the  erect  position,  and  rewinds  the  lan- 
yard in  St.  Andrew^s  cross  upon  its  handle,  returning 
it,  if  dry,  to  the  tube-pouch.  The  gunner,  having 
observed  the  effect  of  the  shot,  returns  to  his  post. 


ART.   1.]  BARBETTE    GUN.  56 

110.  Whenever  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  by  a  locky 
portfire,  or  slowmatch,  it  will  be  doneJ^y  no.  3,  as  pre- 
scribed for  no.  4,  in  the  instruction  for  field  artillery. 

111.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands  beginning  with  From  bat- 
tery. 

Vo  chamge  posts, 

112.  To  change  posts,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Change  posts. 

2.  March. 

3.  Call-off. 

At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  lay  down  their 
handspikes;  place  their  equipments  on  the  parts  of  the 
carriage  nearest  to  them;  and  face  to  their  left. 

At  the  second  command,  they  step  off,  each  ad- 
vancing one  post;  no.  2  taking  that  of  no.  1.  Nos.  2 
and  3  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  chassis;  no.  2  on  the  out- 
side of  all  the  cannoneers.  On  arriving  at  their  posts, 
they  face  to  the  piece,  and  equip  themselves. 

At  the  third  command,  they  call-off,  according  to  the 
posts  they  are  to  occupy. 

TTo  toad  for  Action, 

113.  The  cannoneers  having  been  sufficiently  in- 
structed in  the  details  of  the  movements,  the  instructor 
commands : 

Load  for  action — Load. 

The  piece  is  run  from  battery,  loaded,  run  into  bat- 
tery, pointed,  and  prepared  for  firing,  by  the  following 
commands  from  the  gunner:  From  battery — Load — 
In  battery — Point — Ready. 

At  the  command,  or  signal,  from  the  instructor  to 
commence  firing,  the  gunner  gives  the  command  Fire, 


56  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

and  continues  the  action  until  the  instructor  directs  the 
firing  to  cease. 

QTo  cease  firing* 

114.  To  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

Cease  firing. 

Whether  the  cannoneers  are  loading  by  detail  or  for 
action,  the  piece  is  sponged  out,  and  all  resume  their 
posts.  If  the  cartridge  has  been  inserted  the  loading 
will  be  completed,  unless  the  instructor  should  other- 
wise direct. 

Vo  secure  piece,  and  replace  impMenients, 

115.  To  discontinue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  hav- 
ing ordered  the  firing  to  cease,  and  caused  the  piece  to 
be  run  into  battery,  gives  the  following  commands : 

1.  Secure  piece. 

No.  2  returns  the  tompion  to  the  muzzle.  The  gun- 
ner puts  on  the  vent-cover,  which  he  receives  from 
no.  2,  and  depresses  the  piece. 

2.  Replace  implements. 

Nos.  1  and  2  replace  the  handspikes  against  the  para- 
pet, nos.  3  and  4  passing  theirs  to  them  for  that  pur- 
pose. The  gunner  hangs  the  pouches  upon  the  knob 
of  the  cascable. 

Vo  ieave  the  baiiery. 

116.  The  instructor  forms  the  detachment  in  rear  of 
the  piece,  and  marches  it  from  the  battery  as  pre- 
scribed in  no.  13. 


57 

f    j^^j>^   J.]  BARBETTE   GUN. 

To  »ert>e  the  piece  n>iih  red^iced  numbers. 

Executed  as  in  no.  35. 

Chmrges,  Sfe, 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 

l^ads, 

Kapidiiy  of  nring, 

Penetration  of  shot. 

See  nos.  38,  40  and  41. 


58  SERVICE    OP   THE    PIECE.  [PART.   1. 


Service  of  an  Scinch  Sea-Coagt  MIou4ixer  tnonnted  on  m 
barbette  carriage* 


(  Plates  X,  XI,  XII  and  XIII. ) 


Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

117.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  &c. ,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  barbette  gun  in  no.  97,  sub- 
stituting havresack — worn  by  no.  4  from  the  right 
shoulder  to  the  left  side — for  pass-box. 

The  shells  are  at  the  magazine,  or  other  safe  position, 
and  are  brought,  as  required,  to  the  place  prescribed 
for  the  budge-barrel. 

118.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  does  not  differ 
materially  from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  IX. 

It  is  loaded  with  a  shell,  which  is  attached  to  a  sabot. 
The  shell  is  brought  up  by  no.  4,  together  with  the  car- 
tridge, and  is  set  home  in  the  same  manner  as  the  ball, 
except  that  it  is  not  rammed. 

Charge»f  SCc, 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


UltJIJtush.  2^ArtJ)e,U. 


V.M^CltZlarui  Sc. 


1*3 


*■ 


,' ,  'J 


'^  ^  I  ^ 


*  '^  ^x  <=       tr  ^  ^ 


II 


It  RJLRu^h.. -.ArtJ)eM. 


VJinClelland.  Sc. 


p 


^^■ 


%^ 


Trf^^' 


^i 


c^ 


E 


h 


75 


>      1 


^  -;  is 


r~4  c\,  cr^  -^j,  ><^  ;o 


LtRMRvLsH,  2f^ArtJ)elt. 


DM^OcUand,  Sc 


5,«-  r  r 
c'  c  * 


%^^^ 


#t       .^ 


7 


Tl 


V 


>  '>>^ 

J   J    > 

>  >  >^J 

▼           •, 

■>  ■>  t  f 

>>  i 

>    3    J    J 

\"V 

i'     t 


i:  ♦• 


lilt 


■'    ♦ 


Zr.  RS-IUbsfi.  ^'^ArtJ^e/^. 


D-WCUUeuid  So. 


^^^ 

r* 


ART.    1.]         10-IN.  SEA-COAST  HOW. — BARBETTE.  59 


I 


I.E8SON     XI. 

Serrice  of  a  lO-ttieA  Sea-Coast  MMmeHser  ntouuted  on  a 
barbette  carriage. 


(  Plates  X,  XI,  XII  and  XIII.  ) 


Seven  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  six  other 
cannoneers. 

119.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  &c.,with  the  addition  of  one  hand- 
spike, and  their  arrangement,  are  the  same  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  8-inch  sea-coast  howitzer  in  no.  117. 

120.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  varies  but  slightly 
from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  X. 

The  shell  is  brought  up  in  the  following  manner: 
No.  6  takes  the  handspike  and  goes  for  the  shell,  fol- 
lowed by  no.  5.  He  passes  the  small  end  of  the  hand- 
spike through  the  ring  of  the  shell-hooks,  if  the  shell 
has  ears,  or  through  the  loop  of  the  rope  handle;  no.  5 
holds  the  small  end  of  the  handspike  with  the  right 
hand,  no.  6  the  butt  end,  no.  5  in  front.  They  bring 
it  up  on  the  left  of  the  piece,  and  place  themselves 
parallel  to  the  parapet,  no.  5  behind  no.  2.  No.  5, 
stepping  between  the  parapet  and  the  face  of  the  piece, 
gives  his  end  of  the  handspike  to  no.  1,  and  places 
himself  on  the  tongue,  or  on  the  platform,  opposite  to 
the  muzzle;  no.  6  gives  his  end  of  the  handspike  to 
no.  2.  Nos.  1  and  2  raise  the  shell  until  it  is  opposite 
to  the  muzzle,  when  no.  5,  applying  his  hands  under 
it,  raises  the  sabot  and  inserts  it  in  the  muzzle.  No.  2 
withdraws  the  handspike  and  passes  it  to  no.  6,  who 
replaces  it.  No.  5  pushes  the  shell  into  the  muzzle, 
and  returns  to  his  post. 

^  €fharg€gf  A*c. 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


60 


SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE. 


[part  1. 


X 


I.ESSON     XII. 
Serrice  of  a  Gun  tnounied  on  a  casemate  carriage, 

(  Plate  XIV. ) 


Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

121.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  &c.,  are  arranged  as  follows: 


Truck-handspikes 


EleTating-hand- 
spikes     


Traversing-hand- 
spikes     


Roller-handspike    . 


One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage, 
leaning  against  the  wall,  in  line 
with  the  cannoneers. 

One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage, 
leaning  against  the  wall,  behind 
nos.  3  and  4.* 

One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage, 
leaning  against  the  wall,  oppo- 
site to  the  end  of  the  tongue.* 

Leaning  against  the  wall,  behind 
the  gunner,  or  laid  down  in  the 
alignment  on  his  right. 


*  These  are  manauvring  handspikes.  With  two  pieces  in  one 
casemate,  or  where  the  pieces  are  not  separated  by  piers,  they  may 
be  placed  against  the  nearest  wall,  or  laid  down  in  the  most  conve- 
nient position. 


ART.    1.] 


CASEMATE    GUN. 


ei 


ISpouge    . 
Rammer 


Pass-box. 


Tnbe-ponch 


Cruiiuer's-ponch 


Chocks 


Vent-corer 


Tompion 


Broom 


Budge-barrel  . 


About  one  yard  behind  the  can- 
noneers of  the  right,  the  sponge 
uppermost,  the  sponge  and  ram- 
mer-heads turned  from  the  em- 
brazure,  inclined  slightly  from 
the  piece,  and  supported  upon  a 
prop  or  block. 

Behind  no.  4. 

Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the 
lanyard,  wound  in  St.  Andrew's 
cross  upon  its  handle.  Sus- 
pended from  the  knob  of  the 
cascable. 

Containing  the  gunner's  level, 
breech-sight,  fingerstall,  prim- 
ing-wire, gimlet,  vent-punch, 
chalk-line,  and  chalk.  Sus- 
pended from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 

One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage, 
on  the  front  transom  of  the 
chassis,  handles  outwards. 

Covering  the  vent. 

In  the  muzzle. 

Leaning  against  the  scarp  wall,  on 
the  left  of  the  piece. 

Containing  cartridges,  at  the  safest 
and  most  convenient  place  in 
rear  of  the  piece. 

When  several  guns  are  served  together,  there  will  be 
only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to  each 
battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same  battery 
there  will  be  one  worm,  one  ladle,  and  one  wrench. 

The  balls  are  regularly  piled  against  the  wall,  behind 
no.  2. 

6 


62  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART   1. 

The  wads  are  placed  between  the  wall  and  the  balls, 
partly  resting  on  them. 

122.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  explains  to  them  the  names  and 
uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures  of  the 
gun,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

123.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands: 

Take  implements. 

The  gunner  mounts  upon  the  tongue;  takes  off  the 
vent-cover,  handing  it  to  no.  2  to  place  against  the 
scarp;  gives  the  tube-pouch  to  no.  3;  and  equips  him- 
self with  his  own  pouch  and  the  fingerstall,  wearing 
the  latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand.  With 
the  assistance  of  no.  3  he  levels  the  piece,  and  applies 
his  level  to  ascertain  the  line  of  metal,  which,  with  the 
assistance  of  no.  2,  he  marks  with  the  chalk-line.  (If 
the  gun  has  permanent  sights,  this  is  only  necessary  for 
instruction,  or  for  verifying  the  sight.)  He  then  takes 
the  roller-handspike,  and  resumes  his  post.  This  hand- 
spike is  held  vertically  with  the  right  hand,  the  lower  end 
upon  the  ground  in  line  with  the  toes,  the  arm  extended 
naturally. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

Nos.  1  and  2  take  the  truck-handspikes  with  the  hand 
farthest  from  the  wall,  and  carry  them  to  that  side, 
holding  them  vertically,  the  lower  end  upon  the  ground 
in  line  with  the  toes,  the  arm  extended  naturally. 

124.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands: 

1.  From  battery. 

The  gunner  embars  in  the  left  mortice  of  the  roller. 
Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  from  the  scarp  wall,  embar  in 
the  most  convenient  front  mortices  of  the  truck-wheels. 


ART.   1.]  CASEMATE    GUN.  63 

the  hand  farthest  from  the  carriage  at  the  top  of  the 
handspike,  the  other  hand  eight  inches  lower. 

Nos.  3  and  4  go  to  the  assistance  of  nos.  1  and  2, 
and,  facing  towards  them,  seize  the  handspikes  with 
both  hands  between  those  of  nos.  1  and  2. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  in  applying  themselves  to  the  car- 
riage, either  to  run  it  from  or  to  battery,  break  to  the 
rear  with  the  foot  nearest  to  the  carriage. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  presses  the  roller  under 
the  rear  transom  of  the  gun  carriage,  by  bearing  down 
upon  his  handspike,  and  gives  the  command  Heave. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  act  together,  and  bear  upon  the 
handspikes  until  they  are  nearly  down  to  the  rails. 
The  gunner  then  disengages  the  roller  from  under  the 
transom  by  raising  his  handspike,  and  commands 
Unbar.  Nos.  1  and  2  let  go  the  handspikes  with  the 
hand  nearest  to  the  carriage,  and  chock  the  wheels. 
Nos.  3  and  4  withdraw  the  handspikes  and  pass  them 
to  nos.  1  and  2,  who  reinsert  them  in  the  front  mortices. 

The  gunner  again  bearing  down  upon  his  handspike, 
gives  the  command  Heave,  and  so  on,  until  the  face 
of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the  wall,  when, 
raising  his  handspike,  he  commands  Halt,  and  shifts 
it  into  the  right  mortice  of  the  roller.  Nos.  1  and  2 
chock  the  wheels,  and  replace  their  handspikes  against 
the  wall.     All  resume  their  posts. 

2.  Load  by  detail — Load. 

125.  Executed  as  in  nos.  103  and  104,  with  the  fol- 
lowing modification:  no.  3,  facing  towards  the  scarp, 
embars  under  the  breech,  and  maintains  the  piece  in  a 
convenient  position  for  inserting  the  sponge,  until  he 
receives  a  signal  from  the  gunner  to  unbar. 

3.  Sponge. 

126.  Executed  as  in  no.  105. 


64  service  of  the  piece.  [part  1. 

4.  Ram. 

127.  Executed  as  in  no.  106. 

5.    In    BATTERY. 

128.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and,  facing 
from  the  scarp  wall,  apply  their  hands  to  the  front  of 
the  cheeks. 

Nos.  3  and  4,  facing  towards  the  scarp  wall,  lay  hold 
of  the  handles. 

The  gunner  bears  down  carefully  upon  the  roller- 
handspike,  and  the  piece  is  run  into  battery.  As  soon 
as  the  wheels  touch  the  hurters,  he  commands  Halt. 
Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  resume  their  posts. 

6.  Point. 

129.  Nos.  1  and  4  take  the  traversing-handspikes, 
and,  facing  towards  the  scarp  wall,  embar  under  the 
ends  of  the  rear  transom  of  the  chassis.  No.  1,  in 
passing  from  and  to  his  post,  moves  on  the  outside  of 
no.  3. 

When  the  elevation  is  given  by  the  quoin,  no.  2 
takes  an  elevating-handspike  and  embars  upon  the  left 
cheek  under  the  reinforce. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  aided 
by  nos.  1  and  4,  gives  the  direction,  as  in  no.  108. 

He  then  applies  the  breech-sight,  if  necessary,  and 
points  the  piece;  commanding  Lower,  or  Raise,  tap- 
ping, at  the  same  time,  on  the  upper  side  of  the  knob  of 
the  cascable  with  the  left  hand  and  drawing  out  the 
quoin  with  the  right,  in  order  to  elevate,  or  tapping 
upwards  on  the  lower  side  and  shoving  in  the  quoin,  in 
order  to  depress  the  piece. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises 
on  the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word  Ready,  making  a 
signal  with  both  hands,  at  which  nos.  1,  2  and  4  unbar, 
replace  their  handspikes,  and  resume  their  posts;  takes 
the  breech-sight  with  the  left  hand,  the  roller-handspike 


ART.    1.]  CASEMATE    GUN.  65 

with  the  right,  and  disposes  himself  to  observe  the 
effect  of  the  shot. 

If  the  elevation  is  given  by  a  screw,  no.  3  turns  its 
handle  by  direction  of  the  gunner. 

No.  3,  having  passed  the  hook  of  the  lanyard  through 
the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to  rear,  inserts  it  in  the 
vent,  and  stretches  the  lanyard  as  in  no.  108. 

At  the  word  Ready,  nos.  1  and  2  take  the  chocks, 
and,  breaking  off  with  the  feet  farthest  from  the  wall, 
stand  ready  to  chock  the  wheels. 

7.  JVumber  one  (or  the  like) — Fire. 

130.  Executed  as  in  no.  109. 

What  is  prescribed  in  no.  110  will  apply  to  this  piece. 

131.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands  beginning  with  From  battery. 

To  change  posts. 

To  ioaa  for  action. 

To  cease  Hiring* 

Vo  secure  piece,  an4t  replace  intplements. 

Executed  as  in  nos.  112,  113,  114  and  115. 

Vo  leare  the  battery. 

132.  The  instructor  forms  the  detachment  in  rear  of 
the  piece,  and  marches  it  from  the  battery  as  pre- 
scribed in  no.  13. 

133.  Remark.  The  service  of  a  gun  mounted  on  a 
casemate  carriage  of  the  old  pattern  (which  is  without 
the  eccentric  roller)  will  require  the  following  modifi- 
cation: The  roller-handspike  is  dispensed  with,  and  the 
gunner,  at  the  command  From  battery,  moves  two 
paces  to  his  right. 

Vo  serve  the  piece  ufith  reduced  nmmbers. 

Executed  as  in  no.  35. 
6» 

■  4 


66  SERVICE    OF   THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

tyitargegf  Cflc, 

134.  The  ordinary  service  charge  of  powder  for 
heavy  guns  is  one-fourth  the  weight  of  the  shot.  For 
firing  double  shot  it  is  one-sixth  that  weight. 

Range  of  a  42-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  1°  30',  charge  IO5  lbs.     860  yds. 
Range  of  a  42-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  5°,  charge  IO5  lbs.  .  1955    ** 
Range  of  a  32-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  1°  30',  charge  8  lbs.     800    " 
Range  ofa32-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  5°,  charge  8  lbs.    .1922    " 

Proof  range  of  powder •     .     .     .     .    300    ** 

Greatest  elevation  the  carriage  admits 8° 

Greatest  depression  the  carriage  admits 4° 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 

Itapidity  of  Aring, 
JPenetratiim.  of  shot. 

See  nos.  38,  40  and  41. 


FLATE  14. 


Gun  Carriage. 


Iv'I  Rear  transom 

2  Truck  wheels. 

3  Trail  handles. 

4  CoiuUer  harters. 

5  Elevating  Screw  handle. 
i~    6  Eccentrics  andRoUer. 

Front  Transom,  between  the  Jiecut  of  cjieeks. 

Guides,  between  the  cheeks  against  front  trans orn. 


It.  R  B.Rush.  Bf'Art.nelt. 


DM^CUlland  Sc 


ART.   1.]  8-lNCH    COLUMBIAD — CASEMATE.  67 


JLESSON    XIII. 

Service  of  um  Switch  Coiumhiad  tnounied  on  a  casentate 
carriage. 


(  Plate  XIV.  ) 


Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 

135.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  &c.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  casemate  gun  in  no.  121, 
substituting  havresack — worn  by  no.  4  from  the  right 
shoulder  to  the  left  side — for  pass-box. 

The  shells  are  at  the  magazine,  or  other  safe  position, 
and  are  brought,  as  required,  to  the  place  prescribed 
for  the  budge-barrel. 

136.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  differs  in  no  ma- 
terial respect  from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  XII. 

It  is  loaded  with  a  shell,  which  is  attached  to  a  sabot. 
The  shell  is  brought  up  by  no.  4,  together  with  the  car- 
tridge, and  is  set  home  in  the  same  manner  as  the  ball, 
except  that  it  is  not  rammed. 

Charges,  *c. 

137.  Greatest  charge  of  powder  .......     10  lbs. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder 2  lbs.  9  oz. 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell 1  lb. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze 4  oz. 

1  ,  ft  11  Axis  of  the 

Range  at  an  angle  of  1°,  charge  10  lbs., 
Range  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  10  lbs., 


919  yards. 
1813     « 


piece  16  feet 

above  the 

water. 

Proof  range  of  powder 300      " 

Weight  of  the  shell 50  lbs. 


See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


68 


SERVICE    OF    THE   PIECE. 


[part  1. 


liESSON     XIT. 

tfervice  of  a  94-fNir.  IlowUxer  ntounied  on  a  lUank  casen$aie 
carriage. 


(Plates  XV  and  XVI.) 


Three  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  two  other 
cannoneers. 

138.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  &c.,  are  arranged  as  follows: 


Roller-handspike. 


Sponge  and  Ram- 


Harresack 


Tube-pouch 


Leaning  against  the  scarp  wall, 
behind  no.  2. 

Leaning  against  the  scarp  wall,  be- 
hind no.  1,  the  rammer-head 
upon  the  ground. 

Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the 
cascable. 

Containing  the  fingerstall,  priming- 
wire,  friction  tubes,  and  the  lan- 
yard, wound  in  St.  Andrew's  cross 
upon  its  handle.  Suspended  from 
the  knob  of  the  cascable. 


Tent-corer Covering  the  vent. 

Tompion In  the  muzzle. 

Rroom On  the  left  of  the  piece. 


ART.   1.]  24-PDR.  HOW. FLANK    CASEMATE.  69 


Budge-barrel 


Containing  cartridges,  at  the  safest 
and  most  convenient  place  in  rear 
of  the  piece. 


The  rounds  of  canister  are  arranged  against  the  scarp 
wall,  behind  no.  2.  The  shells,  if  used,  are  at  the 
magazine,  or  other  safe  position,  and  are  brought,  as 
required,  to  the  place  prescribed  for  the  budge-barrel. 

139.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  explains  to  them  the  names  and 
uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures  of  the 
howitzer,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

140.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands : 

Take  implements. 

The  gunner  takes  the  priming-wire  and  fingerstall, 
wearing  the  latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  right 
hand;  gives  the  tube-pouch  to  no.  1,  and  the  havresack 
to  no.  2;  takes  off  the  vent-cover  and  places  it  against 
the  scarp  wall  outside  of  the  canisters;  seizes  the  rol- 
ler-handspike with  the  right  hand;  and  resumes  his 
post;  holding  the  handspike  vertically  on  the  right  side, 
its  lower  end  in  line  with  the  toes,  the  arm  extended 
naturally. 

No.  1  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  2  equips  himself  with  the  havresack,  which  he 
wears  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

141.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece 
to  be  executed  by  the  following  commands : 

1.  From  battery. 

The  gunner,  embarring  in  the  left  mortice,  presses 
the  roller  under  the  rear  transom,  and  seizes  the  left 
handle  with  the  left  hand. 


70  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

Nos.  1  and  2  lay  hold  of  the  manceuvring  rings  and 
handles. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command 
Heave,  and  the  carriage  is  run  to  the  rear  until  the 
face  of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the  wall,  when, 
disengaging  the  roller,  he  commands  Halt.  All  re- 
sume their  posts. 

2.  Load  by  detail — Load. 

142.  The  gunner  places  himself  at  the  breech;  breaks 
to  the  rear  with  the  right  foot;  closes  the  vent  with  the 
second  finger  of  the  right  hand;  and  manages  the  ele- 
vating screw  with  the  left. 

No.  1,  seizing  the  sponge-stafF  at  its  middle,  brings 
it  across  his  body;  plants  the  left  foot  opposite  to  the 
muzzle,  close  to  the  carriage,  and  breaks  off  with  the 
right  foot;  at  the  same  time  throwing  the  sponge-staff 
into  the  left  hand,  back  down,  and  extending  both 
hands  towards  the  ends  of  the  staff  so  as  to  enter  the 
rammer-head  into  the  embrazure  and  bring  the  sponge 
opposite  to  the  muzzle.  He  then  inserts  it,  and  presses 
it  to  the  bottom  of  the  chamber  with  three  motions. 

No.  2  goes  for  a  cartridge,  and  returns  to  his  post. 
If  shells  are  used,  he  brings  a  shell  at  the  same  time. 

3.  Sponge. 

143.  No.  1,  using  both  hands,  sponges  the  chamber 
carefully;  withdraws  the  sponge,  pressing  it  against  the 
bottom  of  the  bore;  turns  it  over,  stepping  to  his  left 
for  this  purpose,  and  rests  the  rammer-head  against  the 
right  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  2  introduces  the  cartridge,  bottom  foremost, 
seams  downwards.  No.  1  sets  it  home  by  three  mo- 
tions, with  the  right  hand. 

4.  Ram. 

144.  No.  1,  drawing  out  the  rammer  to  the  full  ex- 
tent of  his  arm,  rams  once,  and  throws  out  the  rammer, 


ART.   1.]  24-PDR.   HOW. FLANK    CASEMATE.  71 

holding  it  as  before,  the  rammer-head  against  the  right 
side  of  the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  2  introduces  the  canister  or  shell,  and  resumes 
his  post. 

No.  1  sets  the  canister  or  shell  home  with  care; 
throws  out  the  rammer;  replaces  it;  and  resumes  his 
post. 

The  gunner,  rising  upon  the  left  leg,  pricks,  leaving 
the  priming  wire  in  the  vent,  and  resumes  his  post. 

5.  In  battery. 

145.  All  apply  themselves  to  the  carriage,  as  pre- 
scribed in  no.  141,  and  ease  the  piece  into  battery.  As 
soon  as  it  touches  the  hurters,  the  gunner  commands 
Halt.     All  resume  their  posts. 

6.  Point. 

146.  No.  1  makes  ready  a  tube,  as  prescribed  for 
no.  3,  in  no.  25. 

No.  2  goes  to  the  rear  of  the  chassis,  and,  facing  to 
the  front,  applies  himself  to  it  by  hand,  in  order  to 
traverse  it. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  having 
pointed  the  piece,  gives  the  word  Ready,  making  a 
signal  with  both  hands,  at  which  no.  2  resumes  his  post; 
takes  out  the  roller-handspike;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  1  steps  to  the  vent  and  inserts  the  tube,  holding 
the  lanyard  slightly  stretched  with  the  right  hand,  the 
cord  passing  between  the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up, 
and  breaks  to  his  rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  the 
left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

7.  J^UTnher  one  (or  the  like) — Fire. 

147.  No.  1  fires  as  prescribed  for  no.  3,  in  no.  26. 
What  is  prescribed  in  no.  27  will  apply  to  this  piece, 

substituting  no.  1  for  no.  3. 

148.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands  beginning  with  From  bat- 
tery. 


72  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

Vo  cltauge  posts, 

Vo  toad  for  action* 

To  cease  Uring, 

TOo  secure  piece,  and  reptace  itnpMem,ettts. 

TPo  ieave  the  battery. 

Executed  as  in  nos.  112,  113,  114,  115  and  116. 

Charges,  A'c. 

149.  Charge  of  powder 2  lbs. 

Range  at  an  angle  of  0°,  charge  2  lbs.,  shell      ....     295  yds. 
Range  at  an  angle  of  1°,  charge  2  lbs.,  shell      ....    516 
Range  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  2  lbs.,  shell      ....  1322 
Range  at  an  angle  of  2°,  charge  1^  lbs.,sph'lcase,time2''    600 
Range  at  an  angle  of  5°  30',  *'         "  "  "        4"  1050 

Range  at  an  angle  of  3°  30',  "    2  lbs.,       "         "        3"    880 

Proof  range  of  powder 300 

Weight  of  the  24-pdr.  shell 17   lbs. 

Weight  of  the  round  of  canister 21    *• 

No.  of  bullets  in  a  round  of  canister       .  • 48 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


ZtJtMJtush.2!^Art.  Delt. 


VM^a^elland  So. 


USMXusfv.  2^JrtJ)eU 


VlPClMund  Sc. 


r^- 


*  °* 


m-  •*: 


3- 


ART.    1.]  8-INCH    COLUMBIAD BARBETTE. 


73 


I.E880N    XV 


Service  ot   an   S~i»»ch  Colmmhiad  ntownted  on  a  Colutnbiad 
carriage. 


(Plates  XVII,  XVIII  and  XIX.) 

Five  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  four  other 
cannoneers. 


150.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  &c.,  are  arranged  as  follows: 


Trnck-haudspikes 


IfEanaenTriug- 
handspikes 


E  1«T  ating-bar 


Spong^e    . 
Rammer 


Two  on  each  side  of  the  carriage, 
laid  on  the  rails,  one  in  rear  of 
each  front  truck-wheel,  and  one 
in  rear  of  each  rear  truck-wheel. 

One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage, 
laid  on  the  ground  in  a  line  with 
the  cannoneers,  opposite  to  the 
traverse  wheels,  the  small  ends 
towards  the  parapet. 

Laid  across  the  ties  at  the  junc- 
tion of  the  braces,  handle  to  the 
left. 

One  yard  behind  the  cannoneers  of 
the  right,  the  sponge  uppermost, 
the  sponge  and  rammer-heads 
turned  from  the  parapet,  inclined 
slightly  from  the  piece,  and  sup- 
ported upon  a  prop. 


74 


SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE. 


[part  1. 


Harresack 


Tube-pouch 


Onnner's-pouch 


Chocks 


Vent-cover 
Tompion  . 


Broom 


Budge-barrel    . 


Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the 
cascable. 

Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the 
lanyard,  wound  in  St.  Andrew's 
cross  upon  its  handle.  Sus- 
pended from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 

Containing  the  gunner's  level, 
breech-sight,  fingerstall,  priming- 
wire,  gunner's  gimlet,  vent- 
punch,  chalk-line,  and  chalk. 
Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the 
cascable. 

One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  laid 
on  the  front  of  the  rails. 

Covering  the  vent. 

In  the  muzzle. 

Leaning  against  the  parapet,  to  the 
left  of  the  piece. 

Containing  cartridges,  at  the  safest 
and  most  convenient  place  in  rear 
of  the  piece. 

When  several  columbiads  are  served  together,  there 
will  be  only  one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches 
to  each  battery,  not  exceeding  six  pieces.  To  the  same 
battery  there  will  be  one  worm  and  one  wrench. 

The  shells  are  at  the  magazine,  or  other  safe  position, 
and  are  brought,  as  required,  to  the  place  prescribed 
for  the  budge-barrel. 

151.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their 
posts,  the  instructor  explains  to  them  the  names  and 
uses  of  the  implements,  and  the  nomenclatures  of  the 
columbiad,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 


ART.   1.]        8-INCH    COLUMBIAD — BARBETTE.  75 

152.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the 
instructor  commands: 

Take  implements. 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable;  takes 
off  the  vent-cover,  handing  it  to  no.  2  to  place  against 
the  parapet,  in  rear  of  his  post;  gives  the  tube-pouch 
to  no.  3,  and  the  haversack  to  no.  4;  equips  himself 
with  his  own  pouch  and  the  fingerstall,  wearing  the 
latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand;  takes  the 
elevating  bar,  and  stepping  between  the  rails,  levels  the 
piece  conveniently  for  loading;  applies  his  level  to 
verify  the  line  of  sight  which  is  marked  on  the  piece, 
marking  it,  if  necessary,  with  the  chalk-line,  assisted 
by  no.  2;  and  resumes  his  post,  holding  the  elevating- 
bar  with  the  right  hand. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube -pouch. 

No.  4  equips  himself  with  the  havresack,  which  he 
wears  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  take  the  truck-handspikes  with  the 
hand  farthest  from  the  parapet,  and  carry  them  to  that 
side,  holding  them  vertically,  the  arm  extended  natu- 
rally. 

153.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to 
be  executed  by  the  following  commands : 

1.  From  battery. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  the  right  of  his  post. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  facing  from  the  parapet,  place 
the  wrenches  on  the  ends  of  the  axletrees,  the  hand- 
spikes elevated  about  30°  to  the  rear,  and  at  the 
word  Heave  by  the  gunner,  bear  down  and  throw  the 
wheels  into  gear;  nos.  3  and  4  immediately  after  lay- 
ing their  handspikes  on  the  platform  in  front  of  their 
posts. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  from  the  parapet,  embar  in  the 
most  convenient  front  mortices   of  the   truck-wheels, 


76  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

the  hand  farthest  from  the  carriage  at  the  top  .of  the 
handspike,  the  other  hand  eight  inches  lower. 

Nos.  3  and  4  go  to  the  assistance  of  nos.  1  and  2, 
and,  facing  towards  them,  seize  the  handspikes  with 
both  hands  between  those  of  nos.  1  and  2. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  in  applying  themselves  to  the 
carriage,  to  run  it  from  or  to  battery,  break  to  the  rear 
with  the  foot  nearest  to  the  carriage. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command 
Heave. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  act  together,  and  bear  upon  the 
handspikes  until  they  are  nearly  down  to  the  rails, 
when  the  gunner  commands  Unbar.  Nos.  1  and  2  let 
go  the  handspikes  with  the  hand  nearest  to  the  carriage, 
and  chock  the  wheels.  Nos.  3  and  4  withdraw  the 
handspikes  and  pass  them  to  nos.  1  and  2,  who  rein- 
sert them  in  the  front  mortices. 

The  gunner  again  gives  the  command  Heave,  and 
so  on,  until  the  face  of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from 
the  parapet,  when  he  commands  Halt.  Nos.  3  and  4 
take  their  posts.  Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  wheels  as 
before,  unbar,  and  place  the  wrench  of  their  hand- 
spikes on  the  ends  of  the  axletree  of  the  front  wheels. 
At  the  command  Out  of  gear  by  the  gunner,  they 
throw  the  wheels  out  of  gear;  lay  their  handspikes  on 
the  rails  between  the  wheels;  and  take  their  posts. 

2.  Load  by  detail — Load. 

154.  Executed  as  in  nos.  103  and  104.  The  gun- 
ner, if  necessary,  adjusts  the  piece  conveniently  for 
loading  before  closing  the  vent.  No.  4  brings  up  a 
shell  together  with  the  cartridge. 

3.  Sponge. 

155.  Executed  as  in  no.  105. 


art.  1.]      8-inch  columbiad — barbette.  77 

4.  Ram. 

156.  Executed  as  in  no.  106,  except  that  the  shell  is 
set  carefully  home  without  being  rammed. 

5.  In  battery. 

157.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and  place 
the  chocks  on  the  ties. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  facing  towards  the  parapet,  apply 
the  wrenches  of  their  handspikes  to  the  ends  of  the 
axletrees;  nos.  1  and  2  so  as  to  throw  the  front  wheels 
into  gear,  and  nos.  3  and  4  so  as  to  throw  the  rear 
wheels  out  of  gear. 

The  gunner  commands  Heave,  when  the  front 
wheels  are  thrown  into  gear. 

Should  the  carriage  run  too  easily  after  it  is  in  mo- 
tion, the  gunner  will  command  Rear  wheels  out  of 
GEAR,  when  the  rear  wheels  are  thrown  out  of  gear. 
Nos.  3  and  4  each  take  a  chock  and  hold  it  in  front  of 
the  rear  wheels,  ready  to  apply  it  under  them  if  neces- 
sary. 

When  the  head  of  the  cheeks  is  about  one  foot  from 
the  end  of  the  rails,  the  gunner  commands  Chock, 
when  nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  rear  wheels.  The  wheels 
are  unchocked,  and  the  piece  run  gently  into  battery, 
by  nos.  3  and  4  throwing  the  rear  wheels  alternately 
out  of  and  into  gear.  As  soon  as  the  head  of  the  car- 
riage touches  the  hurters,  the  gunner  commands  Out  of 
GEAR,  when  the  front  wheels  are  thrown  out  of  gear; 
also  the  rear  wheels  should  they  be  in  gear.  Nos.  1, 
2,  3  and  4  take  their  posts,  and  lay  their  handspikes  on 
the  platform  just  in  front  of  them. 

6.  Point. 

158.  No.  3  passes  the  hook  of  the  lanyard  through 
the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to  rear;  holds  the  handle 
of  the  lanyard  with  the  right  hand,  the  hook  between 

7* 


78  SERVICE    OF    THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 

the  thumb  and  forefinger;  and  stands  ready  to  hand  it 
to  the  gunner. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  passing  outside  of  the  other  cannoneers, 
move  to  the  rear  of  the  chassis,  and,  each  taking  one 
of  the  manceuvring-handspikes,  embar  with  the  beveled 
end  under  the  traverse  wheels.  For  traversing  large 
angles,  nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  apply  themselves  by  hand  at 
the  end  of  the  chassis. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming- wire;  inserts  the 
pawl  of  the  elevating  machine  in  the  proper  notch  by 
means  of  the  elevating-bar,  and  with  the  breech-sight 
gives  the  required  elevation;  no.  4  turning  the  handle 
of  the  screw  according  to  his  direction. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises 
on  the  left  leg,  and  gives  the  word  Ready,  making  a 
signal  with  both  hands,  at  which  nos.  1  and  2  unbar, 
lay  down  the  handspikes,  and  resume  their  posts; 
receives  the  tube  from  no.  3,  which  he  inserts  in  the 
vent;  dismounts  from  the  chassis;  and  goes  to  the 
windward  to  observe  the  effect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3  stretches  the  lanyard  as  in  no.  108. 

7.  J^umher  one  (or  the  like) — Fire. 

159.  Executed  as  in  no.  109. 

What  is  prescribed  in  no.  110  will  apply  to  this  piece. 

160.  Remark.  If  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  at  high  an- 
gles, it  is  elevated  in  the  following  manner: 

Nos.  1  and  2 — the  former  carrying  his  traversing- 
handspike  with  him — move  to  the  muzzle;  place  the 
handspike  in  the  bore;  pass  the  bight  of  a  trace-rope 
over  it;  and  bear  down  slightly  on  the  handspike  to  ena- 
ble the  gunner  to  free  the  pawl  from  the  notch.  The 
gunner  draws  the  pawl  back  by  its  handle,  and  com- 
mands Ease  away.  Nos.  1  and  2  holding  the  ends  of 
the  rope,  ease  down  the  breech  steadily,  until  the  gun- 
ner commands  Steady,  when  he  inserts  the  pawl  in 
the  proper  notch. 


ART.   1.]         8-INCH    COLUMBIAD — BARBETTE.  79 

161.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes 
the  series  of  commands  beginning  with  From  battery. 

JTo  change  posig, 

Vo  toad  for  acHou, 

Vo  cease  firing, 

Vo  secure  piece,  and  replace  itnp1emeut$, 

Vo  teave  the  battery. 

Executed  as  in  nos.  112,  113,  114,  115  and  116. 

Charges,  8tc, 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


SERVICE    OP   THE    PIECE.  [PART  1. 


liClSSON     XTI. 

Service  of  a  10-i«tcJS»  Coiumhiad  ntouuted  on  a  Colttmbiad 
carriage. 


(  Plates  XVII,  XVIII  and  XIX.  ) 


Seven  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  six  other 
cannoneers. 

162.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  &c.,  with  the  addition  of  one  ma- 
nceuvring-handspike,  and  substituting  pass-box — ^placed 
against  the  parapet,  behind  no.  2 — for  havresack,  and 
their  arrangement,  are  the  same  as  prescribed  for  the 
8-inch  columbiad  in  no.  150. 

163.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  differs  but  slightly 
from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  XV. 

The  shell  is  brought  up  and  inserted  as  prescribed  in 
no.  120. 

€!hargegf  iCc* 

See  Tables  in  Part  III. 


1V 


■■^•'•'^  :.'.'..\ 


»  J  3 


»  J  ■>  » ' '' 


LtHHRibih..  2'^ArtJ>UC. 


DWCUOantLSc 


t 


ItJtMRusK.ZrJrtJfeJ^. 


SM^CUOartd,  So. 


UJLSJUisluS'ArtMtU. 


DMrCUUofuL  Sc 


ART.  2.1  FORMATION   OF    DETACHMENTS.  81 


ARTICLE    II. 

FORMATION  OF  A  COMPANY  INTO  DETACHMENTS  FOR 
THE  SERVICE  OF  A  BATTERY  OF  SEVERAL  PIECES. 

SERVICE  OF  A  BATTERY  OF  SEVERAL  PIECES. 


Fitmtation  of  a  company  into  detaehtnents  for  the  service  of 
a  battery  of  several  pieces. 


164.  A  company  being  in  one  rank  faced  to  the  right, 
(see  paragraph  4 19,  Infantry  Tactics,)  and  told  off  into 
the  number  of  cannoneers  requisite  for  serving  the 
pieces,  is  formed  into  detachments  by  the  following 
commands : 

1.  In  two  ranks  form  detachments. 

2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  leading  man  of  each  de- 
tachment faces  to  the  front. 

At  the  second  command,  the  other  cannoneers  step 
off  together.  The  second  man,  counting  from  the 
right,  in  each  detachment,  places  himself  behind  the 
first,  and  faces  to  the  front.  The  two  following  men 
will,  in  like  manner,  on  closing  up,  form  the  next  file, 
and  so  on.  The  remaining  files,  if  any,  are  added  to 
the  detachment  as  supernumeraries,  and  numbered  in 
regular  succession  with  the  detachments  to  which  they 
are  assigned. 


82  SERVICE  OP  A  BATTERY.       [PART  1. 

The  sergeants,  according  to  seniority,  take  charge 
of  the  detachments  from  right  to  left,  direct  their  men 
to  call-off,  and  then  place  themselves  on  the  right. 

The  sergeant  in  charge  of  a  detachment  is  designated 
chief  of  piece, 

165.  The  detachments  being  in  line,  are  formed  into 
divisions  of  any  desired  number  of  pieces.  Each 
division  is  commanded  by  an  officer,  who  takes  post  two 
paces  in  front  of  its  centre.  The  commander  then 
wheels  the  detachments  into  column,  or  faces  them  by 
a  flank,  either  to  the  right  or  left;  to  the  right,  if  he  is 
to  approach  the  battery  on  the  left,  and  to  the  left,  if 
he  is  to  approach  the  battery  on  the  right. 

166.  In  column,  the  chief  of  piece  is  two  paces  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  his  detachment;  faced  by  a  flank, 
he  is  at  the  side  of  the  leading  front  rank  man. 

167.  In  column,  the  officers  commanding  divisions 
are  two  paces  from  the  pivot  flank,  and  opposite  to  the 
centre  of  their  divisions;  marching  by  a  flank,  they  are 
opposite  to  the  centre  of  their  divisions,  on  the  side  of 
the  front  rank,  and  two  paces  from  it. 


ART.  2.]  SERVICE    OF    A   BATTERY.  '  83 


Service  of  a  battery  of  severat  pieces. 


168.  When  the  detachments  arrive  at  the  distance 
of  four  yards  from  the  left  or  right  of  the  battery,  the 
commander  orders : 

1.  Detachments,  opposite  your  pieces, 

2.  March. 

As  each  detachment  arrives  in  rear  of  its  piece,  it  is 
halted  by  its  chief  of  piece,  and  wheeled  into  line,  or 
faced  to  the  front,  four  yards  in  rear  of  the  platform, 
its  centre  in  line  with  the  axis. 

The  chiefs  of  pieces  place  themselves  on  the  right  of 
their  detachments,  and  the  chiefs  of  divisions  one  pace 
in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  divisions. 

169.  The  cannoneers  are  then  marched  to  their  posts 
as  prescribed  in  No,  7;  and  at  the  conclusion  of  the 
exercise  are  formed  in  rear  of  their  pieces  as  prescribed 
in  no.  13. 

170.  During  the  exercise,  the  chiefs  of  division 
remain  on  a  line  in  rear  of  their  respective  divisions, 
three  yards  from  the  rear  of  the  platform;  and  the 
chiefs  of  pieces  one  yard  behind  the  line  of  the  can- 
noneers of  the  left,  and  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  plat- 
form, except  when  the  superintendence  of  their  re- 
spective commands  may  require  their  presence  at  some 
other  point 

171.  The  pieces  are  numbered  from  right  to  left.  In 
directing  them  to  be  fired,  they  are  always  designated 


84  SERVICE  OF  A  BATTERY.       [PART  1. 

by   their  numbers,    as,  J^umher  one — Fire;    J^umber 
two — Fire;  &c. 

When  the  wind  comes  from  the  right,  the  firing 
should  commence  on  the  left,  and  reciprocally. 

172.  In  mortar  batteries  (which  should  not  exceed 
three  or  four  pieces)  the  cannoneers  remain  at  their 
posts  until  the  signal,  or  command.  Commence  firing; 
all  then  move  to  the  rear  of  the  platform  except  no.  3 
of  the  mortar  which  is  to  commence  firing. 

After  having  fired,  each  no.  3  joins  his  detachment, 
which  remains  in  its  position  until  all  the  pieces  having 
been  discharged,  the  signal,  or  command,  To  your 
POSTS,  is  given. 

A  similar  precaution  may  be  necessary  to  avoid  the 
blast,  in  a  battery  composed  entirely  of  howitzers. 


ART.  3.]        POINTING    GUNS    AND    HOWITZERS.  85 


ARTICLE    III 


POINTING  GUNS  AND  HOWITZERS. 

POINTING  MORTARS. 

TABLE  OF  TANGENTS  AND  TANGENT  SCALES. 

RICOCHET  FIRING. 

FIRING  HOT  SHOT. 

NIGHT  FIRING. 

PLATFORMS. 


Pointing  Guns  and  MMou-itzerg. 


(  Plate  V.  ) 


173.  The  dispart  of  a  piece  is  the  difference  between 
the  semi-diameters  of  the  base-ring  and  swell  of  the 
muzzle;  or,  it  is  the  tangent  of  the  angle  which  the  line 
of  metal  makes  with  the  axis,  the  radius  being  the  dis- 
tance between  the  rear  of  the  base-ring  and  the  highest 
point  of  the  swell  of  the  muzzle. 

174.  The  line  of  metal,  called,  also,  the  natural  line 
of  sight,  is  the  right  line  passing  through  the  highest 
points  of  the  base-ring  and  swell  of  the  muzzle. 

175.  In  ordinary  practice  there  is  but  one  case  where 
the  object  is  struck  by  directing  the  line  of  metal  upon 
it.  The  firing  in  this  case  is  called  point-blank  firing, 
and  the  range  the  point-blank  range, 

8 


86  POINTING    GUNS    AND    HOWITZERS.  [PART  1. 

A  knowledge  of  this  range,  which  must  be  ascer- 
tained by  experiment,  is  essential  to  accuracy  in  point- 
ing; it  increases  with  the  calibre,  charge,  and  dispart. 

For  all  ranges  less  than  the  point-blank  range,  the 
line  of  metal  must  be  aimed  under  the  object,  and  for 
all  distances  greater  than  the  point-blank  range,  it  must 
be  aimed  over  it. 

176.  To  point  the  gun  when  the  line  of  metal  passes 
over  the  object,  the  gunner's  quadrant,  or  a  breech- 
sight,  (tangent-scale,)  becomes  necessary.  The  use  of 
these  instruments  supposes  that  the  distance  of  the  ob- 
ject, and  the  degree  of  elevation  necessary  to  reach  it, 
are  both  known. 

177.  To  point  with  the  quadrant.  The  gun  is  aimed 
at  the  object  by  the  line  of  metal;  the  quadrant  is  then 
applied  either  by  its  longer  branch  to  the  face  of  the 
piece,  or  this  branch  is  run  into  the  bore  parallel  with 
the  axis,  and  the  elevating  screw  turned,  or  the  quoin 
adjusted,  until  the  required  degree  is  indicated. 

178.  To  point  with  the  breech-sight.  The  sight  is  set 
to  correspond  with  the  distance;  it  is  then  applied  to 
the  highest  point  of  metal  on  the  base-ring,  and  by  the 
elevating  screw,  or  quoin,  the  notch  of  the  breech- 
sight,  the  highest  point  on  the  swell  of  the  muzzle, 
and  the  object,  are  brought  in  the  same  line. 

179.  In  the  absence  of  a  breech-sight,  or  quadrant, 
the  gunner  may  point  his  gun  by  placing  one  or  more 
fingers  of  the  left  hand  upon  the  base-ring  perpendicu- 
larly to  the  axis,  and  using  them  as  a  breech-sight. 

180.  The  theory  of  pointing  is  based  upon  the  sup- 
position that  the  trajectory  of  the  ball  lies  in  the  ver- 
tical plane  passed  through  the  line  of  metal,  and  that 
this  plane  includes  the  centre  of  the  object;  but  as  in 
practice  there  are  circumstances  (as,  for  instance,  a 
strong  wind  blowing  across  the  field  of  fire)  which  will 


ART.  3.]  POINTING    GUNS    AND    HOWITZERS.  87 

cause  the  ball  to  deviate  from  this  plane,  it  follows  that 
to  strike  the  object,  in  such  a  case,  the  line  of  metal 
must  be  directed  to  its  right  or  left;  the  gunner  judging 
of  this  distance  by  observing  the  striking  of  the  shot. 

181.  The  line  of  metal  can  be  correctly  ascertained 
only  by  the  use  of  instruments.  The  instrument  gene- 
rally used  for  this  purpose  is  the  gunner's  level.  Being 
properly  applied  to  the  base-ring  and  to  the  swell  of 
the  muzzle  or  muzzle-band,  their  highest  points  are 
indicated  by  the  style;  these  points  are  marked  with 
chalk. 

182.  In  batteries  for  garrison  and  sea-coast  defence, 
where  the  platforms  are  fixed,  the  line  of  metal  may 
be  considered  as  nearly  permanent;  but  with  siege  guns 
which  are  mounted  on  travelling  carriages,  the  wheels 
of  which  are  liable  to  vary  in  position  from  unevenness 
of  ground,  or  unequal  settling  in  newly  constructed 
platforms,  this  line  is  constantly  changing.  It  approxi- 
mates the  higher  wheel  in  proportion  to  the  difference 
of  level  between  the  wheels;  and  hence,  to  secure  the 
greatest  accuracy  of  fire,  it  must  be  frequently  verified; 
the  old  marks,  if  not  found  correct,  should  be  erased 
and  new  ones  substituted. 

183.  To  point  a  gun,  then,  is  to  give  it  such  a  direc- 
tion and  elevation,  or  depression,  that  the  shot  may 
strike  the  object;  and  the  general  rule  is:  First  give 
the  direction,  and  then  the  elevation  or  depression. 

184.  The  direction  is  given  by  directing  the  line  of 
metal  upon  the  object.  The  elevation,  or  depression, 
which  depends  upon  the  charge,  the  distance,  and  the 
position  of  the  object  above  or  below  the  battery,  must 
be  ascertained  from  tables  or  by  experiment,  and  the 
proper  degree  given  by  means  of  instruments. 

185.  When  the  elevation  or  depression  has  once  been 
ascertained  for  any  given  distance,  the  firing  at  that 


88  POINTING    GUNS    AND    HOWITZERS.         [PART  1. 

distance  may  be  facilitated  by  noting  some  point  on  the 
elevating  screw,  or  quoin,  adjusting  some  fixed  mea- 
surement from  a  point  on  the  stock  to  another  point  on 
the  under  side  of  the  breech,  or  by  a  chalk-mark  drawn 
across  the  face  of  a  trunnion  and  its  corresponding 
cheek. 

186.  When,  from  the  nearness  of  the  object,  the  line 
of  metal  must  be  so  depressed  as  to  fall  below  it,  an 
attentive  observance  of  the  striking  of  the  shot,  and  of 
the  remarkable  points  of  the  intervening  ground,  may 
furnish  the  gunner  an  object  to  aim  at;  and  even  when 
firing  beyond  point-blank  range,  some  fixed  object  may 
often  present  itself  which  will  serve  as  a  point  upon 
which  to  direct  the  line  of  metal.  Indeed,  in  every 
case  the  gunner  must  be  governed  to  a  very  considera- 
ble extent  by  the  striking  of  his  shot;  but  he  should 
neglect  no  means  that  may  tend  to  secure  accuracy  of 
aim;  for  the  shot  that  is  thrown  away  by  carelessness 
in  pointing  had  better  not  be  thrown  at  all. 

187.  Remark.  The  42-pdr.  and  32-pdr.  sea-coast 
guns  have  no  natural  line  of  sight,  as  the  swell  of  the 
muzzle  is  not  visible  when  the  eye  is  on  a  level  with 
the  base-ring.  The  inclination  of  the  reinforce  varies 
with  different  pieces  in  service;  and  as  in  some  guns  it 
is  as  great  as  3°,  the  gun  aimed  by  the  line  of  metal 
would  give  a  range  of  thirteen  hundred  yards  before 
striking  on  a  horizontal  plane.  In  practice  the  shot 
would  probably  pass  over  an  object  at  a  less  distance, 
as  it  would  be  difficult  to  get  the  men  to  depress  suf- 
ficiently. These  pieces  should  have  a  sight  attached  to 
the  muzzle  or  neck,  and  the  line  of  sight  thus  made 
parallel  to  the  axis.  The  necessary  elevation  may  be 
given  with  a  breech-sight,  (tangent-scale,)  or  the  ele- 
vating screw,  or  the  quoin,  should  be  marked  to  indi- 
cate the  elevation  of  the  bore. 


ART.  3.]  POINTING   MORTARS.  89 


M*oinHng    JfKovtars, 


(  Plate  V. ) 


188.  In  pointing  mortars  the  elevation  is  first  given 
and  then  the  direction. 

189.  The  elevation,  which  is  usually  that  of  the 
greatest  range  of  projectiles  in  vacuo^  viz.,  45°,  is  de- 
termined by  applying  the  quadrant  to  the  face  of  the 
piece,  and  adjusting  the  quoin  until  that  number  of  de- 
grees is  indicated. 

190.  The  charge  of  powder  is  varied  to  suit  the 
required  range. 

To  give  the  shell  for  the  same  range  a  greater 
velocity  in  the  descending  branch  of  its  trajectory,  the 
mortar  is  sometimes  fired  at  an  angle  of  60°;  in  which 
case,  the  charge  of  powder  must  be  increased  accord- 
ingly. 

191.  As  mortars  are  usually  masked  from  the  object 
to  be  bombarded  by  an  epaulment  or  parapet,  different 
means  from  those  which  are  used  with  guns  and  how- 
itzers become  necessary  for  giving  them  their  direction. 

There  are  several  means  proposed;  all  of  which, 
however,  are  reduced  to  determining  practically  two 
fixed  points  which  shall  be  in  line  with  the  piece  and 
the  object,  and  sufficiently  near  to  be  readily  distin 
guished  by  the  eye.  These  points  being  covered  by 
the  plummet,  determine  a  vertical  plane  which,  when 
including  the  line  of  metal,  becomes  the  plane  of  fire. 
8* 

*  4    ■ 


90  POINTING   MORTARS.  [PART  1. 

Premising  that  the  platform  is  so  laid  that  its  axis 
will  be  nearly  in  the  plane  of  fire,  and  that  the  line  of 
metal  is  ascertained  by  the  gunner's  level  and  marked 
with  chalk,  the  simplest  manner  of  directing  the  mor- 
tar is  by  means  of  pointing-wires. 

192.  The  two  fixed  points  required  are  determined 
by  planting  two  wires  upon  the  epaulment,  one  upon 
its  crest,  and  the  other  about  a  yard  in  advance  of  it, 
both  as  nearly  as  possible  in  the  vertical  plane  passing 
through  the  axis  of  the  platform  and  the  object. 

The  points  being  thus  established,  the  direction  is 
given  to  the  mortar,  by  causing  a  plummet  held  in  rear 
of  it  to  cover  the  wires  and  the  line  of  metal.  This 
method  is,  however,  defective;  not  only  in  accuracy 
of  aim,  but  because  of  the  liability  of  the  wires  to  be 
deranged  by  the  shots  of  the  enemy,  or  by  other  causes. 

193.  A  better  method  is,  by  means  of  pointing-stakes 
to  establish  one  of  the  fixed  points  upon  the  crest  of 
the  parapet,  and  another  in  rear  of  the  piece.  Then 
by  a  cord,  called  the  pointing-cord,  stretched  between 
these  two  points,  with  the  plummet  suspended  from  it, 
a  vertical  plane  is  determined  with  which  the  line  of 
metal  is  made  to  coincide. 

To  fix  the  points,  a  stake  a  foot  or  more  in  length  is 
driven  firmly  into  the  crest  of  the  epaulment  as  nearly 
as  practicable  in  the  vertical  plane  passing  through  the 
axis  of  the  platform;  sighting  by  this  stake,  another 
long  one  is  planted  three  or  four  feet  in  front  of  it  in 
line  with  the  object.  To  this  stake  the  cord  is  tempo- 
rarily attached,  and  stretched  by  the  first  stake,  just 
grazing  it,  to  a  point  on  the  ground  one  yard  in  rear  of 
the  platform.  At  this  point  a  third  stake  is  driven. 
HhQ  pointing -board*  is  laid  on  the  ground  at  the  foot  of 


*  This  is  a  piece  of  wood  one  foot  long,  two  or  three  inches  wide, 
and  one  inch  thick,  having  a  notch  cut  in  the  middle  of  one  side  to 
fit  on  the  stake,  and  which  is  graduated  into  equal  divisions  from 
its  middle.    It  serves  to  wind  the  pointing-cord  on  when  not  in  use. 


ART.  3.] 


POINTING   MORTARS. 


91 


the  stake.  The  cord  is  removed  from  the  second  stake, 
which  may  now  be  taken  away,  and  permanently 
attached  to  the  first. 

To  direct  the  mortar,  the  cord  is  stretched  to  the  top 
of  the  stake  by  the  left  hand,  while  the  plummet  is 
suspended  against  it  by  the  right;  or,  the  plummet  may 
be  attached  to  the  cord  just  in  rear  of  the  mortar. 

It  is  evident  that  when  the  cord,  the  plummet,  and 
the  line  of  metal  are  in  the  same  plane,  the  mortar  is 
properly  directed. 

In  case  the  shell  should,  nevertheless,  strike  con- 
stantly to  the  right  or  left  of  the  object,  the  pointing- 
cord  is  shifted  to  some  notch  on  the  pointing-board  to 
the  right  or  left,  until  the  shell  falls  at  the  desired  point. 

194.  Another  mode  of  planting  the  stakes  is  as  fol- 
lows :  The  mortar  being  placed  upon  the  middle  of  the 
platform,  the  gunner  mounts  upon  it  and  suspends  the 
plummet  in  front  of  the  muzzle,  covering  the  object. 
Where  the  plummet,  thus  suspended,  cuts  the  crest  of 
the  epaulment,  the  first  stake  is  driven.  A  second 
stake  is  then  driven  in  the  same  line  between  the  mor- 
tar and  the  epaulment.  The  pointing-cord  being  attached 
to  the  first  stake,  and  stretched  to  the  rear  over  the 
point  where  the  plummet  touches  the  top  of  the  mor- 
tar, determines  the  point  on  the  ground  at  which  the 
rear  stake  is  driven. 


92  TANGENTS  AND  TANGENT-SCALES.         [PART  1. 

195.   Table  of  tangents  and  tangent-scales. 


T 

ANGENT-SCALES       FOR       THE 

TANGENTS — RADIUS   UNITY.           || 

24-PDR.  GUN  AND  8-IN.  SIEGE 

HOWITZER. 

Tangents. 

Degrees. 

Minutes. 

Tangents.     _ 

24-pdr. 

8-inch  How. 

1 

00 

.01745 

, 

(  Natural  an- 
}gle  of  sight. 

30 

.02618        ' 

Natural  angle 
of  sight. 

\  0  inches  .45 

2 

00 

.03492 

0  inches  .97 

0     «       .90 

30 

.04366 

1     «       .94 

1     "       .35 

3 

00 

.05240 

2     "       .91 

1     "       .80 

30 

.06116 

3     "       .88 

2     «       .25 

4 

00 

.06992 

4     *«      .85 

2     ''      .70 

30 

.07870 

5     "       .82 

3     '♦      .15 

5 

00 

.08748 

6     *'       .79 

3     "       .60 

30 

.09628 

7     "       .76 

4     "       .05 

6 

00 

.10510 

8     "       .76 

4     "       .50 

30 

.11393 

4     "       .96 

7 

00 
30 

.12278 
.13165 

•      • 

5     "       .42 

5     "      .88 

8 

00 
30 

.14054 
.14945 

•      • 

6     «       .34 

6     "       .80 

9 

00 
30 

.15838 
.16734 

• 

7     "      .26 
7     "       .72 

10 

00 

.17632 

• 

8     '«       .18 

ART.  3.]  RICOCHET   FIRING.  93 


Ricocttet  firing. 


196.  The  theory  of  projectiles  in  vacuo  proves  that 
the  angle  of  fall  is  equal  to  the  angle  of  elevation;  but 
in  air  the  angle  of  fall  is  somewhat  the  larger. 

197.  It  is  known  by  experiment  that  the  projectile 
which  falls  upon  ground  of  ordinary  firmness,  at  an 
angle  not  greater  than  ten  degrees,  or  upon  water  at 
four  or  five  degrees,  will  generally  make  one  or  more 
bounds.     In  this  case  the  projectile  is  said  to  ricochet. 

198.  The  object  of  ricochet  firing  is  generally  to  en- 
filade a  face  of  the  enemy's  work;  which  is  effected  by 
causing  a  projectile  to  bound  along  the  terreplein  of  the 
face  with  the  view  of  annoying  his  cannoneers,  and 
dismounting  his  pieces. 

The  object  to  be  fired  at  ill  this  case  is  usually  some 
point  of  the  interior  crest  of  the  parapet  which  covers 
a  flank  of  the  terreplein  to  be  reached. 

199.  The  point  of  the  terreplein  which  is  first  struck 
by  the  projectile,  after  having  grazed  the  interior  crest, 
is  called  ih^  point  of  fall. 

200.  The  angle  of  fall  is  the  angle  made  at  the  point 
of  fall  by  the  tangent  to  the  trajectory  with  a  horizon- 
tal line  in  the  plane  of  fire. 

201.  The  charge  and  elevation  depend  upon  the  dis- 
tance of  the  object  from  the  battery;  upon  the  differ- 
ence of  level  between  these  points;  the  distance  of  the 


9$-  RICOCHET   FIRING.  [PART  1. 

desired  point  of  fall  from  the  parapet;  the  height  of 
the  parapet,  &c.  These  having  been  determined,  if 
the  embrazure  through  which  the  piece  is  fired  is  so 
constructed  as  to  allow  the  line  of  metal  to  be  directed 
upon  the  object,  the  piece  is  pointed  in  the  manner 
already  prescribed. 

But  if  the  embrazure  is  such  that  the  object  is 
masked,  the  direction  must  be  given,  as  with  the  mor- 
tar, by  the  plummet.  This  is  held  by  the  person  who 
points  in  such  a  manner  as  to  cover  both  the  line  of 
metal  and  the  object.  The  elevation  is  then  given  by 
the  quadrant. 

202.  In  ricochet  firing  against  troops,  the  angle  of 
elevation  ought  seldom  to  exceed  three  degrees  above 
the  surface  of  the  ground  occupied  by  the  troops. 
Against  fortresses,  forts,  and  fortified  lines,  this  angle 
will  be  found  to  vary  from  three  to  six  and  nine  degrees 
above  the  horizontal. 

203.  A  ricochet  battery  will  not  probably  be  very 
effective  if  established  at  a  greater  distance  from  the 
object  than  six  hundred  yards.  The  projectile  should 
be  made  to  graze  the  parapet  while  in  the  descending 
branch  of  the  trajectory;  and  this  must  be  effected  by 
regulating  the  charges  and  elevating  or  depressing  the 
piece  until  the  shot  is  seen  to  fall  just  over  the  interior 
crest  of  the  parapet.  Light  charges  are  generally  used; 
varying  from  two-thirds  to  one- eighth  of  the  ordinary 
charge. 

204.  Rules  for  enfilade  firing  must,  however,  be  de- 
duced from  experiments.  As  our  service  is  deficient 
in  this  respect,  a  few  data  are  here  given  from  that  of 
the  French.  In  their  application  to  our  artillery  they 
can  only  be  relied  upon  as  approximative;  serving 
merely  as  guides  to  facilitate  our  obtaining  more  accu- 
rate results. 


ART.   3.] 


RICOCHET    FIRING. 
Charges* 


95 


205.  Charges  for  a  flattened  ricochet  for  seige  guns 
at  an  angle  of  about  3°. 


Distance. 

Elevation. 

Charge. 

Remarks. 

660  yards. 
550    " 
440    " 
330    " 
220    " 

2°  45' 
3° 

3°  15' 
3°  35' 
3°  35' 

iV  weight  of  ball. 

206.  Charges  for  a  flattened  ricochet  for  siege  how- 
itzers at  an  angle  of  about  3°. 

Distance. 

Elevation. 

Charge. 

Remarks. 

550  yards. 
440    «' 
330    " 
220    " 

1°  45' 
2°  15' 
2°  15' 
2°  45' 

3  lbs. 

2  lbs.    3  oz. 
1  lb.    12  oz. 
1  lb.      2  oz. 

207.  Charges  for  a  curvated  ricochet  for  a  siege  how- 
itzer at  an  angle  of  about  10°. 


Distance. 

Elevation. 

Charge. 

Remarks. 

550  yards. 
440    «« 
330    " 
220    " 

7°  30' 

7°  30' 
7°  30' 
7°  30' 

1  lb.     4  oz. 
1  lb.     1  oz. 

14  oz. 

10  oz. 

'  The  height  of  the 
object  above  the 

\  level  of  the  bat- 
tery being  sup- 

J      posed  to  be  20  ft. 

FIRING   HOT    SHOT.  [PART  1. 


Wiring  Itot  shot. 


(  Plate  VI.  ) 


208.  The  use  of  hot  shot  for  setting  fire  to  ships, 
buildings,  &c.,  renders  some  modifications  in  the  ser- 
vice of  the  piece  necessary.  For  the  heavier  calibres 
the  detachment  consists  of  seven  men. 

209.  The  additional  implements  required  are  placed 
as  follows: 

3  Pokers For  stirring  the  fire. 

J8  Iron  forks  ....  For  taking  out  the  shot. 

1  Rasp For  cleaning  over-heated  shot. 

1  Stand For  cleaning  shot  on. 

1  Pair  of  tongs  .  .  For  handling  shot. 

1  Iron  rake    ....  For  removing  cinders  from  the  ash  pit. 

1  Trough For  cooling  the  tongs,  &c. 

1  liadle For  carrying  hot  shot. 

1  Tub For  soaking  wads.     Behind  no.  2. 

1  Bucket Near  and  outside  of  the  rammer-head. 

l^'liudle  ^  For  carrying  hot  shot.    Leaning  against 

* \     the  epaulment  near  the  pass- box. 

1  Worm With  the  sponge  and  rammer. 

When  clay  wads  are  used,  the  rammer  has  a  circular 
iron  plate  upon  its  head  to  remove  clay  from  the  sides 
of  the  bore. 

210.  The  cartridge  bags  are  made  of  woollen  stuff,  and 
the  cartridge  is  inserted,  choke  foremost,  in  a  cartridge 
bag  of  the  next  higher  calibre,  and  the  end  folded  under. 


ART.   3.]  FIRING   HOT    SHOT.  W 

The  bags  should  be  examined  carefully;  and  too  great 
care  cannot  be  taken  to  prevent  the  powder  from  spil- 
ling or  sifting  in  the  bore. 

211.  The  wads  are  made  of  clay  or  hay.  Clay  wads 
should  consist  of  pure  clay,  or  fuller's  earth,  free  from 
sand  or  gravel,  well  kneaded  with  just  enough  mois- 
ture to  work  well.  They  are  cylindrical  and  one  cali- 
bre in  length. 

Hay  wads  should  remain  in  the  tub  to  soak  at  least' 
ten  or  fifteen  minutes.  Before  being  used  the  water 
is  pressed  out  of  them. 

When  hay  wads  are  used  vapor  may  be  seen  escaping 
from  the  vent  on  the  insertion  of  the  ball;  but  as  this 
is  only  the  effect  of  the  heat  of  the  ball  on  the  water 
contained  in  the  wad,  no  danger  need  be  apprehended 
from  it. 

212.  With  proper  precautions  in  loading,  the  ball^ 
may  be  permitted  to  cool  in  the  gun  without  igniting 
the  charge.  The  piece,  however,  should  be  fired  with 
as  little  delay  as  possible,  as  the  vapor  would  diminish 
the  strength  of  the  powder. 

Vo  Mood  with  hoi  »1toi, 

213.  The  piece  should  be  sponged  with  great  care, 
and  the  worm  frequently  passed  into  the  bore.  As  a 
precaution  it  is  well  to  insert  a  wet  sponge  just  before 
putting  in  the  ball. 

The  muzzle  being  sufficiently  elevated  to  allow  the 
ball  to  roll  down  the  bore,  the  cartridge  is  inserted,  the 
mouth  of  the  outer  bag  foremost,  the  fold  down,  and 
carefully  pushed  home  without  breaking  it;  a  dry  hay 
wad  is  placed  upon  it  and  rammed  once;  then  a  clay 
or  wet  hay  wad  and  rammed  twice;  and  finally,  if' 
firing  at  angles  of  depression,  a  wad  of  clay  a-half 
calibre  in  length,  or  a  wet  hay  wad,  is  put  on  the  ball. 

214.  At  the  command  Load,  no.  6,  accompanied  by 
no.  5,  takes  the  ladle  and  goes  to  the  furnace  for  a  shot. 

9 


§8  FIRING   HOT    SHOT.  [PART  1. 

In  carrying  the  shot  no.  5  is  in  advance  holding  his 
handle  of  the  ladle  with  the  right  hand.  On  approach- 
ing the  piece,  they  halt,  if  necessary,  near  the  post  of 
the  gunner,  until  the  wads  are  set  home;  they  then 
advance  and  place  themselves  behind  no.  2,  on  a  line 
parallel  to  the  epaulment. 

No.  1  throws  out  the  rammer,  and  allows  it  to  rest 
upon  the  epaulment,  or  on  the  sole  of  the  embrazure. 

No.  5,  stepping  between  the  epaulment  and  the  face 
of  the  piece,  gives  his  handle  of  the  ladle  to  no.  1,  and 
no.  6  gives  his  handle  to  no.  2. 

Nos.  1  and  2  put  the  shot  in  the  bore;  nos.  5  and  6 
take  the  ladle  and  go  to  the  furnace  for  another  shot; 
no.  1  seizes  the  rammer;  and  the  service  of  the  piece 
is  continued  as  heretofore  prescribed. 

215.  In  the  exercise  for  instruction,  a  sawdust  car- 
tridge enveloped  in  another  as  above  described,  with 
the  wads  and  hot  shot,  should  always  be  put  into  the 
gun. 

216.  When  the  instructor  directs  the  piece  to  be  un- 
loaded, nos.  1  and  2  stand  ready  with  the  ladle  to 
receive  the  shot;  the  gunner  depresses  the  muzzle 
until  the  shot  rolls  out;  nos.  5  and  6  return  it  to  the 
furnace;  and  no.  1  draws  out  the  wads  and  cartridge 
with  the  worm. 

Charges,  *p. 

217.  Small  charges  should  be  used  in  hot  shot  firing, 
varying  from  one-fourth  to  one-sixth  of  the  weight  of 
the  ball.  Balls  fired  with  small  velocities  split  the  wood 
in  a  manner  which  is  favorable  to  its  burning;  with  a 
great  velocity  the  hole  closes,  the  ball  sinks  deep,  and, 
deprived  of  air,  it  chars  without  setting  fire  to  the  sur- 
rounding wood. 

Hot  shot  should  not  penetrate  deeper  than  ten  or 
twelve  inches.  Thsy  do  not  set  fire  to  the  wood  until 
some  time  after  their  penetration.     They  retain  suf- 


ART.  3.]  FIRING   HOT    SHOT.  99 

ficient  heat  to  ignite  wood  after  having  made  several 
ricochets  upon  water;  though  a  total  immersion  of  four 
or  five  seconds  will  deprive  them  of  this  property. 

Wurnacen  for  Ueatiug  »hot» 

218.  Furnaces  for  heating  shot  are  erected  at  the 
forts  on  the  sea-coast.  These  furnaces  hold  sixty  or 
more  shot.  The  shot  being  placed,  and  the  furnace 
cold,  it  requires  one  hour  and  fifteen  minutes  to  heat 
them  to  a  red  heat;  but  after  the  furnace  is  once  heated,  a 
24-pdr.  shot  is  brought  to  a  red  heat  in  twenty-five  min- 
utes; the  32-pdr.  and  42-pdr.  shot  require  a  few  minutes 
longer.  Three  men  are  required  to  attend  the  furnace; 
one  takes  out  the  hot  shot  and  places  them  on  the  stand 
to  be  scraped;  another  scrapes  them  and  puts  them  in 
the  ladle;  and  the  third  supplies  cold  shot  and  fuel. 

Ctrateg  far  heating  ghoi, 

219.  In  siege  or  other  batteries,  where  there  are  no 
furnaces,  a  grate  is  used  for  heating  shot.  This  grate 
consists  of  four  bars  1.75  inch  square,  three  feet  long, 
placed  four  inches  apart  on  three  iron  stands  one  foot 
in  height.  It  is  placed  in  an  excavation  one  foot  in 
depth,  of  the  width  of  the  grate,  perpendicular  at  the 
back  and  side,  open  in  front,  the  legs  resting  on  bricks 
or  stones  rising  about  four  or  five  inches  from  the  bot- 
tom. A  roof  is  made  over  it  with  hoops  of  flat  iron, 
covered  with  sods  and  eighteen  inches  of  earth,  having 
in  the  back  part  a  chimney  six  inches  square. 

The  shot  are  placed  on  the  back  part  of  the  grate, 
leaving  one-fourth  of  its  front  part  free;  and  under  and 
on  the  front  part  the  wood  is  put,  cut  in  pieces  about 
fourteen  inches  long  and  two  inches  thick.  A  thick 
sod  is  used  as  a  register  to  regulate  the  draught  of  the 
chimney,  so  that  no  flame  can  issue  from  the  front. 
This  grate,  which  will  contain  about  fifteen  24-pdr. 
balls,  heats  them  to  a  red  heat  in  an  hour,  and  will 
supply  three  guns.  It  requires  the  attendance  of  one 
man. 


<i0O  FIRING  HOT    SHOT.  [PART  1. 

220.  Expansion  of  shot  heated  to  a  white  heat: 


Calibre. 

8-in. 

42-pdr. 

32-pdr. 

24-pdr. 

18-pdr. 

12-pdr. 

Expansion     .     . 

In. 
.149 

In. 
.11 

In. 
.10 

In. 

.08 

In. 

.06 

In. 
.04 

Heated  shot  do  not  return  to  their  original  dimen- 
sions on  cooling,  but  retain  a  permanent  enlargement. 

221.  For  calibres  below  the  24-pdr.  a  ladle  with  a 
single  handle  is  used;  and  only  one  additional  man  is 
required  to  serve  shot. 


ART.  3.]  NIGHT    FIRING.  101 


JYight  firing. 


222.  When  a  fixed  object  is  to  be  fired  at  by  night, 
the  piece  should  be  directed  during  the  day,  and  two 
narrow  and  well  dressed  strips  of  wood  laid  on  the 
inside  of  the  wheels,  and  two  others  outside  of  the 
trail,  of  a  siege  carriage,  and  nailed  or  screwed  to  the 
platform. 

The  traverse  wheels  of  a  barbette  carriage  are 
chocked  in  the  proper  position. 

223.  To  preserve  the  elevation,  measure  the  height 
of  the  elevating  screw  above  its  box,  or  take  the  mea- 
sure between  two  points,  one  on  the  gun,  the  other  on 
the  stock;  cut  a  stick  to  this  length  and  adjust  the  gun 
on  it  at  each  fire. 

224.  Night  firing  with  guns  should  be  limited  to  a 
small  number  of  rounds,  as  it  consumes  ammunition  to 
little  advantage. 

225.  For  mortars,  the  direction  is  preserved  by  nail- 
ing or  screwinor  two  boards  to  the  platform  outside  of 
the  cheeks.  The  elevation  is  marked  on  the  quoin,  or 
the  quoin  may  be  nailed  in  the  proper  position. 


9» 


iv6  PLATFORMS.  [PART  I. 


PiatforuM. 


226.  To  insure  accuracy  of  fire  with  heavy  guns  and 
mortars,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  have  solid  and 
substantial  platforms. 

227.  For  casemate  and  barbette  batteries  in  fortifica- 
tions, fixed  platforms  are  constructed  with  the  works. 

228.  Platforms  for  siege  pieces  are  constructed  at  the 
arsenals,  and  should  accompany  every  piece.  As 
these  move  with  the  army,  it  is  desirable  to  have  them 
as  light  as  is  compatible  with  sufiicient  strength  to  en- 
dure the  shock  of  firing. 

The  platforms  for  guns,  howitzers,  and  mortars, 
hereafter  described,  combine  in  a  high  degree  the 
essential  qualities  of  strength  and  portability.  All 
the  pieces  composing  them  are  of  the  same  dimensions; 
and  as  the  weight  of  each  piece  is  only  fifty  pounds, 
an  infantry  soldier  can  carry  one  from  the  dep6t  to  the 
batteries,  or  any  moderate  distance,  in  addition  to  his 
arms  and  equipments. 

Another  platform  for  mortars  is  described,  which  is 
very  simple,  strong,  and  well  suited  to  positions  where 
trees  or  timber  can  be  easily  procured.  This  is  desig- 
nated the  rail-platform. 


ART.  3.]  SIEGE    GUN    OR    HOWITZER.  103 


iPtatforut  far  a  Siege  €htn  or  Bowitxer, 


(  Plate  XX. ) 


229.  To  lay  this  platform,  establish  the  centre  line  of 
the  embrazure,  and  stretch  a  cord  on  this  line  from  the 
middle  of  the  embrazure  to  the  rear.  This  is  the  direc- 
trix of  the  platform. 

Lay  the  two  outside  sleepers  parallel  to  this  directrix, 
their  outside  edges  being  fifty-four  inches  distant  from 
it.  The  four  other  sleepers  are  laid  parallel  to  these, 
the  edge  of  each  fifteen  and  a-half  inches  from  the 
edge  of  the  next.  The  upper  surface  of  the  front  ends 
of  these  sleepers  to  be  fifty  inches,  on  a  vertical  line, 
below  the  sole  of  the  embrazure. 

They  are  laid  with  an  elevation  to  the  rear  of  one 
and  a-half  inches  to  the  yard,  or  four  and  a-half  inches 
in  their  whole  length.  This  elevation  may  be  deter- 
mined by  placing  a  block  four  and  a-half  inches  high 
on  the  front  end  of  the  sleeper,  and  laying  a  straight 
edge,  with  a  gunner's  level  on  it,  from  this  block  to  the 
rear  end,  then  so  arrange  the  earth  as  to  bring  the  level 
true  in  this  position. 

The  next  set  of  sleepers  are  laid  against  and  inside 
of  the  first,  overlapping  them  three  feet,  having  the 
rear  ends  inclined  outwards,  so  that  the  outer  edges  of 
the  exterior  ones  shall  each  be  fifty-four  inches  from 
the  directrix,  and  the  spaces  between  the  rear  edges  of 
the  others  the  same  as  in  the  first  set,  viz.,  fifteen  and 
a-half  inches  from  the  edge  of  one  to  the  edge  of  the 
next,  all  having  the  elevation  to  the  rear  of  one  and 
a-half  inches  to  the  yard,  and  perfectly  level  across. 


104  PLATFORMS.  [PART  1. 

The  earth  is  then  rammed  firmly  around  these  sleepers, 
and  made  even  with  their  upper  surface.  The  first 
deck  plank,  with  a  hole  through  each  end  for  the  eye 
bolts,  is  laid  in  place,  perpendicular  to  the  directrix,  its 
holes  corresponding  with  those  in  the  sleepers.  The 
hurter  is  placed  on  it,  and  the  bolts  driven  through  the 
corresponding  holes  in  these  pieces. 

The  hurter  should  be  so  placed  as  to  prevent  the 
wheels  from  striking  against  the  epaulment  when  the 
piece  is  in  battery.  If  the  interior  slope  has  a  base  of 
two-sevenths  of  its  height,  the  inner  edge  of  the  hurter 
should  be  two  and  a-half  inches  from  the  foot  of  the 
slope.  The  other  planks  are  then  laid,  each  one  forced 
against  the  preceding,  the  last  plank  having  holes  for 
the  rear  eye-bolts.  By  drawing  out  or  driving  in  the 
outside  sleepers,  the  holes  through  their  rear  ends  are 
made  to  correspond  with  those  in  the  last  deck  plank, 
and  the  bolts  are  put  in. 

Drive  stakes  in  rear  of  each  sleeper,  leaving  their 
tops  level  with  the  upper  surface  of  the  platform. 
Raise,  ram,  and  level  the  earth  in  rear  of  the  platform, 
so  as  to  have  a  plain  hard  surface  to  support  the  trail 
when  the  recoil  is  great. 

The  earth  should  be  raised  nearly  as  high  as  the  plat- 
form at  the  sides,  and  well  rammed,  giving  it  a  slight 
inclination  outwards  to  allow  the  water  to  run  off. 


ART.  3.]  MORTAR.  ^^5 


r^tatfomt  tar  a  JIMortar, 


(  Plate  XXI. ) 


230.  The  mortar  platform  is  composed  of  only  half 
the  number  of  sleepers  and  deck  planks  required  for 
the  gun  or  howitzer  platform.  It  is  laid  level,  and  the 
front  and  rear  deck  planks  are  connected  by  eye-bolts 
to  every  sleeper. 

Vhe  rmii'-ffMiform, 

(  Plate  XXI. ) 

231.  The  rail-platform  for  siege  mortars,  composed 
of  three  sleepers  and  two  rails  for  the  cheeks  of  the 
mortar  bed  to  slide  on  instead  of  the  deck  planks,  is 
very  strong,  and  easily  constructed  and  laid. 

The  pieces  being  notched  to  fit,  are  driven  together 
at  the  battery,  the  rails  being  twenty-five  and  a-half 
inches  apart  from  centre  to  centre  for  the  10-inch  mor- 
tar, and  twelve  and  three-fourths  inches  for  the  8-inch 
mortar. 

The  earth  is  excavated  eight  and  a-half  inches,  the 
depth  of  the  sleepers,  and  the  bottom  made  perfectly 
level.  The  directrix  being  exactly  marked  by  stakes, 
the  platform  is  placed  in  position,  its  centre  line  coin- 
ciding with  a  cord  stretched  between  the  stakes  mark- 
ing the  line  of  fire.  The  earth  is  filled  in  as  high  as 
the  upper  surface  of  the  sleepers,  and  firmly  rammed; 
and  stakes  are  driven  in  the  rear  angles  formed  by  the 
sleepers  and  rails,  and  one  at  the  rear  end  of  each  rail. 


106  PLATFORMS.  [PART    1. 


Vhe  ricochet  pMittforu; 


232.  To  lay  this  platform,  place  the  hurter  perpen- 
dicular to  the  line  of  fire,  and  secure  it  by  four  stakes, 
one  at  each  end  and  two  in  front,  thirty-one  and  a-half 
inches  from  the  middle  towards  each  end;  lay  the  three 
sleepers  parallel  to  the  hurter,  the  first  sixteen  inches 
from  the  rear  edge  of  the  hurter,  the  second  forty-three 
and  a-half  inches  from  the  rear  edge  of  the  first,  and 
the  third  forty-three  and  a-half  inches  from  the  rear 
edge  of  the  second.  Lay  the  plank  thirty-one  and 
a-half  inches  from  the  directrix  of  the  platform  to  the 
centre  of  the  plank.  Place  the  piece  of  plank  sixty 
inches  from  the  rear  edge  of  the  last  sleeper,  and  bed 
it  in  the  ground.  Place  on  the  last  sleeper  and  this 
piece  of  plank  the  plank,  (eighty-four  inches  long,)  its 
front  end  one  hundred  and  six  inches  from  the  rear  edge 
of  the  hurter. 

This  platform  will  bear  firing  with  charges  as  high  as 
three  pounds. 

Platforms  of  this  kind  of  larger  dimensions  may  be 
used  for  guns  and  howitzers  in  firing  at  a  fixed  object 
with  full  charges. 


ART.  3.]  DIMENSIONS,    ETC.  1^ 

233.  Eimensions,  &c.,  of  siege  platforms. 


NAMES    OF   PIECES. 


Hurter  .... 
Sleepers  .... 
Deck  planks  .  . 
Stakes  (securing) . 
Stakes  (implements) 
Stakes  (pointing)  . 
Eye-bolts  (iron)   . 


GUNS    AND  HOW- 

MORTARS. 

ITZERS. 

BQ 

m 

i 

n 

p. 

. 

0) 

*j 

a. 

. 

V 

*: 

o 
6 

1 

4) 

o 

c 

M 
y 

^ 

in. 

In. 

In. 

/6. 

In 

In. 

/n. 

/6s. 

1 

1085 

3.5 

51 

_ 

_ 

. 

. 

_ 

12  108'5 

3.5 

608 

6 

96 

5 

3.5 

230 

3610815 

3.5 

1854  18 

108 

5 

3.6 

927 

6 

48  3.5 

2 

70 

6 

48 

3.5 

2 

70 

4 

322 

1 

10 

_ 

. 

_ 

- 

. 

- 

4 

48 

I 

1 

- 

4 

14 

.75 

r'nd. 

- 

12 

11 

.75 

r'nd. 

o 

=3 


234.  Dimensions,  &c.,  of  the  rail-platform. 


SIEGE   MORTARS- 

1 

KAMES   OF   PIECES. 

i 

1 

■a 
1 

1 
B 

(4-1 

0 
-=> 
s 

Sleepers   

Rails 

Stakes  (securing)   .     . 
Platform  complete  .     . 

3 

2 

14 

In. 

60 

84 
48 

In. 

11.5 
10 
3.5 

In. 

8.5 
10 
3 

lbs. 
8"l6 

Yellow 
pine. 

108  PLATFORMS.  [PART  1. 

235.  Dimensions,  &c.,  of  the  ricochet  platform. 


NAMES  OF 
PIECES. 


^ 


Kind  of  timber  used. 


Hurler    .    . 

Sleepers  .    . 
Planks    .    . 
Plank      .     . 
Pieces  of  plank 
Stakes     .     . 

Total  weight 


In. 

96 
108 
128 

84 
30 
48 


In. 

8 

5.5 
13 
13 
13 
1.25 


In. 

8 

5.5 

2.25 

2.25 

2.25 

1.25 


lbs. 

174 

147 

166 

60 

21 

32 


600 


Yellow  pine. 

Yellow  pine. 

Beech,  yellow  pine,  or  oak. 

Beech,  yellow  pine,  or  oak. 

Beech,  yellow  pine,  or  oak. 

Hickory  or  oak. 


rr: 


FLATE  20. 


UICBJtuslv,  2*Art.Ife.lt. 


r      'Jfji^AUini^X^y   '\ 


% 


;  ,<:; ','   «; ;  ..: 


S.2i^CUZUcnd,Sc. 


.* 


PART    II. 

MECHANICAL  MANCEUVRES. 

ARTICLE    I. 

GENERAL    DIRECTIONS. 
(Plates  XXII  and  XXIII. ) 


236.  The  mechanical  manceuvres  are  the  simplest 
application  of  the  mechanical  powers  for  mounting,  dis- 
mounting, moving,  and  transporting  heavy  artillery. 

237.  The  implements  generally  used  for  the  execu- 
tion of  the  manoeuvres  with  siege  pieces  are : 

6  Handt^pikes. 
^  IiOn$f  rollers. 
3  Short  rollers. 
3  Half  rollers. 
16  Blocks. 
6  Half  blocks, 
d  Quarter  blocks. 
6  Oun  chocks. 
6  Wheel  chocks. 
6  Roller  chocks. 
9  Skids. 

1  Shifting-plank. 
1  Trace-rope. 
9  Trnnnion-loops. 
1  Hammer-wrench* 

10 


112  MECHANICAL   MANffiUVRES.  [PART  2. 

implements  in  preparing  to  manoeuvre;  haul  upon  the 
rope;  and  apply  themselves  by  hand  to  move  the  car- 
riage. 

244.  When  men  on  the  opposite  sides  of  a  piece  ap- 
ply themselves  to  a  handspike,  the  handspike  used  is 
that  of  one  of  the  even  numbers;  the  man  to  whom  it 
belongs  is  at  the  small  end,  the  corresponding  odd  num- 
ber at  the  butt  end.  Those  who  come  to  their  assist- 
ance place  themselves  inside. 

245.  When  two  or  more  men  work  at  the  same  end 
of  a  handspike,  the  man  to  whom  it  belongs  is  at  the 
small  end. 

246.  When  several  handspikes  are  to  be  crossed  at 
the  muzzle  in  order  to  raise  or  lower  it,  they  are  ap- 
plied in  the  order  of  the  numbers  of  the  men  to  whom 
they  belong,  those  of  the  highest  numbers  nearest  to 
the  trunnions. 

247.  The  handspikes  used  in  the  mechanical  ma- 
noeuvres are  beveled  on  one  side,  as  these  will  enter 
into  places  or  under  bodies  where  square  handspikes 
could  not  be  used. 

248.  When  a  handspike  rests  on  a  fulcrum,  and  the 
weight  on  one  end  is  to  be  raised  by  bearing  down  on 
the  other,  the  weight  should  never  rest  on  the  beveled 
side,  as  the  -handspike  would  not  then  give  a  good 
hold,  and  would  be  liable  to  split.  In  this  case  the 
beveled  side  should  be  down.  But  if  used  for  lifting, 
as  when  two  handspikes  are  crossed  under  the  breech 
or  chase  of  a  gun  to  heave  it  upwards,  their  ends  rest- 
ing on  the  ground  or  platform,  the  beveled  side  should 
be  up. 

249.  At  the  completion  of  each  movement  of  a  ma- 
ncEuvre,  the  men  retain  the  places  they  are  in  at  its 
conclusion,  ready  to  proceed  to  the  next  movement; 


ART.    1.]  GENERAL   DIRECTIONS.  113 

resuming  their  posts  only  at  the  command  To  your 
POSTS,  which  is  given  at  the  end  of  each  manceuvre. 

250.  The  front,  when  a  piece  is  unlimbered  or  dis- 
mounted, is  the  direction  in  which  its  muzzle  points; 
when  limbered  it  is  the  direction  in  which  the  pole 
points.  In  the  execution  of  the  following  manoeuvres, 
when  a  piece  is  put  in  motion  upon  rollers,  the  terms 
back  and  forward  are  applied  to  the  direction  of  the 
breech  and  muzzle. 

251.  A  body  moving  upon  a  roller  gains  twice  the 
distance  passed  over  by  the  roller. 

252.  The  ground  should  be  level  and  firm,  and  the 
implements  in  good  order. 

253.  The  number  and  kind  of  implements  vary  with 
the  manceuvre;  but  as  nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5  and  6  always 
have  handspikes,  these  are  omitted  from  the  list  of  im- 
plements given  at  the  head  of  each  manceuvre. 


10^ 


114 


MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES. 


[part  2. 


254.  Dimensions  and  weights  of  the  implements  used 
in  the  mechanical  manceuvres.     (Siege.) 


I" 

•<s> 


-I 


BO 

< 

>  Grooved  i  in.  deep  in  the  middle. 
Top  rounded  3  inches. 

(  Pieces  of  2  inch  plank,  or  broken 
(     handspikes,  will  answer. 

Wedge  shape. 
)  Section  a  triangle.    Top  rounded 
I      ^  of  an  inch. 

Ends  beveled  on  opposite  sides. 

Ends  spliced  together. 

•HlSf9AV  piOX 

1 

OOOOOO     O     --^OOOOOOO       rf 

(MOCOdCOOO     CO     (M  CO  CO  Tl<  00  t'     '   Oi 
t-  lO  CO  CO  1-1  C^      rH             t-H          05".^ 
■^                                        .—1 

•jqSia^ 

1 

OOOOOO     00     COrfOOOOO        "ef 

•ss9U3ioiqx 

^ 

'     S   gcOOO-*     (M     (7«C0O?00(M    5   2    ' 

o  o                                             o  o 

•HIPIM 

^ 

'  cor-cooooo   00   oi co lo oo o< d r-I  ' 

'V(}3U9'J 

4 

CO 

CO 

•jgquin^ 

COCMC0(MtOCO     <M     CO  ;D  CD  d  1-1 1-j  OJ  rH 

i 



Handspikes  .    . 
Long  rollers 
Short  rollers 
Half  rollers.     . 
Blocks      .     .     . 
Half  blocks.     . 

Cluarter  blocks . 

Gun  chocks  .     . 
Wheel  chocks  . 
Roller  chocks    . 
Skids  .... 
Shifting-plank  . 
Trace-rope. 
Trunnion-loops 
Hammer-wrench  . 

Ha2f  Block. 

20  in.. 


Block. 


20  vt. 


ISVV, 


2ltn 


SecUoTL^ 


Zc.R.BJiush.  2*Arb.De2t. 


DWCUZUuid  Sc 


36 

t  ■::.' 


^ 


u 


■^■Lt.R.HJtiLsk.  2^ Art.  Dele. 


VM^OUUarui  Sc 


ART.  2.]  PRELIMINARY    MANOEUVRES.  115 


ARTICLE    II. 

PRELIMINARY    MANCEUVRES. 

liESSON     XVII. 

•jr  Crt«tt  tying  upott  tite  ground  to  ptuce  block*  under  the 
cttase  attd  reinforce* 
Vo  remove  the  btocks, 
Vo  stew  the  gun, 

Vo  tnove  tite  gun  short  distances  to  the  frottt  or  rear. 
To  move  tite  gun  short  distances  hy  rolling  it, 
Vo  roll  the  gun  up  an  iawlined  plane. 


^55,  The  implements  necessary  are : 

^  Blocks. 

6  Criin  chocks. 

^  Hkids. 

d  Triuuiion-Ioops. 

•tf  €run  lying  upon  tite  ground  to  place  blocks  under  the 
chase  and  reinforce, 

256,  The  instructor  commands : 

Raise  the  chase. 

The  gunner  takes  the  handspike  of  no.  4,  runs  its 
small  end  into  the  bore,  the  other  end  projecting  eigh- 
teen inches,  beveled  side  up,   and  chocks  it  above. 


116  MECHANICAL    MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

Nos.  1,  2,  5  and  6  cross  their  handspikes  under  and 
perpendicular  to  the  handspike  in  the  bore,  eighteen 
inches  from  the  butt  ends,  beveled  sides  up,  assisted  by 
nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10  respectively;  nos.  1,  2,  5  and  6 
facing  the  axis  of  the  piece,  and  nos.  7  and  9  and  8  and 
10  facing  each  other.  No.  4  stands  ready  with  a  block, 
and  is  assisted  to  place  it  by  no.  3. 

Heave. 

257.  The  men  at  the  handspikes  act  together  and 
raise  the  chase.  Nos.  3  and  4  place  a  block  under  and 
perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  piece,  as  far  in 
rear  of  the  chase-ring  as  it  will  go. 

Ease  away. 

258.  The  piece  is  allowed  to  rest  on  the  block,  and 
the  men  at  the  handspikes  take  another  purchase  under 
the  swell  of  the  muzzle. 

Heave. 

259.  Nos.  3  and  4  run  the  block  back  until  its  middle 
is  under  the  junction  of  the  chase  with  the  reinforce. 

Ease  away. 

260.  The  piece  is  allowed  to  rest  upon  the  block. 
Nos.  3  and  4  chock  it. 

Raise  the  breech. 

261.  Nos.  1  and  2  lay  their  handspikes  evenly  across 
the  handspike  in  the  bore,  and  are  assisted  in  bearing 
down  by  nos.  7  and  8.  Nos.  5  and  6,  assisted  by  nos. 
9  and  10,  embar  under  the  knob  of  the  cascable.  No. 
3  stands  ready  with  a  block. 


ART.  2.]  PRELIMINARY   MANOEUVRES.  117 

Heave. 

262.  Nos.  3  and  4  place  the  block  under  and  perpen- 
dicular to  the  direction  of  the  piece,  at  the  middle  of 
the  reinforce. 

Ease  away. 

263.  The  piece  is  allowed  to  rest  upon  the  block. 
Nos.  3  and  4  immediately  chock  it. 

To    YOUR   POSTS. 

264.  The  implements  are  replaced,  and  all  resume 
their  posts. 

To  retnove  the  hlocha, 

265.  The  instructor  commands: 

Raise  the  breech — Heave — Ease  away. 

The  gunner  puts  the  handspike  of  no.  4  in  the  bore, 
as  in  no.  256.  Nos.  1  and  2,  assisted  by  nos.  7  and  8, 
cross  their  handspikes  over  it  and  bear  down.  Nos.  5 
and  6,  assisted  by  nos.  9  and  10,  embar  under  the  knob 
of  the  cascable.  No.  4  takes  out  the  block,  and  the 
breech  is  allowed  to  rest  on  the  ground. 

Raise  the  chase — Heave — Ease  away. 

266.  The  men  at  the  handspikes  embar  under  the 
swell  of  the  muzzle.  Nos.  3  and  4  run  the  blocks  for- 
ward just  in  rear  of  the  chase-ring.  The  men  at  the 
handspikes  take  another  purchase  under  the  handspike 
in  the  bore. 

Heave — Ease  away. 

267.  No.  3  takes  out  the  block,  and  the  piece  is 
allowed  to  rest  upon  the  ground. 


118  MECHANICAL  MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

To    YOUR    POSTS. 

268.  The  implements  are  replaced,  and  all  resume 
their  posts. 

Remarks. 

269.  This  manoeuvre  can  be  performed  by  using  the 
limber  of  a  siege  carriage  as  a  lever. 

A  trunnion-ring,  or  a  chain  with  a  hook  at  one  end, 
is  required. 

Run  the  small  end  of  a  handspike  into  the  bore,  its 
butt  projecting  eighteen  inches;  back  the  limber  to  the 
muzzle;  raise  the  pole;  put  the  trunnion-ring,  or  the 
chain,  around  the  handspike  in  the  bore,  and  fasten  it 
on  the  pintle;  raise  the  chase,  by  bearing  down  the  pole, 
and  place  a  block  under  it. 

The  breech  can  be  raised  in  a  similar  manner  by 
placing  the  trunnion-ring,  or  chain,  around  the  cascable. 

270.  The  limber  makes  a  powerful  lever,  and  may 
be  used  as  such  in  many  cases.  If  the  weight  to  be 
raised  is  too  high  to  apply  the  trunnion-ring  from  the 
pintle,  the  pole  should  be  turned  over  so  as  to  bring  the 
pintle  below,  (first  reversing  the  linch-pins,)  and  apply 
the  rear  end  of  the  fork  under  the  weight  to  be  raised. 

Vo  »leu)  the  gun, 

271.  If  the  vent  is  not  uppermost,  the  instructor 
commands : 

Slew  the  piece  to  the  left  (or  right) — Heave. 

The  gunner  passes  a  trunnion-loop  over  one  of  the 
trunnions,  and  inserts  the  handspike  of  no.  3  or  4, 
according  to  the  side  on  which  he  acts. 

If  the  piece  is  to  be  slewed  to  the  left,  he  is  assisted 
in  heaving  by  nos.  1  and  5.  Nos.  2  and  6  chock  the 
piece  on  the  left  by  placing  their  handspikes  horizon- 


ART.  2.]  PRELIMINARY    MANffiUVRES.  119 

tally  upon  the  blocks,  and  perpendicularly  to  the  axis, 
the  butt  ends  against  the  piece,  beveled  sides  up.  Nos. 
3  and  4  attend  to  taking  out  and  replacing  the  chocks. 

If  the  piece  is  to  be  slewed  to  the  right,  nos.  2  and 
6  assist  the  gunner,  and  nos.  1  and  5  chock  with  their 
handspikes. 

Heaving  the  piece  upon  these  handspikes  causes  it 
to  turn  upon  its  axis  in  its  place. 

Vo  move  the  gn»  thort  diatancea  to  the  front  or  rear, 

272.  Place  the  blocks  under  the  middle  of  the  chase 
and  reinforce,  and  lay  two  skids  under  the  trunnions, 
parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece.  Nos.  5  and  6  embar 
under  the  rear  or  front  of  the  trunnions,  and  move  the 
piece  to  the  front  or  rear. 

Vo  §not>e  the  gun  »hort  Matances  by  rolling  it, 

273.  Place  a  skid  under  the  middle  of  the  reinforce, 
and  another  under  the  middle  of  the  chase,  and  roll  the 
gun  over  on  its  axis.  By  inclining  the  skids  as  required, 
and  slewing  the  muzzle  to  suit,  it  may  be  moved  in  dif- 
ferent directions. 

Vo  roil  the  gun  up  an  inclined  plane, 

274.  Additional  implements  required : 

4  Skids. 

2  Single  prolonged. 

The  gun  is  on  two  blocks  at  the  foot  of  the  ramp,  its 
axis  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  ramp,  and 
the  muzzle  turned  to  the  side  on  which  there  is  most 
room. 

275.  Nos.  3  and  4  and  5  and  6  lay  two  skids  parallel 
to  each  other,  and  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the 
piece,  at  the  middle  of  the  chase  and  reinforce;  they 


120  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

then  lay  the  other  skids  in  the  prolongation  of  the  first. 
Nos.  1  and  2  embar  under  the  piece  with  their  hand- 
spikes;* chock  the  piece  when  necessary;  and  throw 
forward  the  chase  when  required.  Nos.  3  and  4  lay 
the  ropes  on  each  side  of  the  lower  trunnion,  and 
assist  the  chief  of  detachment  and  gunner  to  overhaul 
one  end  of  each.  These  ends  are  passed  over  the 
piece,  one  a  few  inches  in  front  and  the  other  the  same 
distance  in  rear  of  its  trunnions,  and  three  turns  taken 
around  the  piece,  the  turns  gaining  towards  the  trun- 
nions; just  enough  of  the  ropes  being  overhauled  for 
the  men  to  take  hold  of  their  ends. 

All  the  men,  except  nos.  1  and  2  and  the  gunner, 
haul  upon  the  ropes. 

The  odd  numbers  haul  upon  the  right  rope — i.  e.  the 
rope  on  the  right  of  one  who,  hauling  either  rope,  faces 
towards  the  piece — the  even  numbers  upon  the  left. 
The  gunner  holds  in  his  hand  the  slack  of  both  ropes. 

Heave  and  haul. 

276.  All  act  together  and  roll  the  piece  up  the  skids 
until  it  beccmes  necessary  to  rectify  the  diagonal  direc- 
tion it  will  assume. 

277.  As  the  breech  gains  on  the  muzzle,  the  in- 
structor commands: 

Halt — Slew  forward  the  chase. 

The  numbers  who  act  on  the  rope  towards  the  rein- 
force cease  hauling.  Nos.  1  and  2  with  their  hand- 
spikes (or  crowbars)  assist  the  other  numbers  to  throw 
forward  the  chase. 


♦Crowbars  curved  at  the  butt  ends,  and  beveled,  are  better  for 
this  operation. 


ART.   2.]  PRELIMINARY    MAN(EUVRES.  |^ 

f  Halt — Shift  the  skids. 

278.  Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  piece  with  the  butts  of 
their  handspikes.  Nos.  3,  4,  5  and  6  shift  the  skids, 
passing  them  over  the  piece. 

279.  When  the  slack  of  the  rope  has  been  drawn 
out,  the  instructor  directs  nos.  1  and  2  to  chock  the 
piece,  and  commands: 

Overhaul  the  ropes. 

The  men  nearest  to  the  piece  slack  the  turns,  while 
the  gunner  and  chief  of  detachment  haul  all  the  slack, 
except  enough  for  the  men  to  hold  on  by,  to  the  lower 
side  of  the  piece. 


11 

'41 


122  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


liESSON    XVIIl. 

•4  JBowiixer  lying  upon  the  ground  to  place  "blocks  under 

the  chase  and  reinforce^ 
Vo  remove  tite  blocks, 

Vo  raise  tite  howitxer  upon  its  tnuxsle, 
Vo  slew  the  howitzer  while  standing  upon  its  ntuxxle. 


280.  The  implements  necessary  are : 


5  Blocki». 

1  Half  block. 

6  Oun  chocks. 

3  Wheel  chocks. 

1  Trace-rope. 

2  Trunnion-loops. 


•4  Howitzer  lying   upon   the  ground  to  place  blocks  under 
the  chase  and  reinforce, 

281.  The  instructor  commands: 

Raise  the  chase — Heave — Ease  away. 

Nos.  1  and  2  insert  their  handspikes  eighteen  inches 
in  the  bore,  which  the  gunner  chocks  above  with  a 
wheel  chock.  Nos.  7  and  8  assist  nos.  1  and  2.  No. 
4,  assisted  by  no.  3,  places  a  block  under  the  chase,  as 
near  the  trunnions  as  it  will  go,  and  chocks. 


art.  2.]         preliminary  manoeuvres.  133 

Lower  the  chase — Heave — Ease  away. 

282.  Nos.  1  and  2  shift  the  wheel  chock  below  their 
handspikes,  and  bear  down  the  muzzle.  Nos.  4  and  3 
place  a  block  under  the  breech,  and  chock.  The  gun- 
ner lifts  at  the  knob  of  the  cascable  and  steadies  the 
breech. 

Vo  rentore  tite  hlocUs, 

283.  The  blocks  are  removed  in  the  inverse  way  to 
the  foregoing,  by  the  same  commands. 

Vo  raUe  the  hotmitxer  upon  its  muxsMe, 

284.  The  howitzer  is  lying  upon  two  blocks,  one  un- 
der the  front  of  the  trunnions,  the  other  under  the 
breech. 

285.  The  instructor  commands : 

Raise  the  chase — Heave — Ease  away- 

The  chase  is  raised  as  in  No.  281.  A  half  block  is 
placed  upon  the  front  block,  and  the  piece  is  chocked. 

Lower  the  chase — Heave — Ease  away. 

286.  The  chase  is  lowered  as  in  no.  282.  A  block  is 
placed  upon  the  rear  block. 

Raise  the  chase — Heave — Ease  away. 

287.  A  block  is  added  to  the  front  scaffold,  the  half 
block  topmost. 

Lower  the  chase — Heave — Ease  away. 

288.  A  block  is  placed  upon  the  rear  scaffold. 

Nos.  3  and  4  alternate  in  placing  the  blocks — no.  4 


1^  MECHANICAL   MANOEUVRES.  [PART  % 

placing  the  first — and  carefully  attend  to  the  chocks. 
Nos.  5  and  6  steady  the  scaffolds  with  their  handspikes. 

Lower  the  muzzle — Heave — Ease  away. 

289.  No.  1  takes  out  the  wheel  chock.  Nos.  5  and  6 
embar  under  the  front  of  the  trunnions,  to  steady  the 
rear  scaffold.  Nos.  3  and  4  take  the  two  blocks  of  the 
front  scaffold  and  place  them  side  by  side,  parallel  with 
the  axis  of  the  piece,  their  rear  ends  about  two  inches 
in  rear  of  the  muzzle.  Nos.  1,  2,  7  and  8  carefully 
allow  the  muzzle  to  rest  upon  the  blocks. 

Raise  the  breech. 

290.  The  gunner  attaches  the  rope  by  the  middle 
with  a  double  hitch  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable;  crosses 
the  ends  on  the  highest  point  of  the  base-ring,  and 
passes  them  to  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10.  No.  2  places  the 
middle  of  his  handspike  under  the  knob  of  the  casca- 
ble, and  is  assisted  to  lift  by  the  gunner  and  nos.  1,  3 
and  4.     Nos.  5  and  6  embar  under  the  breech. 

Heave  and  haul. 

291.  They  act  steadily  and  carefully  together  and 
raise  the  piece  on  its  muzzle  upon  the  blocks. 

iVo  »lew  the  hawitxer  white  atattding  upon  its  tnuxzte* 

.292.  The  instructor  commands: 

Slew  the  piece. 

The  gunner  passes  the  trunnion-loops  over  the  trun- 
nions, into  which  nos.  1  and  2  insert  their  handspikes 
horizontally,  and  pull  at  the  small  ends.  Nos.  5  and  6 
keep  the  blocks  in  their  places,  chocking  them  with 
their  handspikes. 

293.  When  it  is  desired  to  lay  the  howitzer  on  the 
ground,  it  is  pushed  over  on  planks  laid  to  receive  it. 


ART.  2.]  PRELlMINARr   MANOEUVRES.  ^f 


liESSON     XIX. 

•^  Jftortar   tying    wpou    the  ground    to    raise  it    upon  it$ 

tnuxxte. 
TTo  siett)  the  utortar. 
To  $te*p  the  ntortar-bed. 


^4.  The  implement  necessary  is: 

1  Trace-rope. 

•€  JfKortar  tying  upott  the  ground  to  raise  it  upon  its 
ntusxte, 

295.  The  instructor  commands : 

Raise  the  mortar  upon  its  muzzle. 

The  gunner,  taking  the  two  ends  of  the  rope,  passes 
them  under  and  up  over  the  trunnions  to  the  front,  and 
hands  them  to  nos.  5,  6,  7,  8,  9  and  10,  who  haul 
upon  them,  keeping  them  parallel  with  the  axis  of  the 
piece.  Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  to  the  front,  embar  under 
the  trunnions.  Nos.  3  and  4,  passing  to  the  rear  of  nos. 
1  and  2,  stand  ready  to  embar  under  the  mortar  as  soon 
as  its  elevation  will  permit. 

Heave  and  haul.* 

296.  They  act  steadily  together  and  raise  the  mortar 
upon  its  muzzle. 

11» 


126  MECHANICAL    MAN(EUVRES.  [PART  2. 

Vo  slew  the  tnortar, 

297.  The  instructor  commands: 

Slew  the  piece  to  the  right  (or  left). 

Nos.  1  and  2  lay  the  butt  ends  of  their  handspikes 
upon  the  trunnions,  overlapping  them  by  about  an 
inch,  beveled  sides  up.  The  gunner  lashes  them  to  the 
trunnions  with  the  rope.  Nos.  1  and  3  and  2  and  4 
apply  themselves  to  the  small  ends  of  the  handspikes 
to  haul  in  opposite  directions. 

Heave. 

298.  The  mortar  is  turned  round  upon  its  axis.  By 
alternately  bearing  down  upon  one  handspike  and  haul- 
ing upon  the  other,  it  is  moved  in  any  direction  that  the 
instructor  may  direct. 

Vo  slew  the  ntortar-hed, 

299.  The  bed  is  either  with  or  without  its  mortar. 

300.  The  instructor  commands: 

Slew  the  bed  to  the  right  (or  left). 

Nos.  1  and  3,  facing  to  the  front,  embar  under  the 
rear  notches,  no.  3  under  the  inside  of  the  left  notch. 
Nos.  2  and  4,  facing  to  the  front,  embar  under  the  front 
notches,  no.  2  under  the  inside  of  the  right  notch. 

Heave. 

301.  They  act  together  and  by  repeated  efforts  the 
bed  is  turned  round  in  its  place. 

302.  To  slew  the  bed  to  the  left,  nos.  1  and  3  embar 
under  the  front  notches,  and  nos.  2  and  4  under  the 
rear  notches. 


ART.  2.]      PRELIMINARY  MANOEUVRES.  127 


liESSON     XX. 

Vo  place  a  long  roller  under  a  ntortar-hed* 
Vo  remove  the  long  roller. 


303.  The  implements  necessary  are; 

1  liOng;  roller. 

1  Block. 

*  3  Half  blocks. 

3  Quarter  blocks, 
a  l^heel  chocks. 

2  Boiler  chocks. 

Vo  place  a  long  roller  under  a  tnetriar-bed, 

304.  The  mortar  is  on  its  bed,  and  the  bed  upon  the 
ground. 

305.  The  instructor  commands: 

Raise  the  right  cheek. 

No.  1  embars  under  the  notch  nearest  to  him,  per- 
pendicularly to  the  cheek,  and  is  assisted  by  no.  7. 
No.  5  embars  in  like  manner  under  the  rear  notch, 
assisted  by  no.  9. 

Heave. 

306.  No.  3  places  a  half  block  lengthwise  under  the 
cheek,  its  middle  five  inches  in  rear  of  the  vertical 


19B  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

diameter  of  the  trunnions,   and  then  a  quarter  block  in 
the  same  direction,  its  middle  under  the  front  notch. 

Ease  away. 

307.  The  cheek  is  lowered  upon  the  half  block. 
Raise  the  left  cheek — Heave — Ease  away. 

308.  No.  2,  assisted  by  no.  8,  embars  under  the  front 
notch.  No.  6,  assisted  by  no.  10,  embars  under  the 
rear  notch.  No.  4  places  a  half  block  and  a  quarter 
block  in  the  same  way  as  under  the  right  cheek,  and 
the  bed  is  allowed  to  rest  upon  the  two  half  blocks. 

Raise  the  trail. 

309.  The  gunner  places  the  block  just  in  rear  of  the 
middle  transom,  and  upon  it  the  two  wheel  chocks  to 
serve  as  fulcrums.  Nos.  5  and  6,  assisted  by  nos.  9 
and  10,  embar  upon  these  chocks,  under  the  middle 
transom. 

Heave. 

310.  No.  4,  assisted  by  no.  3,  places  the  long  roller 
upon  the  half  blocks  under  the  cheeks,  and  chocks  it. 

Ease  away. 

311.  The  bed  is  allowed  to  rest  upon  the  quarter 
blocks  and  long  roller. 

Vo  reniore  tite  tong  rolter. 

The  long  roller  and  blocks  are  removed  in  the 
inverse  way. 


ART.  2.]  PRELIMINARY   MANCEUVRES.  129 


I^EISSON    XXI. 


To  Umber, 

To  unlitnber. 

To  tnove  a  piece,  ar  Us  carriage,  to  the  front  or  rear, 

Vo  crogS'tift  a  piece. 


Vo  tintber, 

312.  The  instructor  commands : 

Limber  up. 

No.  2  inserts  his  handspike  in  the  bore,  and  is  assisted 
to  bear  down  by  no.  1.  Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  wheels 
front  and  rear.  No.  4  then  crosses  his  handspike  un- 
der the  stock,  and  is  assisted  to  lift  by  nos.  3,  5  and  6; 
nos.  5  and  6  next  to  the  stock,  facing  to  the  rear,  and 
nos.  3  and  4  facing  each  other.  The  gunner,  assisted 
by  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10,  bring  up  the  limber. 

Heave. 

313.  The  trail  is  raised.  Nos.  3  and  4,  quitting  the 
handspikes,  seize  the  wheels  of  the  limber  and  direct 
the  pintle  into  the  lunette.  No.  3  gives  the  word 
Forward — Back — Right — Left,  according  as  he 
wishes  the  limber  to  be  moved,  and  when  the  pintle  is 
in  hooks  the  lashing  chain. 


130  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

Vo  uniimber, 

314.  The  instruclor  commands : 

Unlimeer. 

Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  wheels.  No.  3  unhooks  the 
lashing  chain.     All  apply  themselves  as  in  limbering. 

Heave. 

315.  The  trail  is  carefully  raised  to  disengage  the  pin- 
tle. Nos.  3  and  4  seize  the  limber  wheels  and,  after 
freeing  the  limber  from  the  trail,  assist  nos.  5  and  6  to 
lower  the  latter  to  the  ground. 

316.  In  limbering  and  unlimbering  a  howitzer,  nos. 

1  and  2  insert  their  handspikes  in  the  bore. 

317.  If  the  carriage  is  without  its  piece,  nos.  1  and 

2  embar  through  the  wheels  and  under  the  rear  of  the 
cheeks. 

Vo  taove  a  piece,  or  its  carriage,  to  tlie  front  or  rear, 

318.  The  instructor  commands: 

Piece  (or  carriage)  to  the  front  (or  rear) — 
Heave. 

If  the  piece  is  unlimbered,  nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  embar 
as  in  moving  the  piece  to  and  from  battery.  Nos.  5 
and  6  embar  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts.  By  repeated 
efforts  it  is  moved  to  the  front  or  rear. 

319.  If  the  carriage,  unlimbered,  is  without  its 
piece,  nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  or,  when  they  are  engaged, 
nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10,  apply  themselves  to  the  wheels  by 
hand.  Nos.  5  and  6  embar  under  the  manceuvring 
bolts. 


ART.   2.]  PRELIMINARY    MANCEUVRES.  1^1 

320.  If  the  piece  is  limbered,  nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  em- 
bar  at  the  hind  wheels.  Nos.  5  and  6  embar  at  the 
fore  wheels.  Nos.  9  and  10  apply  themselves  by  hand 
to  the  fore  wheels.  Nos.  7  and  8  go  to  the  splinter- 
bar.  The  gunner  directs  the  pole,  and  gives  the  com- 
mand Heave  at  every  effort. 

321.  If  the  carriage,  limbered,  is  without  its  piece, 
all  apply  themselves  by  hand  at  the  positions  designated 
in  no.  320. 

X'o  cross-iift  a  piece, 

322.  When  it  becomes  necessary  to  move  a  carriage 
short  distances  to  the  right  or  left,  the  instructor  com- 
mands: 

Cross-lift  to  the  right  (or  left). 

Nos.  2  and  4  embar  perpendicularly  under  the  left 
wheel.  Nos.  1  and  3,  crossing  over,  embar  under  the 
inside  of  the  right  wheel. 

Heave. 

323.  All  act  together  and  throw  the  carriage  to  the 
right. 

To  move  the  carriage  to  the  left,  nos.  2  and  4  cross 
over  to  the  right  side,  and  embar  under  the  inside  of 
the  left  wheel. 

324.  When  the  piece  is  on  its  carriage,  short  pur 
chases  should  be  taken. 


132  MECHANICAL   MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


liEI^SON    XXII. 

•#  €rtctt  being  on  ii»  cat'riage  to  place  a  »hori  roller  under 

the  reinforce, 
•^  Mowitxer  being  on  it$  carriage  to  place  a  short  roller 

under  the  reinforce. 
Vo  remore  tite  short  roller, 
Vo  insert  Itandspikes  in  the  trunnion  holes, 
TTo  restore  the  handspikes. 


325.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

1  Short  roller. 
6  TTheel  chocks. 
3  Boiler  chocks. 

•if  €fuu  being  on  its  carriage  to  place  a  short  roller  under 
tite  reinforce, 

326.  The  piece  is  either  limbered  or  unlimbered. 

327.  The  instructor  commands : 

Lower  the  chase. 

No.  2  inserts  his  handspike  in  the  bore,  and  is 
assisted  to  bear  down  by  no.  1.  Nos.  3  and  4  chock 
the  wheels  front  and  rear;  take  off  the  cap-squares; 
and  then  prepare  to  assist  nos.  1  and  2  by  applying 
themselves  to  the  handspike  of  no.  4,  which  is  crossed 
upon  the  muzzle,  both  facing  to  the  rear.  Nos.  5  and 
6  embar  between  the  cheeks  and  reinforce,  as  near  the 


ART.   2.]  PRELIMINARY    MAN(EUVRES.  133 

trunnions  as  practicable.     The  gunner  takes  the  short 
roller  and  a  chock,  and  advances  to  the  reinforce. 

Heave. 

328.  The  chase  is  lowered.  Nos.  1  and  ^  thrust^the 
handspike  farther  into  the  bore  in  proportion  as  the 
muzzle  nears  the  ground,  and  then  apply  themselves 
to  the  handspike  of  no.  4.  The  gunner  inserts  the 
short  roller  perpendicularly  to  the  stock,  its  ends  equi- 
distant from  the  cheeks,  as  far  under  the  trunnions»as 
it  will  go,  and  chocks  it. 

Ease  away. 

329.  The  piece  is  carefully  rested  on  the  roller.  The 
gunner  takes  out  the  elevating  screw,  and  places  it  in 
rear  of  his  post,  resting  it  upright  upon  its  handles. 

To    YOUR    POSTS. 

330.  All  resume  their  posts,  no.  2  leaving  his  hand- 
spike in  the  bore. 

•M  BoHfitxer  being  ot*  it$  carriage  to  place  a  short  roller 
wttder  the  reinforce. 

Executed  as  prescribed  for  a  gun  in  no.  326  and  fol- 
lowing. The  roller  rests  under  the  reinforce  at  its 
junction  with  the  recess.  The  gunner  removes  and 
returns  the  quoin. 

Vo  remove  the  short  roller* 

331.  The  instructor  commands: 

Lower  the  chase. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5  and  6  apply  themselves  as  in  no. 
327.     The  gunner  replaces  the  elevating  screw. 
12 


134  mechanical  manceuvres.  [part  2» 

Heave. 

332.  The  chase  is  lowered  sufficiently  to  enable  the 
gunner  to  remove  the  roller. 

*  Ease  away. 

333.  The  base-ring  is  carefully  rested  on  the  ele- 
vating screw. 

To   YOUR   POSTS. 

334.  Nos.  3  and  4  unchock  the  wheels,  and  put  on 
the  cap-squares.  The  implements  are  replaced,  and 
all  resume  their  posts. 

Vo  insert  handspihes  in  tite  trunnion  hotea, 

335.  The  instructor  causes  a  short  roller  to  be  placed 
under  the  reinforce,  as  prescribed  in  no.  326  and  fol- 
lowing, and  then  commands: 

Raise  the  chase. 

No.  4  passes  his  handspike  under  that  of  no.  2. 
Nos.  5  and  6  stand  ready  near  the  trunnions  to  insert 
their  handspikes. 

Heave — Ease  A^VAY. 

336.  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  raise  the  chase.  Nos.  5 
and  6  run  the  butts  of  their  handspikes  under  the  trun- 
nions, beveled  sides  to  the  front,  the  ends  resting 
against  the  rimbases.  The  trunnions  are  allowed  to 
rest  upon  the  butts  of  the  handspikes. 

To   YOUR   POSTS. 

337.  All  resume  their  posts,  nos.  5  and  6  leaving 
their  handspikes  in  the  trunnion  holes. 


f      ART.  2.]  PRELIMINARY   MANCEUVRES.  135 

Vo  retnaoe  the  handapikes, 

338.  The  instructor  commands: 

Raise  the  chase — Heave — Ease  away. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  raise  the  chase  to  enable  nos.  5 
and  6  to  take  out  the  handspikes,  and  then  ease  the 
trunnions  into  their  holes. 

The  instructor  then  causes  the  short  roller  to  be 
removed  as  in  no.  331  and  following. 


136  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


1.ESSON     XXIII. 

To  ahift  n  €h*n  from  tite   trunnion   holes    to  its   traveUing 

bed. 
Vo   shift  a  Gun    from   its    travelling   bed  to   the  trunnion 

holes, 
To  shift  a  Howitser  from  the  trunnion  holes  to  its  travel' 

ling  bed. 
To  shift  a  Howitzer   from   its    travelling    bed   to  the  trnn^ 

nion  holes, 
Vo  change  a  limber   when   the   gun   or   howitxer   is  on  its 

travelling  bed, 
Vo  citange  the  limber  of  a  loaded  ntortar-wagon. 


(  Plates  XXIV  and  XXV. ) 

339.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

1  Short  roller. 
4  Blocks. 
1  Half  block. 
6  irheel  chocks. 
1  Trace-rope. 

ZV»  shift  a  Gum  from  the  trunnion  holes  to  its  travelling 
bed, 

340.  The  instructor  having  caused  the  piece  to  be 
limbered,  commands: 

Place  the  short  roller  under  the  reinforce. 

Executed  as  in  no.  326  and  following. 


art.  2.]         preliminary  manoeuvres.  137 

Attach  the  rope. 

341.  The  gunner  attaches  the  rope  by  its  middle  with 
a  double  hitch  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  and,  passing 
its  ends  to  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10,  stands  ready  to  haul 
down  upon  it,  and  guide  the  breech  into  the  bolster. 
No.  3  sees  that  the  lashing-chain  is  hooked.  Nos.  4 
and  6  cross  their  handspikes  under  that  of  no.  2,  no.  6 
next  to  the  muzzle,  and  are  assisted  by  nos.  3  and  5 
respectively. 

Shift  the  piece — Heave  and  haul. 

342.  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5  and  6  lift  smartly  and  push 
at  the  muzzle,  and  the  piece  is  hauled  until  the  trun- 
nions are  over  their  travelling  position. 

Remove  the  short  roller — Raise  the  chase. 

343.  No.  2  chocks  his  handspike  above.  Nos.  7  and 
8  go  to  the  assistance  of  nos.  3  and  4,  and  nos.  9  and 
10  to  the  assistance  of  nos.  5  and  6;  all  facing  towards 
the  muzzle.  The  gunner  places  himself  under  the 
chase  at  the  head  of  the  stock. 

Heave — Ease  aw  at. 

344.  The  chief  of  detachment  moves  out  the  roller, 
which  is  stopped  by  the  gunner  on  the  head  of  the 
stock,  and  the  chase  is  lowered  upon  it.  The  men  at 
the  handspikes  take  a  new  hold. 

Heave — Ease  away. 

345.  The  gunner  takes  out  the  roller,  and  the  chase 
is  lowered  upon  the  stock. 

To  YOUR  posts. 

^  346.  The  gunner  takes  off  the  rope.     Nos.  3  and  4 
12* 


138  MECHANICAL    MAN(EUVRES.  [PART  2. 

put  on  the  cap-squares  and  unchock  the  wheels.  _  The 
implements  are  replaced,  and  all  resume  their  posts. 

Vo  shift  a  Gun  front  its  travetUng  bed  to  the  trunnion 
holes, 

347.  The  instructor  commands: 

Place  the  short  roller  under  the  chase. 

Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  wheels  front  and  rear.  The 
short  roller  is  inserted  under  the  chase,  and  rolled  back 
until  it  rests  under  the  trunnions,  by  the  means  and 
commands  prescribed  for  its  removal  in  no.  343  and 
following.  The  gunner  attaches  the  rope  by  its  middle 
to  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  and  passes  its  ends  to  nos. 
7,  8,  9  and  10.  No.  4  crosses  his  handspike  above  that 
of  no.  2. 

Shift  the  piece — Heave. 

348.  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  bear  down  at  the  muzzle, 
and,  as  the  piece  rolls  forward,  guide  the  trunnions  into 
their  holes. 

The  short  roller  is  then  removed  as  in  no.  331  and 
following. 

Vo  shift  a  BEowitser  from  the  trunnion  holes  to  its  travel^ 

ling-  bed. 

To  shift  a  Wowitxer  front  its   travelling  bed  to  the  trunm 

nion  holes » 

349.  Executed  as  for  the  gun,  except  in  removing 
and  placing  the  short  roller  by  the  chase,  which  is 
done  as  follows: 

Nos.  3  and  4  each  hands  a  wheel  chock  to  no.  2,  who 
places  one  about  eighteen  inches  in  the  bore  under  the 
butt  end  of  his  handspike,  and  the  other  in  the  muzzle 
above  the  handspike.  No.  4  crosses  his  handspike  un- 
der that  of  no.  2.  Nos.  I,  2,  3  and  4  raise  the  chase, 
while  the  gunner  removes  or  places  the  short  roller. 


ART.   2.]  PRELIMINARY    MANOEUVRES.  139 

In  placing  the  short  roller  its  vertical  diameter  should 
rest  just  in  advance  of  the  rimbases. 

Remarks, 

350.  When  the  howitzer  is  transported  on  its  travel- 
ling bed,  a  temporary  bolster  should  be  constructed  to 
support  the  breech.  The  short  roller  resting  on  a  quar- 
ter block  lashed  to  the  stock,  and  supporting  the  knob 
of  the  cascable,  may  answer  for  this  purpose. 

351.  If  there  is  no  place  for  the  quoin  under  the 
stock,  it  may  be  lashed  on  the  trail  in  front  of  the  bol- 
ster; holes,  or  a  groove,  being  made  in  its  lower  side 
to  admit  the  nuts  of  the  lunette  bolts. 

352.  The  short  roller  (of  which  one  should  always 
accompany  every  gun  and  howitzer)  is  suspended  from 
the  knob  of  the  cascable  by  a  cord  passed  through  it. 

353.  The  elevating  screw  is  run  in  on  the  lower  side 
of  the  stock,  and  held  in  its  place  by  a  lashing-strap. 

354.  The  sponge  and  rammer  are  lashed  upon  the 
piece,  their  heads  projecting  beyond  the  base-ring.  A 
convenient  way  of  transporting  them  is  by  two  iron 
collars,  containing  hooks,  buckled  upon  the  breech  and 
chase. 

355.  The  handspikes  are  placed  against  the  cheeks, 
three  on  each  side. 

356.  A  trace-rope  should  accompany  each  piece  of 
siege  artillery.  It  will  be  found  useful  not  only  in 
shifting  the  piece,  but  in  lashing,  and  in  extricating  the 
carriage  and  mortar-wagon  from  difficulties. 

357.  To  accustom  the  men  to  prepare  a  piece  for 
travelling,  the  instructor  may  cause  the  implements  to 
be  placed  as  above  indicated.     To  do  this,  he  will,  be- 


140  MECHANICAL    MANffiUVRES.  [PART  2. 

fore  resuming  posts  in  the  manoeuvre  of  shifting  SLpiece 
to  its  travelHng  bed,  command: 

Put  on  the  implements. 

The  gunner  places  the  vent-cover,  short  roller,  quoin, 
elevating  screw,  and  water  bucket;  if  it  be  necessary 
to  lash  the  piece  to  its  bed,  he  is  assisted  by  nos.  1,  2, 
3,  4,  5  and  6.  No.  2  puts  in  the  tompion.  Nos,  1 
and  2  fasten  on  the  sponge  and  rammer,  and,  assisted 
by  nos.  3  and  4,  put  on  the  handspikes. 

358.  To  prepare  the  piece  for  action  the  instructor 
will,  before  shifting  it  to  its  trunnion-holes,  command: 

Remove  the  implements. 

The  same  numbers  that  put  up  the  implements 
remove  them. 

Vo  change  a  Umber  when  the  gun  or  hmvitser  is  on  iig 
iravelling  bed, 

359.  The  instructor  commands: 

Change  the  limber. 

Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  rear  wheels  front  and  rear, 
and  build  a  scaffold  of  four  blocks  under  and  perpen- 
dicular to  the  stock,  just  in  rear  of  the  bolster.  The 
gunner  and  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10  raise  the  trail,  by  bear- 
ing down  on  the  pole,  so  as  to  allow  no.  4  to  place  a 
half  block  on  top  of  the  scaffold.  The  old  limber  is 
replaced  by  the  new,  and  the  trail  raised  as  before  to 
permit  nos.  3  and  4  to  remove  the  half  block  and  blocks. 

Vo  citange  the  Htnber  of  a  loaded  utortarmveagou* 

Executed  as  prescribed  in  no.  359. 

360.  In  this  case  the  leverage  of  the  pole  of  the 
limber  may  be  increased  by  no.  3  inserting  a  wheel 
chock,  or  the  butt  end  of  his  handspike,  between  the 
stock  and  the  rear  of  the  fork  of  the  limber. 


U.RMJUiahZf'Art.Velt. 


PJi^Cleliand  So. 


#4^'. 


0 


ART.[3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  141 


ARTICLE    III. 


MANCEUVRES    WITH   THE   HANDSPIKE. 


liESSON     XXIV. 

2V»  utount  a  Chtn  upon  its  carriage, 
Vo  dismount  the  gun, 

Vo  tnount  a  Hotvitzer  upon  its  carriage, 
Vo  distnount  t/te  lunvitser. 


(Plate  XXVI.) 


361.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

1  Short  roller. 

3  Half  rollers. 
14  Blocks. 

4  Half  blocks. 
6  Crun  chocks. 

6  IVheel  chocks. 
'2  Roller  chocks. 
9  Skids. 
1  Trace-rope. 

Vo  mount  a  Gun  upon  its  carriage, 

362.  The  piece  is   on  two   blocks,    one   under  the 
junction  of  the  chase  with  the  reinforce,  the  other  un- 


142  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

der  the  middle  of  the  reinforce;  the  carriage,  limbered, 
cap-squares  removed,  is  in  the  prolongation  of  the 
axis  of  the  piece,  the  head  of  its  cheeks  two  yards 
from  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

363.  The  instructor  commands: 

Raise  the  chase. 

No.  2  inserts  the  butt  of  his  handspike  in  the  bore; 
chocks  it  above;  and  is  assisted  by  no.  1.  No.  6 
crosses  his  handspike  under  that  of  no.  2,  close  to  the 
muzzle,  and  is  assisted  by  nos.  5,  9  and  10.  No.  8 
crosses  the  handspike  of  no.  4  under  that  of  no.  2, 
eighteen  inches  farther  to  the  front,  and  is  assisted  by 
no.  7.  All  face  towards  the  muzzle.  Nos.  3  and  4, 
assisted  by  the  gunner  and  chief  of  detachment,  place 
the  skids  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece,  their  middle 
opposite  to  the  trunnions,  and  their  inner  faces  one 
inch  outside  of  the  face  of  the  trunnions.  No.  4  stands 
ready  with  a  half  roller. 

Heave. 

364.  The  chase  is  raised.  No.  3  takes  out  the  front 
block,  and  assists  no.  4  to  place  the  half-roller  under 
the  junction  of  the  chase  with  the  reinforce,  its  ends 
resting  equally  upon  the  skids;  they  chock  the  piece  on 
the  half  roller. 

Lower  the  chase — Heave. 

365.  Nos.  6  and  8  cross  their  handspikes  above  the 
handspike  in  the  bore,  and  the  chase  is  borne  down. 
No.  3  takes  out  the  rear  block,  and  assists  no.  4  to 
place  the  half  roller  under  the  reinforce,  about  ten  or 
twelve  inches  in  rear  of  the  trunnions;  they  chock 
the  piece  upon  this  half  roller. 


art.  3.]  with  the  handspike.  143 

Raise  the  chase — Heave. 

366.  The  chase  is  raised  as  before.  The  gunner 
and  chief  of  detachment  raise  the  front  half  roller, 
and  nos.  3  and  4  place  each  a  half  block  under  its  ends 
upon  the  skids. 

Lower  the  chase — Heave. 

367.  Executed  as  before.  The  gunner  and  chief  of 
detachment  raise  the  rear  half  roller,  and  nos.  3  and  4 
place  each  a  block  under  its  ends  upon  the  skids,  end 
to  end  with  the  half  blocks. 

368.  The  operation  of  raising  and  lowering  the  chase 
is  continued  until  the  front  scaffold  consists  on  each 
side  of  one  half  block,  three  blocks,  and  one  half  block, 
and  the  rear  scaffold  of  four  blocks.  The  gunner  and 
chief  of  detachment  in  raising  the  half  rollers  move 
them  outwards,  and  the  blocks  are  placed  from  the 
inside.  On  placing  the  last  half  blocks  the  front  half 
roller  is  placed  under  the  trunnions. 

Back  the  carriage. 

369.  The  gunner  repairs  to  the  pole.  Nos.  5  and  6 
apply  themselves  to  the  fore  wheels.  Nos.  7,  8,  9  and 
10  apply  themselves  to  the  rear  wheels.  All  exert 
themselves  and  the  carriage  is  run  under  the  breech. 

Nos.  1  and  2  maintain  the  piece  on  the  front  half 
roller;  nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  rear  scaffold;  and  the 
carriage  is  run  back  carefully  until  the  head  of  the 
cheeks  touch  the  remaining  half  roller.  Nos.  3  and  4 
chock  the  hind  wheels  front  and  rear.  The  gunner 
places  the  short  roller  on  the  stock  under  the  breech, 
and  attaches  the  rope  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 
Nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10  lay  hold  of  the  rope.  Nos.  4  and 
6  cross  their  handspikes  under  that  of  no.  2,  that  of  no. 
6  next  the  piece,  and  are  assisted  by  nos.  3  and  5  to 
lift  and  push  at  the  muzzle.     The  chief  of  detachment 


144  MECHANICAL    MAN(EUVRES.  [PART  2. 

removes  the  half  roller,  and  the  piece  is  drawn  back 
to  its  trunnion  holes. 

The  short  roller  is  then  removed  as  in  no.  331  and 
following. 

Vo  dismount  tite  gun, 

370.  The  instructor  causes  the  short  roller  to  be 
placed  under  the  reinforce  as  in  no.  326  and  following, 
without  removing  the  elevating  screw.  The  gunner 
attaches  the  rope  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  and 
passes  its  ends  to  nos.  7  and  8,  who  take  a  turn  with 
them  around  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

Place  the  front  scaffold. 

371.  Nos.  3  and  4  place  the  skids  with  their  inner 
faces  one  inch  outside  of  the  cheeks,  their  outer  ends 
opposite  to  the  chase-ring,  and  upon  each  skid  a  half 
block,  three  blocks,  and  a  half  block,  the  inner  ends  of 
the  blocks  overlapping  by  two  inches  the  heads  of  the 
cheeks. 

Draw  out  the  piece. 

372.  No.  6  crosses  his  handspike  under  that  of  no.  2, 
and  is  assisted  by  nos.  5,  9  and  10.  They  raise  the 
chase,  and  no.  4  places  a  half  roller  on  the  scaffold 
against  the  cheeks.  The  gunner  moves  the  roller 
chock  so  that  when  the  roller  touches  it  the  trunnions 
will  be  over  the  half  roller.  Nos.  7  and  8  slack  off 
carefully.  By  lifting  at  the  muzzle  the  piece  is  allowed 
to  run  forward  until  its  trunnions  are  over  the  half 
roller.  Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  piece.  The  gunner 
takes  off  the  rope. 

Draw  out  the  carriage. 

373.  Nos.  1  and  2  steady  the  piece,  while  nos.  3  and 
4  unchock  the  wheels.     The  gunner  and  nos.  5,  6,  7, 


A 


To  mount  a  Gun  ujporv  its  Carriage . 
Fig.l. 


Fig.  2. 


Tiff.  4. 


UJt  JaJtusK2fArt.  Ve.U 


DMXUUand,  So. 


ART.  3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  145 

8,  9  and  10  draw  out  the  carriage.  Nos.  3  and  4  build 
up  the  rear  scaffold  of  four  blocks  on  each  side,  and 
place  the  other  half  roller  on  top  of  it,  under  the  rein- 
force. 

Then  by  alternately  raising  and  lowering  the  chase 
at  the  command  of  the  instructor,  the  scaffold  is  low- 
ered, beginning  with  the  half  blocks,  until  the  piece 
rests  upon  two  blocks. 

374.  Before  executing  this  manoeuvre  on  the  plat- 
form under  the  fire  of  the  enemy,  the  embrazure 
should  be  closed  with  sand  bags. 

Vo  mtouni  a  Bowiizer  upon  it$  carrUtge, 
Vo  di»tnount  the  howitzer. 

Executed  as  for  the  gun. 


13 


146  MECHANICAL   MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


liESSON     XXV. 

Vo  mount  a  Bowitser  a»  a  Held  piece* 
To  dismount  the  Uowitxer, 


375.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

5  Blocks. 

3  Half  blocks. 

6  TVfacel  chocks. 
1  Trace-rope. 

St  Trunnion-loops. 

Vo  mount  a  Wowitxer  as  a  Held  piece, 

376.  The  carriage,  unlimbered,  cap-squares  removed, 
is  placed  in  rear  of  the  howitzer,  in  prolongation  of  the 
axis  of  the  piece,  its  front  two  yards  from  the  knob  of 
the  cascable. 

377.  The  instructor  having  caused  the  howitzer  to 
be  raised  upon  its  muzzle,  as  in  no.  284  and  following, 
commands : 

Back  the  carriage — Raise  the  trail. 

The  carriage  is  run  up  as  in  no.  369,  until  the  front 
of  the  w^heels  are  even  with  the  trunnions.  Nos.  3 
and  4  chock  the  wheels  front  and  rear.  The  gunner 
attaches  one  end  of  the  rope  to  a  manceuvring  bolt. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  9  and  10,  7  and  8,  and  5  and  6  apply 
themselves  by  hand  to  the  stock,  in  the  order  named, 
from  the    trail    towards    the    wheels.      The   gunner, 


ART.   3.]  WITH    THE   HANDSPIKE.  147 

taking  the  handspike  of  no.  4,  goes  to  the  end  of  the 
trail,  rests  its  small  end  upon  the  ground,  and  supports 
the  trail  on  its  butt.  In  proportion  as  the  trail  is  raised 
he  moves  forward,  keeping  his  handspike  so  as  to  sup- 
port the  stock  at  any  moment;  the  butt  of  his  hand- 
spike finally  resting  under  the  nut  of  the  rear  bolt  of 
the  elevating  box.  Nos.  5  and  6  remain  with  the  gun- 
ner. Nos.  1,  2,  9,  10,  7  and  8  gradually  withdraw 
from  the  stock;  nos.  1  and  2  to  the  assistance  of  nos. 
5  and  6,  and  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10  to  the  rope.  Nos.  3 
and  4  place  the  front  chocks  twelve  inches  farther  to 
the  front;  carefully  run  up  the  carriage,  receiving  the 
trunnions  in  the  trunnion  holes;  put  on  the  cap-squares; 
and  chock. 

Lower  the  trail. 

378.  No.  4  takes  the  handspike  of  no.  2,  and,  with 
no.  3,  pushes  against  the  stock  in  front.  Nos.  1,  2,  5, 
6,  7,  8,  9  and  10  haul  upon  the  rope.  The  gunner 
retires  to  the  end  of  the  trail,  and  receives  it  upon  the 
butt  of  his  handspike.  The  men  in  succession  care- 
fully quit  the  rope,  and  apply  themselves  to  the  stock. 
No.  4,  when  the  preponderance  passes  to  the  trail,  in- 
serts his  handspike  in  the  bore,  and,  assisted  by  no.  3, 
bears  down.     The  gunner  puts  in  the  quoin. 

Vo  disinount  the  htncitxer* 

379.  The  instructor  commands: 

Dismount  the  howitzer. 

Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  wheels  front  and  rear;  take 
off  the  cap-squares;  and  place  two  blocks  to  receive 
the  muzzle.  The  gunner  attaches  the  rope  to  one  of 
the  manoeuvring  bolts,  and  then  takes  the  handspike  of 
no.  4  to  support  the  trail. 


148  mechanical  manoeuvres.         [part  2. 

Raise  the  trail. 

380.  The  trail  is  raised  as  in  no.  377,  and  when  a 
little  above  the  horizontal  the  gunner  supports  it  on  his 
handspike.  Nos.  1,  2,  9,  10,  7,  8,  5  and  6  succes- 
sively repair  to  the  rope;  they  hold  on  well  and  ease 
the  muzzle  upon  the  blocks  without  a  shock.  The  gun- 
ner, following  up  the  movement,  places  the  butt  of  his 
handspike  under  the  rear  nut  of  the  elevating  box. 
Nos.  1  and  2  go  to  the  assistance  of  nos.  3  and  4.  Nos. 
5  and  6  go  to  the  stock  and  assist  the  gunner.  Nos.  3 
and  4  draw  back  the  rear  chocks  twelve  inches;  run 
the  carriage  carefully  back  that  distance;  and  chock. 

Lower  the  trail. 

381.  All  but  nos.  3  and  4  go  to  the  stock,  and  assist 
the  gunner  to  lower  it.  He  gradually  retires  to  the 
end  of  the  trail,  when  he  withdraws  his  handspike,  and 
the  trail  is  lowered  to  the  ground. 


ART.  3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  1^ 


liESSON     XXVI. 

Vo  mount  a  Siege  Jflortar  upon  its  bed, 
Vo  digutouni  the  ntortar. 


382.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

1  Trace-rope. 

1  Hainmer-^vrench. 

Vo  ntount  a  Siege  JViortar  irpon  it»  bed, 

383.  The  mortar  being  placed  upon  its  muzzle  six 
inches  in  front  of  the  bed,  vent  outwards,  as  in  no.  295 
and  following,  the  instructor   commands: 

Mount  the  mortar. 

The  gunner  removes  the  bolts  and  cap-squares,  and 
hands  their  parts  to  nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  who  place  them 
on  the  ground  near  the  butts  of  their  handspikes;  makes 
a  double  hitch  with  the  middle  part  of  the  rope  around 
the  mortar  close  to  the  muzzle-band,  the  tie  to  the 
front,  and  passes  the  ends  up  over  the  trunnions  to  the 
rear,  to  nos.  5,  6,  7,  8,  9  and  10.  Nos.  1  and  2  run 
their  handspikes  under  the  trunnions,  and  rest  the  butt 
ends,  beveled  sides  up,  upon  the  ground  or  platform. 

Heave  and  haul. 

384.  Nos.  1  and  2  acting  at  the  trunnions,  and  nos. 
5,  6,  7,  8,  9  and  10  with  a  steady  pull  on  the  rope, 
cant  the  mortar  against  the  front  of  the  bolster.     Nos. 

.       13* 


150  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

1  and  2  shift  the  butts  of  their  handspikes  to- the  top 
of  the  bolster,  indining  the  small  ends  a  little  out- 
wards. Nos.  3  and  4,  facing  to  the  front,  insert  their 
handspikes  between  the  front  of  the  cheeks  and  mor- 
tar, in  order  to  press  its  muzzle  outwards  and  upwards. 

Heave  and  haul. 

385.  All  act  steadily  together;  nos.  1  and  2  lifting  at 
the  trunnions,  and  nos.  3  and  4  at  the  muzzle.  As 
soon  as  the  muzzle  is  sufficiently  elevated  to  permit  it, 
no.  4  passes  quickly  to  the  front  and  inserts  his  hand- 
spike in  the  bore.  The  men  continuing  to  haul  upon 
the  rope,  the  muzzle  is  raised  and  the  trunnions  descend 
to  their  places.  Nos.  1  and  2  then  insert  their  hand- 
spikes in  the  bore,  and  the  gunner  slips  the  rope  from 
the  muzzle  to  their  small  ends.  The  men  at  the  rope 
haul  upon  it  until  the  mortar  is  nearly  vertical.  Nos. 
1,  2,  3  and  4  bring  forward  the  bolts  and  cap-squares, 
and  assist  the  gunner  to  place  them.  This  done,  the 
men  ease  away  upon  the  rope,  and  allow  the  mortar  to 
rest  upon  the  bolster. 

Vo  diatnount  the  anortar. 

386.  The  instructor  commands: 

Dismount  the  mortar. 

Nos.  1  and  2  place  their  handspikes  in  the  bore. 
The  gunner  making  a  double  hitch  with  the  middle  of 
the  rope  around  their  small  ends,  passes  its  ends  to  nos. 
5,  6,  7,  8,  9  and  10. 

Heave  and  haul. 

387.  The  mortar  is  raised  nearly  vertical,  and  while 
maintained  in  this  position  by  the  rope,  the  gunner  and 
nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  remove  the  bolts  and  cap-squares,  as 
in  no.  383. 


I 


ART.   3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  151 

Nos.  3  and  4,  facing  to  the  front,  embar  under  the 
breech  of  the  mortar  in  order  to  hold  it  in  its  vertical 
position.  Nos.  1  and  2  take  their  handspikes  from  the 
bore.  The  gunner  places  the  middle  of  the  rope 
around  the  front  part  of  the  mortar  close  under  the 
muzzle-band. 

Heave  and  haul. 

388.  A  smart  pull  upon  the  rope,  aided  by  a  heave 
at  the  handspikes,  pitches  the  mortar  to  the  rear,  where 
it  alights  upon  the  muzzle.  The  cap-squares  are  then 
replaced. 


Id2;t  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


liESSON     XX  Til. 

Vo  ntount  a  Siege  JfKortar  upon  the  tnortavwagon. 
Vo  dismount  the  tnortar. 


(  Plates  XXVII,  XXVIIl  and  XXIX. ) 


389.  The  implements  necessary  are : 

^  Ijong;  rollers. 

1  Block. 

5  Half  blocks. 

2  Quarter  blocks. 

6  Wheel  chocks. 
4  Roller  chocks. 
1  Trace-rope. 

3  Windlass  handspikes.    Attached  to  the  wagon. 

av»  ntount  a  Siege  Jflortar  upon  the  utortar'wagon, 

390.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  bed,  which  is  upon  the 
ground;  the  trail  of  the  mortar  wagon,  its  stakes  and 
bolster  removed,  is  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  middle 
transom. 

391.  The  instructor  having  caused  a  long  roller  to 
be  placed  under  the  bed,  as  in  no.  304  and  following, 
commands : 

Run  up  the  wagon — Heave. 

Nos.  5  and  6  embar  under  the  stock,  and,  assisted  by 
nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10,  run  up  the  wagon  until  the  middle 


ART.  3.]  WITH   THE    HANDSPIKE.  W3 

of  the  trail  touches  the  middle  of  the  long  roller.  Nos, 
3  and  4  chock  the  wheels  front  and  rear.  No.  4  stands 
ready  with  a  long  roller. 

Rig  THE  WINDLASS — Heave. 

392.  Nos.  1  and  2  go  to  the  rear  of  the  wagon  and 
attach  the  middle  of  the  rope  to  the  windlass;  they  are 
assisted  by  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10.  The  gunner  attaches 
the  rope  to  the  rear  manceuvring  bolts.  Nos.  5  and  6 
embar  under  the  front  manceuvring  bolts. 

Nos.  1,  2,  7  and  8  heave  upon  the  windlass,  and  nos. 
9  and  10  press  against  the  rope  with  the  handspikes  of 
nos.  1  and  2  to  prevent  its  turns  spreading  too  much 
upon  the  roller.  Nos.  5  and  6  urge  the  mortar  up  until 
it  is  ascending  the  stock;  they  then  place  the  butt  ends 
of  their  handspikes  upon  the  stock,  beveled  sides  down, 
just  below  the  lower  roller,  and  follow  up  the  move- 
ment. Nos.  3  and  4,  aided  by  nos.  5  and  6  with  their 
handspikes,  shift  the  rollers,  and  chock  them  whenever 
necessary. 

When  the  rear  ends  of  the  cheeks  have  arrived  upon 
the  body  of  the  wagon,  the  lower  roller,  on  becoming 
disengaged,  is  taken  away  by  no.  4,  and  the  mortar  is 
drawn  up  on  one  roller,  until  the  rear  ends  of  the 
cheeks  touch  the  rear  cross-bar  plate;  nos.  9  and  10 
holding  their  handspikes  under  the  rear  manoeuvring 
bolts  in  order  to  ease  the  bed  when  it  cants  to  the  rear. 
Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  roller  front  and  rear.  Nos.  1 
and  2  chock  the  windlass  by  allowing  the  handspike  in 
the  upper  mortice  to  rest  against  the  mortar. 

Limber  up. 

393.  Executed  as  in  no.  312  and  following;  nos.  1, 
2,  7  and  8  bearing  down  upon  the  handspikes  of  nos.  1 
and  2,  inserted  between  the  windlass  and  the  rear 
crossbar,  being  careful  to  diminish  their  efforts  in  pro- 
portion as  the  stock  is  raised. 


154  MECHANICAL   MANffiUVRES.  [PART  2. 

Stow  the  mortar. 

394.  Nos.  1  and  2  cast  oiFthe  rope  from  the  windlass. 
Nos.  7  and  8  take  it  to  the  front,  being  assisted  to  haul 
upon  it  by  nos.  9  and  10.  Nos.  1  and  2  embar  under 
the  rear  manoeuvring  bolts.  Nos.  3  and  4  take  the 
chocks  from  the  roller.  Nos.  5  and  6  stand  ready  with 
their  handspikes  to  ease  the  bed  when  it  cants  to  the 
front. 

Heave  and  haul. 

395.  The  mortar  is  drawn  forward  until  it  cants. 
Nos.  3  and  4  give  each  a  half  block  and  wheel  chock 
to  the  gunner,  who  places  them  as  fulcrums  on  the  rear 
of  the  wagon.  Nos.  1,  2,  7  and  8  by  repeated  pur- 
chases lower  the  bed  upon  the  wagon. 

396.  If  the  mortar  is  to  travel,  the  bed  is  firmly 
chocked.  The  blocks,  rollers,  handspikes,  &c.,  are 
stowed  on  the  wagon,  and  well  lashed  to  their  places. 

Remarks. 

397.  Should  the  mortar  take  a  diagonal  direction 
upon  the  stock,  it  can  be  gradually  righted  by  giving  a 
counter  diagonal  direction  to  one  of  the  rollers. 

When  the  lower  roller  reaches  the  nuts  of  the  lunette 
plate,  it  is  relieved  by  shifting  the  upper  roller.  Nos. 
3  and  4  are  assisted  in  this  operation  by  nos.  5  and  6, 
who  embar  under  the  rear  of  the  cheeks. 

Vo  diMMtouut  ihe  ntortar, 

398.  The  instructor  commands: 

Place  a  long  roller — Heave. 

Nos.  3  and  4  furnish  the  gunner  with  two  half  blocks 
and  2  wheel  chocks,  which  he  adjusts  as  fulcrums  on 


ART.   3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  155 

the  rear  of  the  wagon;  they  then  chock  the  wheels 
front  and  rear,  and  stand  ready  to  place  a  long  roller 
brought  up  by  no.  4. 

Nos.  1,  2,  7  and  8  raise  the  bed,  and  the  roller  is  run 
under  it  until  its  vertical  diameter  is  in  a  line  with  the 
vertical  diameter  of  the  trunnions. 

Rig  the  windlass — Heave. 

399.  Nos.  1  and  2,  assisted  by  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10, 
wind  the  rope  upon  the  roller  of  the  windlass,  and  the 
gunner  attaches  its  ends  by  an  anchor-knot  to  the  rear 
manoeuvring  bolts. 

The  mortar  is  drawn  to  the  rear  until  the  cheeks 
touch  the  rear  cross-bar  plate.  Nos.  7  and  8  embar 
with  the  handspikes  of  nos.  1  and  2  under  the  rear 
manoeuvring  bolts  to  ease  the  bed  when  it  cants  to  the 
rear.  Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  roller  front  and  rear. 
Nos.  1  and  2  secure  the  windlass  by  allowing  the  hand- 
spike of  the  upper  mortice  to  rest  against  the  mortar. 

Unlimber. 

400.  Executed  as  in  no.  314  and  following.  The 
stock  is  carefully  raised  to  free  it  from  the  pintle,  and 
then  lowered  without  a  shock  to  the  ground.  Nos.  1 
and  2  insert  their  handspikes  between  the  windlass  and 
the  rear  of  the  wagon,  and  are  assisted  by  nos.  7  and 
8  to  bear  down  upon  them.  Nos.  3  and  4  place  the 
half  blocks  and  quarter  blocks  at  the  end  of  the  stock 
to  receive  the  lower  roller,  and  then  unchock  the  roller. 

Ease  away. 

401.  Nos.  1  and  2  allow  the  rope  to  unwind.  Nos. 
5  and  6  place  their  handspikes  as  in  mounting  the  mor- 
tar. Nos.  3  and  4  shift  the  rollers  until  the  mortar 
finally  rests  on  one  roller  upon  the  half  blocks. 


156  mechanical  manfeuvres.  [part  2. 

Back  the  wagon. 

402.  Nos.  3  and  4  unchock  the  wheels.  Nos.  1  and 
2  and  the  gunner  take  off  the  rope.  The  wagon  is  run 
back  as  in  no.  391. 

The  long  roller  is  then  removed  as  in  Lesson  XX. 
The  gunner  replaces  the  bolster. 


LtJCSJlM^K.  2  fArtDeU 


UJieaeiULTLd,  Sc. 


J 


CCC.CC  I 


c  c  c 


U  ■  -k 


t 


f^    ^  '^5  '^  ^  ^ 


Li^-.J 


LtJt.Tt/fijj!/,   P-^Art  7?*/y 


Tl  -hP^rj^llnnA    Vr- 


w 


.*' 


5:     % 


^  -¥ 

'.  ¥ 


'^ 


«.t*.'j-*i'j,«s 


To  rrwuni  cuSiege  Mortar  upon  th&MoTtcvr  Wag  oil. 
Fig.  1. 


Knot  for MaiUEiLy ring  bait. 


sh..2f-Art.Meit. 


DMfCUUcaui  Sc. 


cb. 


(  t  < 

»c  c    c    *^ 


ART.  3.]  WITH   THE    HANDSPIKE.  157 


T.ESSON     XXVIII. 

To  mouni  a  Cht»  upon  the  mortar'teagon. 
To  dUntount  the  guM, 

To  iMOUHt  a  MMowitser  upon  the  »Mortar-M?agom, 
To  di$mouHt  the  howitxer. 


(  Plates  XXX  and  XXXI. ) 


403.  The  implements  necessary  are : 


It 


3  liong  rollers. 
1  Short  roller. 
1  Half  roller. 
lO  Blocks. 

3  Half  blocks. 

4  Oon  chocks. 

6  IVheel  chocks. 

4  Roller  chocks. 

3  Skids. 

1  Trace-rope, 

'H  Windlass  handspikes.     Attached  to  the  wagon. 

To  tnount  a  Chtn  upon  the  n$ortarteagOH» 


404.  The  piece  is  on  two  blocks,  one  under  the  front 
of  the  trunnions,  the  other  about  a  foot  in  rear  of  the 
rimbases;  the  wagon,  unlimbered,  its  stakes  removed, 
is  in  the  prolongation  of  the  axis  of  the  piece,  its  trail 
on  the  ground  about  two  yards  from  the  knob  of  the 
cascable. 

14 


158  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

405.  The  instructor  commands : 

Raise  the  chase — Heave. 

No.  2  inserts  the  butt  of  his  handspike  in  the  bore, 
and  is  assisted  by  no.  1.  No.  6  crosses  his  handspike 
under  that  of  no.  2,  near  the  muzzle,  and  is  assisted 
by  nos.  5,  9  and  10.  No.  8  crosses  the  handspike  of 
no.  4  under  that  of  no.  2,  eighteen  inches  from  the 
muzzle,  and  is  assisted  by  no.  7.  Nos.  3  and  4  place 
the  skids  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece,  their  middle 
opposite  to  the  trunnions. 

The  chase  is  raised.  No.  3  removes  the  front  block, 
and  assists  no.  4  to  place  a  long  roller  under  the  rein- 
force, just  in  front  of  the  trunnions;  they  chock  it  front 
and  rear. 

Lower  the  chase — Heave. 

406.  The  men  at  the  handspikes  bear  down  the 
chase.  No.  3  removes  the  rear  block,  and  assists  no. 
4  to  place  the  long  roller  under  the  reinforce,  about  five 
inches  in  rear  of  the  trunnions;  they  chock  it  in  rear. 

Raise  the  chase — Heave. 

407.  The  men  at  the  handspikes  raise  the  chase. 
No.  4  removes  the  front  roller,  and  the  muzzle  is 
lowered  to  the  ground. 

Run  up  the  wagon — Heave. 

408.  The  wagon  is  run  forward,  as  in  no.  391,  the 
stock  under  the  breech,  until  the  breech » rests  upon  a 
long  roller  placed  by  nos.  4  and  3  on  the  stock  in  rear 
of  the  lunette-plate  bolts.  Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the 
wheels  front  and  rear. 


I 


art.  3.  i  with  the  handspike.  159 

Rig  the  windlass — Heave. 

409.  Nos.  1  and  2  go  to  the  rear  of  the  wagon  and 
attach  the  middle  of  the  rope  to  the  windlass.  The 
gunner  passes  its  ends  over  and  under  the  trunnions, 
the  standing  part  innermost,  and  ties  them  by  a  right- 
knot  on  the  top  of  the  piece;  he  then  forms  a  loop  of 
the  ends  of  the  rope,  inserting  in  it  the  handspike  of 
no.  4,  in  order  to  steady  the  piece,  and  places  the  short 
roller  on  the  ground  under  the  chase. 

Nos.  1,  2,  7  and  8  heave  upon  the  windlass,  and  nos. 
9  and  10  press  against  the  rope  with  the  handspikes  of 
nos.  1  and  2  to  prevent  its  turns  spreading  too  much 
upon  the  roller.  Nos.  3  and  4  attend  to  the  long  roller. 
Nos.  5  and  6  follow  the  upper  roller  with  the  butts  of 
their  handspikes  ready  to  chock  it. 

The  lower  roller,  on  becoming  disengaged,  is  removed 
by  no.  4.  When  the  breech  is  drawn  against  the 
breech  hurter,  the  windlass  is  secured  by  allowing  the 
handspike  in  the  upper  mortice  to  rest  against  the  knob 
of  the  cascable.  Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  roller  front 
and  rear. 

Raise  the  stock  on  four  blocks  and  a  half 
BLOCK — Heave. 

410.  Nos.  3  and  4,  assisted  by  nos.  5  and  6,  remove 
the  skids,  and  form  a  scaffold  of  a  block  and  a  half 
block  on  each  side  in  front  of  the  muzzle,  their  inner 
ends  even  with  the  stock,  and  place  upon  it  a  half  rol- 
ler to  serve  as  a  fulcrum.  Nos.  1  and  2  embar  upon 
this  half  roller  under  the  swell  of  the  muzzle,  inclining 
the  small  ends  of  their  handspikes  outwards,  and  are 
assisted  by  nos.  7  and  9,  and  8  and  10  respectively, 
nos.  7  and  8  on  the  outside  of  the  handspikes.  Nos.  5 
and  6  bear  down  upon  the  end  of  the  stock  with  the 
butts  of  their  handspikes. 

The  muzzle  is  raised.  Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  long 
roller.  Nos.  5  and  6  embar  under  the  trail  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  stock,  in  order  to  assist  the  men  at  the 


160  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

muzzle.  Nos.  3  and  4  place  a  scaffold  of  two  blocks 
and  a  half  block  under  and  perpendicular  to  tHe  stock, 
near  the  front  cross-piece. 

The  men  at  the  handspikes  then  take  another  pur- 
chase under  the  end  of  the  stock,  assisted,  as  before, 
by  nos.  5  and  6,  while  nos.  3  and  4  move  forward  the 
rear  scaffold  until  it  rests  just  behind  the  manoeuvring 
staples. 

By  gradually  raising  the  front  scaffold,  and  repeating 
the  purchases,  the  stock  is  raised  until  the  rear  scaffold 
consists  of  four  blocks  and  a  half  block. 

Run  up  the  limber. 

411.  Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  front  scaffold.  The 
gunner  and  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10  back  the  limber,  and 
raise  the  pole.  Nos.  3  and  4  guide  the  pintle  into  the 
lunette.  No.  6  inserts  the  butt  of  his  handspike  be- 
tween the  fork  and  the  stock  in  rear  of  the  pintle. 
Nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10  bear  down  the  pole.  Nos.  3  and  4 
remove  the  rear  scaffold.  No.  3  hooks  the  lashing- 
chain. 

To    YOUR   POSTS. 

412.  Nos.  1  and  2  and  the  gunner  cast  off  the  rope. 
Nos.  3  and  4  unchock  the  wheels,  and  put  in  the  stakes. 
The  implements  are  replaced,  and  all  resume  their  posts. 

Vo  Mtmount  the  gun, 

413.  The  instructor  commands: 

Rig  the  windlass. 

Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  stakes.  Nos.  1  and  2 
attach  the  rope  by  its  middle  to  the  windlass,  and  take 
as  many  turns  (about  five)  around  the  roller  as  will 
allow  the  piece  to  descend.  The  gunner  passes  the 
ends  of  the  rope  over  and  under  the  trunnions,  and  ties 


ART.   3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  161 

them  by  a  right-knot  on  top  of  the  piece,  the  standing 
part  of  the  rope  being  innermost;  he  then  forms  a  loop 
of  the  ends  of  the  rope  to  receive  a  handspike  for 
steadying  the  piece.  No.  1  secures  the  windlass  by 
inserting  a  handspike  in  the  upper  mortice,  and  allow- 
ing it  to  rest  against  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

Unlimber. 

414.  No.  3  unhooks  the  lashing-chain.  Nos.  3  and 
4  chock  the  wheels  front  and  rear,  and  place  a  scaffold 
of  four  blocks  under  the  stock  close  in  rear  of  the  ma- 
noeuvring staples.  The  gunner  and  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10 
go  to  the  pole  and  raise  it  sufficiently  to  enable  no.  6  to 
insert  the  butt  of  his  handspike  between  the  fork  and 
the  stock  in  rear  of  the  pintle.  The  pole  is  then  borne 
down,  and  no.  4  places  a  half  block  on  top  of  the  scaf- 
fold, when  the  pole  is  raised  and  the  limber  drawn  out, 

Nos.  3  and  4  form  a  scaffold  of  three  blocks  and  a 
half  block  on  each  side  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece 
in  front  of  the  muzzle,  and  place  the  half  roller  on  top 
of  it.  Nos.  1  and  2,  assisted  by  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10, 
embar  upon  the  half  roller  under  the  end  of  the  stock, 
and  raise  it.  No.  4  removes  the  half  block  from  the 
rear  scaffold,  and,  assisted  by  no.  3,  moves  forward  the 
scaffold  under  the  bolster. 

By  gradually  lowering  the  front  scaffold,  and  repeat- 
ing the  purchases,  the  trail  is  lowered  until  it  rests 
upon  one  block.  The  men  at  the  handspikes  then  em- 
bar  under  the  swell  of  the  muzzle.  No.  4  removes  the 
block,  and,  assisted  by  no.  3,  places  a  long  roller  under 
the  reinforce  just  in  front  of  the  trunnions. 

Place  the  skids. 

415.  Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  front  scaffold,  and 
place  the  skids,  one  on  each  side  of  the  stock  and 
parallel  to  its  direction,  their  inner  ends  opposite  to  the 
bolster. 

■\       14* 


162  MECHANICAL   MANffiUVRES.  [PART  2. 

Ease  away. 

416.  Nos.  1  and  2,  assisted  by  nos.  7  and  8,  allow 
the  piece  to  descend,  and  nos.  3  and  4  receive  the 
chase  on  a  long  roller  at  a  point  about  two  feet  in  rear 
of  the  chase-ring.  The  piece  is  lowered  until  it  rests 
upon  this  roller  on  the  skids.  Nos.  4  and  3  place  the 
half  roller  under  the  reinforce  about  a  foot  in  rear  of 
the  trunnions. 

Back  the  wagon. 

417.  Nos.  3  and  4  unchock  the  wheels.  Nos.  1  and 
2  and  the  gunner  cast  off  the  rope,  and  the  wagon  is 
run  back  as  in  no.  391.  By  alternately  raising  and 
lowering  the  chase,  the  piece  is  placed  upon  two  blocks. 

To    YOUR    POSTS. 

418.  The  stakes  are  put  in,  the  implements  replaced, 
and  all  resume  their  posts. 

Vo  ntount  a  Howitzer  upon  the  ntortar'wagou. 

Executed  as  for  the  gun. 

419.  To  limber.  Pass  two  handspikes  across  and 
under  the  trail,  to  which  apply  eight  men,  two  at  each 
end  of  each  handspike.  Raise  the  trail  and  limber  the 
wagon. 

420.  To  remove  ihe  long  roller.  Embar  with  two 
handspikes  under  the  muzzle,  each  on  a  fulcrum 
formed  with  one  half  block  and  a  wheel  chock.  Raise 
the  piece,  and  run  the  roller  close  to  the  muzzle.  Take 
a  second  purchase  on  the  wheel  chocks  as  fulcrums. 
Raise  the  muzzle,  withdraw  the  roller,  and  lower  the 
piece  to  its  place  on  the  wagon. 


Fl^TE  30. 


U£.MJtiush.  2'f-Art.Veic. 


VmCUUtuid,  Sc. 


s?- 


K 


C,C  C    «  c   c 


f  c 


f-  '^  ^ 


U.RSIUuiTL,2*/trt.J)6lc. 


V.2eCUUarui  Sc. 


^ 


M'    :t 


ART.   3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  fSB 

To  dismount  the  hoveitser. 

Executed  as  for  the  gun. 

To  unlimber  and  to  place  the  long  roller  are  executed 
in  the  reverse  manner  to  that  prescribed  in  nos.  419 
and  420. 

Remark. 

421.  The  gun  can  be  placed  upon  the  mortar-wagon 

■without  using  the  windlass,  in  the  following  manner: 

The  wagon,  unlimbered,  its  stakes  removed,  is  in 
the  prolongation  of  the  axis  of  the  piece,  its  trail  on 
the  ground  about  two  yards  from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 

Raise  the  gun  as  in  no.  362  and  following,  until  it  is 
on  a  scaffold  of  one  half  block,  three  blocks,  and  a  half 
block  on  each  skid,  and  the  half  roller  under  the  trun- 
nions. Maintain  the  piece  on  this  half  roller,  and  run 
the  wagon  up  until  the  side  rails  nearly  touch  the  scaf- 
fold. 

Raise  the  stock  of  the  wagon  on  a  scaffold  of  four 
blocks  placed  crosswise  under  it  just  in  rear  of  the  sta- 
ples. Bear  down  on  the  muzzle  and  place  a  long  roller 
on  the  wagon  just  in  rear  of  the  front  cross-bar  plate. 
Raise  the  muzzle  and  remove  the  half  roller  and  the 
half  blocks  from  its  scaffold,  and  place  a  second  long 
roller  under  the  chase  at  its  junction  with  the  reinforce. 
Attach  the  rope  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  and  run 
the  gun  back  to  its  place  on  the  wagon. 

The  rollers  are  then  removed,  and  the  wagon  lim- 
bered, as  prescribed  in  no.  410  and  following. 


164  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  % 


liESSON     XXIX. 

Vo  thift  n  €fuu  front  one  carriage  to  attoiher, 
Vo  ghifi  a  IMovpiijser  from  one  carriage  to  another 


(  Plate  XXXII. ) 


422.  The  implements  necessary  are : 

3  Short  rollers. 
6  IVheel  chocks. 
6  Roller  chocks. 
1  !Shifting-plank. 
1  Trace-rope. 

aro  shift  a  €fHn  front  one  carriage  to  atwtlter, 

423.  The  piece  is  unlimbered;  the  spare  carriage, 
limbered — cap-squares  taken  off  and  elevating  screw 
removed — is  placed  accurately  in  prolongation  of  the 
former,  two  yards  from  its  trail. 

424.  The  instructor  having  caused  handspikes  to  be 
inserted  in  the  trunnion  holes,  as  in  no.  335  and  follow- 
ing, commands: 

Back  the  carriage. 

Nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10  apply  themselves  to  the  hind 
wheels  of  the  spare  carriage,  and  nos.  5  and  6  apply 
themselves  to  the  fore  wheels.  The  gunner  directs 
the  pole,  and  the  carriage  is  backed,  wheel  against 
wheel,  to  the  unlimbered  carriage.     Nos.  3  and  4  trans- 


I 


ART.  3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  165 

fer  the  rear  chocks  from  the  unlimbered  carriage  to  the 
front  of  the  hind  wheels  of  the  limbered  carriage. 

Place  the  plank  and   rollers,   and   attach  the 
ROPE — Heave  and  haul. 

425.  The  gunner  places  himself  on  the  inside  of  the 
wheels  between  the  two  carriages,  and  lowers  the  rol- 
ler on  the  stock  until  it  is  in  a  position  to  support  the 
plank,  when  he  chocks  it;  runs  the  plank,  which  is 
handed  him  by  no.  6,  under  the  chase  as  far  as  it  will 
go,  beveled  side  down;  places  a  roller  on  the  plank  un- 
der the  reinforce,  as  far  forward  as  possible,  nos.  1,  2, 
3  and  4  depressing  the  muzzle  for  that  purpose;  attaches 
the  rope  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  and  passes  its 
ends  to  nos.  5,  6,  7,  8,  9  and  10;  places  a  third  roller 
at  the  end  of  the  plank  on  the  stock  of  the  spare  car- 
riage, with  a  roller  chock  in  front  of  it,  near  the  screw 
box;  and  then  applies  himself  to  the  rope. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  raise  the  chase,  and  the  piece  is 
drawn  back  until  its  trunnions  are  over  the  chin  bolts  of 
the  spare  carriage;  they  then  depress  the  muzzle  suf- 
ficiently to  enable  the  gunner  to  return  the  third  roller 
to  the  end  of  the  plank.  Nos.  7  and  8  take  two  turns 
with  the  rope  around  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

Draw  out  the  carriage. 

426.  Nos.  3  and  4  unchock  the  wheels  of  the  unlim- 
bered carriage,  and^  assisted  by  nos.  1  and  2,  slightly 
raise  the  chase  to  enable  the  gunner  to  remove  the  roller 
which  is  under  it.  Nos.  9  and  10  and  5  and  6  move 
the  carriage  forward  about  six  inches,  when  the  chase 
is  lowered,  the  swell  of  the  muzzle  resting  on  the  stock. 
Nos.  9  and  10,  assisted  by  nos.  3  and  4,  draw  the  car- 
riage slowly  out,  its  trail  two  yards  from  the  muzzle, 
the  gunner  at  the  same  time  removing  the  plank. 


166  mechanical  manoeuvres.  [part  2. 

Slack  off. 

427.  Nos.  7  and  8  slack  off  equally  and  carefully 
upon  the  rope,  and  ease  the  trunnions  into  their  holes. 

The  short  roller  is  then  removed  from  under  the  rein- 
force as  in  no.  331  and  following. 

Vo  ahift  a  Mowitser  fraut  one  carriage  to  another* 

Executed  as  for  the  gun. 

Remark. 

428.  A  piece  may  be  shifted  from  one  carriage  to 
another  by  placing  it  as  prescribed  in  no.  371  and  fol- 
lowing, and  then  substituting  the  new  carriage  for  the 
old. 


UJt.KS,ush..2^Art.Delt. 


V.ACCleUaruL  Sc 


ART.  3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  167 


Ii£SSON     XXX. 

Va  »hifi  a  €htu  front  tite  niortar^veagon  to  H»  carriage. 
To  shift  a  Chtu  from  its  carriage  to  the  tnortartvagon, 
Vo  shift  a  Wowitxer  from,  the  ntortar-teagon  to  its  carriage* 
Vo  shift  a  Hotcitser  front,  its  carriage  to  the  utortar^tvagon. 


429.  The  implements  necessary  are : 

2  liOns  rollers. 
1  Short  roller. 
1  Half  block. 
6  IVheel  chocks. 
6  Roller  chocks. 
1  Trace-rope. 

Vo  shift  a  Gun  from  tite  ntortar-ieagoH  to  its  ctn-riage, 

430.  The  carriage  and  wagon  are  both  limbered,  and 
the  head  of  the  cheeks  of  the  carriage  placed  two 
yards  from  the  windlass. 

431.  The  instructor  commands : 

Place  the  long  rollers  under  the  chase  and 

REINFORCE HeAVE. 

The  gunner  places  a  half  block  and  a  wheel  chock 
on  the  end  of  the  stock  of  the  mortar  wagon,  or  on  the 
fork  of  the  limber,  to  serve  as  a  fulcrum.  Nos.  1  and  2 
embar  with  the  handspike  of  the  latter  under  the  muz- 
zle and  raise  the  chase,  nos.  4  and  3  at  the  same  time 
placing  a  long  roller  under  the  trunnions  and  chocking 


168  MECHANICAL    MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

it  front  and  rear.  Nos.  1  and  2  bear  down  the  muzzle, 
and  nos.  4  and  3  place  a  second  long  roller  under  the 
middle  of  the  reinforce.  The  gunner  attaches  the  rope 
to  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  and  passes  it  to  nos.  7,  8, 
9  and  10. 

Back  the  carriage. 

432.  The  carriage  is  backed,  wheel  against  wheel 
with  the  wagon,  as  in  no.  424,  and  nos,  3  and  4  chock 
the  wheels  in  contact  in  front.  The  gunner  places  the 
short  roller  on  the  head  of  the  stock  to  receive  the 
breech.  Nos.  3  and  4  unchock  the  long  roller  under 
the  trunnions.     The  others  repair  to  the  rope. 

The  piece  is  drawn  back  until  the  trunnions  are  over 
the  chin  bolts.  Nos.  7  and  8  take  two  turns  of  the 
rope  around  the  manceuvring  bolts.  Nos.  5  and  6  em- 
bar  between  the  chase  and  cheeks  in  order  to  relieve 
the  wagon  from  the  weight  of  the  muzzle. 

Draw  out  the  wagon. 

433.  Nos.  3  and  4  transfer  the  chocks  from  the 
wheels  of  the  mortar  wagon  to  the  wheels  of  the  piece, 
and  the  wagon  is  drawn  out  two  yards  to  its  front,  as  in 
no.  426. 

Slack  off. 

434.  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  lower  the  muzzle,  and  nos. 
7  and  8  slack  off  the  rope  equally  and  carefully,  allow- 
ing the  trunnions  to  descend  into  their  holes. 

The  short  roller  is  then  removed  as  in  no.  331  and 
following. 

Vo  ahm  a  €htu  front  its  carriage  to  the  ntbrtartvagon, 

435.  The  carriage  and  wagon  are  limbered,  and  the 
rear  of  the  wagon  is  placed  two  yards  from  the  muzzle. 


ART.   3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  169 

436.  The  instructor  causes  the  short  roller  to  be 
placed  under  the  reinforce,  as  in  no.  326  and  following, 
and  directs  the  gunner  to  attach  the  rope  to  the  knob  of 
the  cascable. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5  and  6  lift  and  push  at  the  muzzle, 
and  the  piece  is  drawn  back  until  the  trunnions  are 
over  the  chin  bolts,  when  nos.  7  and  8  take  two  turns 
of  the  rope  around  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

Back  the  wagon — Heave  and  haul. 

437.  Nos.  5  and  6  embar  between  the  chase  and 
cheeks  in  order  to  raise  the  muzzle,  and  the  wagon  is 
backed  wheel  against  wheel  with  the  carriage.  Nos.  3 
and  4  cliock  its  hind  wheels  in  front;  place  along  roller 
on  the  rear  part  of  the  wagon  under  the  chase;  chock 
it  in  front;  and  stand  ready  to  insert  the  other  long  rol- 
ler. The  gunner  takes  off  the  rope  and  attaches  it  to 
the  muzzle.  Nos.  3  and  4  unchock  the  long  roller, 
and  place  the  chocks  near  the  front  cross-piece  of  the 
wagon.  The  piece  is  drawn  forward  until  the  breech 
is  slightly  in  advance  of  the  breech  hurter. 

Remove  the  long  rollers. 

438.  The  gunner  takes  off  the  rope,  and  adjusts  a 
fulcrum  at  the  end  of  the  stock  of  the  wagon.  Nos.  1 
and  2,  by  bearing  down  the  muzzle,  enable  nos.  3  and 
4  to  remove  one  of  the  long  rollers,  leaving  the  other 
under  the  trunnions;  they  theji  embar  under  the  muz- 
zle, and  lower  it  into  the  bolster.  Nos.  4  and  3  run 
out  the  remaining  roller  by  the  front. 

Draw  out  the  carriage. 

Executed  as  in  no.  426. 

OPo  ghift  a  Bowitxer  front  the  ntortar^wagon  to  it»  carriage, 
Vo  nhift  a  Bbnvitser  from  its  carriage  to  the  nun-tar'^tcagOHt 

Both  executed  as  for  the  gun.     When  the  wagon  and 
carriage  are  brought  together,  their  hind  wheels  over- 
lap each  other  so  as  to  bring  the  head  of  the  stock  as 
near  as  possible  to  the  rear  of  the  wagon. 
'.15 


170  MECHANICAL    MAN(EUVRES.  [PART  2» 


I.ESSON     XXXI. 

Vo  change  or  to  grease  a  wheel, 

T^o  dismount  a  carriage  attd  its  iimber, 

Vo  retnount  the  carriage  attd  its  limber. 

To  dismount  the  tnortar^wagon, 

Vo  remount  the  mortar-wagon. 


(  Plate  XXXIII. ) 


439.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

6  Blocks. 

3  Half  blocks. 

6  IVheel  chocks. 

Vo  change  or  to  grease  a  vplteel, 

440.  The  piece  may  be  either  limbered  or  unlim- 
bered.  The  spare  wheel  is  lying  upon  the  ground, 
near  the  wheel  to  be  changed .  . 

441.  The  instructor  commands; 

Change  the  right  hind  wheel. 

The  pole  is  moved  to  the  left,  and  no.  3  chocks  the 
left  hind  wheel  front  and  rear.  The  gunner  being  fur- 
nished by  nos.  3  and  4  each  with  one  block,  one  half  j 
block,  and  a  wheel  chock,  lays  the  half  blocks  on  the 
ground,  end  to  end,  under  the  right  of  the  axle-body, 
perpendicularly  to  the  direction  of  the  axletree;  places 
a  block  upright  upon  each  of  the  half  blocks;  and  upon 


ART.  3.]  WITH   THE    HANDSPIKE.  171 

the  upright  blocks  wheel  chocks  to  serve  as  fulcrums. 
Nos.  2  and  6,  assisted  by  nos.  1  and  5  respectively, 
erabar  upon  these  fulcrums  under  the  axletree. 

Heave. 

442.  The  wheel  is  raised  from  the  ground.  Nos.  3 
and  4,  facing  each  other,  apply  themselves  to  it,  lift  it 
off  and  roll  it  out  of  the  way;  raise  the  spare  wheel, 
apply  themselves  to  it  in  the  same  manner,  and  lift  it  on. 

Remarks. 

443.  When  the  piece  is  unlimbered,  a  wheel  may  be 
changed  by  using  the  trail  as  a  lever,  in  the  following 
manner: 

To  change  the  right  wheel.  No.  4  chocks  the  left 
wheel  front  and  rear.  No.  3  removes  the  linch  pin 
and  washer.  The  trail  is  raised  as  in  limbering,  and 
the  gunner  places  a  prop  about  thirty  inches  in  length 
under  the  right  cheek  close  in  rear  of  the  axletree. 

By  bearing  down  the  trail  the  right  wheel  is  raised 
from  the  ground,  when  it  may  be  changed,  or  greased, 
by  nos.  3  and  4. 

444.  In  travelling  the  wheels  should  be  greased  at 
least  once  in  two  days. 

Vo  distnouui  a  carriage  and  its  timber, 

445.  The  carriage  is  without  its  piece,  and  unlim- 
bered, and  the  rear  of  the  limber  placed  two  yards  from 
the  trail. 

446.  The  instructor  commands : 

Dismount  the  carriage  and  its  limber. 

Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  wheels  front  and  rear;  fur- 
nish the  gunner  each  with  a  block;  remove  the  linch 


17.2  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

pins  and  washers;  and,  assisted  by  nos.  5  and  6,  place 
each  a  scaffold  of  two  blocks  under  and  perpendicular 
to  the  axletree,  midway  between  its  middle  and  the 
wheels. 

Raise  the  trail. 

447.  Nos  1  and  2  embar  through  the  wheels  under 
the  cheeks.  Nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10  apply  themselves  by 
hand  to  the  stock.     The  trail  is  raised. 

The  gunner  lays  one  block  upon  the  ground  length- 
wise under  the  stock;  places  the  other  block  upright 
upon  it;  and  upon  the  upright  block  a  w^heel  chock  per- 
pendicularly to  the  direction  of  the  stock,  and  twenty 
inches  in  rear  of  the  axletree.  In  order  to  steady  the 
carriage,  nos.  1  and  2,  facing  to  the  rear,  embar  under 
the  axletree  and  against  the  cheeks,  the  butts  of  their 
handspikes  on  the  ground. 

Lower  the  trail,  and  take  off  the  wheels. 

448.  The  trail  being  borne  down,  the  wheels  are 
raised  free  from  the  ground.  Nos.  3  and  5  and  4  and  6 
apply  themselves  to  the  wheels. 

Heave. 

449.  Acting  together  they  lift  them  both  off  at  the 
same  time,  and  let  them  fall  outwards  upon  the  ground. 

Raise  the  trail. 

450.  The  trail  is  raised  until  the  axletree  rests  upon 
the  scaffolds  which  are  under  it.  The  gunner  then  lays 
two  blocks  one  on  top  of  the  other,  under  and  perpen- 
dicular to  the  stock  at  the  rear  ends  of  the  cheeks,  and 
places  the  wheel  chock  on  them. 


art.  3.]  with  the  handspike.  vt9 

Lower  the  trail. 

451.  As  the  trail  is  lowered  nos.  3  and  4  remove  the 
blocks  from  under  the  axletree. 

Raise  the  trail. 

452.  Nos.  1  and  2  ease  the  head  of  the  cheeks  upon 
the  ground,  and  the  gunner  removes  his  two  blocks. 

Lower  the  trail. 

453.  The  trail  is  lowered  to  the  ground,  and  nos.  3 
and  4  replace  the  linch  pins  and  washers. 

To  the  limber. 

454.  Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  linch  pins  and  wash- 
ers from  the  limber  wheels.  Nos.  1  and  2  run  their 
handspikes  between  the  sweep-bar  and  axletree,  and 
rest  the  butt  ends  upon  the  splinter-bar;  they  are 
assisted  to  lift  by  nos.  7  and  8.  Nos.  3  and  5  and  4 
and  6  apply  themselves  to  the  wheels. 

Heave. 

455.  Nos.  1,  2,  7  and  8  lift  the  limber,  and  at  the 
same  time  nos.  3  and  5  and  4  and  6  lift  off  the  wheels 
and  allow  them  to  fall  outwards  to  the  ground.  The 
limber  is  lowered,  and  nos.  3  and  4  replace  the  linch 
pins  and  washers. 

To  your  posts. 

456.  All  resume  their  posts  at  the  stock  of  the  car- 
riage, and  replace  the  implements. 


15* 


174  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2.    ] 

To  remount  tite  carriage  and  its  limber. 

457.  The  instructor  commands: 

Mount  the  carriage  and  limber. 

Nos.  3  and  4  each  furnish  the  gunner  with  a  block; 
remove  the  linch  pins  and  washers;  and  place  chocks 
nearly  in  the  position  which  they  will  occupy  when  the 
wheels  are  on.  Nos.  1  and  2  stand  ready  to  steady  the 
carriage  by  embarring  under  the  front  of  the  axletree. 
Nos.  9,  10,  7,  8,  5  and  6  apply  themselves  by  hand  to 
the  stock. 

Raise  the  trail. 

458.  The  trail  is  raised,  and  the  gunner  forms  a 
scaffold  of  his  two  blocks  under  and  perpendicular  to 
the  stock  at  the  ends  of  the  cheeks,  and  places  a  chock 
upon  it.  Nos.  3  and  4  each  take  a  block  and  repair  to 
the  front  of  the  axletree. 

Lower  the  trail. 

459.  The  trail  is  borne  down.  Nos.  5  and  6  each 
give  a  block  to  nos.  3  and  4  respectively,  and  nos.  3 
and  4  form  two  scaffolds  of  blocks  under  the  axletree. 

Raise  the  trail. 

460.  Nos.  5  and  6  assist  to  raise  the  trail.  The  gun- 
ner shifts  his  two  blocks;  lays  one  upon  the  ground; 
sets  the  other  upright  upon  it;  and  upon  the  upright 
block  places  the  chock  twenty  inches  in  rear  of  the 
axletree. 

Lower  the  trail,  and  put  on  the  wheels. 

461.  The  trail  is  borne  down.  Nos.  3  and  5  and  4 
and  6  raise  the  wheels  and  bring  them  near  the  ends  of 
the  axletree. 


art.  3.]  with  the  handspike.  175 

Heave. 

462.  The  wheels  are  put  on  at  the  same  moment. 
Nos.  3  and  4  tighten  the  chocks,  and  replace  the  linch 
pins  and  washers. 

Lower  the  trail. 

463,  Nos.  1  and  2  embar  through  the  wheels  under 
the  cheeks.  The  gunner  removes  his  blocks,  and  the 
trail  is  lowered  to  the  ground. 

To  THE  limber. 

"  464.  Nos.  1  and  2  insert  their  handspikes  as  in  dis- 
mounting the  limber,  and  are  assisted  to  lift  by  nos.  7 
and  8.  Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  linch  pins  and  wash- 
ers, and,  assisted  by  nos.  5  and  6,  raise  the  wheels. 

Heave. 

465.  All  act  together  and  the  limber  is  raised,  and 
the  wheels  put  on  at  the  same  time.  Nos.  3  and  4 
replace  the  linch  pins  and  washers. 

Vo  diantount  the  tnoftarmwagon* 

466.  The  instructor  commands : 

Dismount  the  wagon. 

Nos.  1  and  2  run  their  handspikes  under  the  wind- 
lass and  over  the  axletree,  and  are  assisted  to  lift  by 
nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10.  Nos.  3  and  5  and  4  and  6  apply 
themselves  to  the  wheels. 

Heave. 

467.  All  act  together  and  the  wheels  are  lifted  off 
and  allowed  to  fall  outwards,  when  the  body  of  the 
wagon  is  lowered  to  the  ground. 


176  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2.      I 

Vo  reitiount  the  nun'tar^magmu  1 

The  wagon  is  mounted  in  th^e  inverse  way  to  that 
prescribed  for  dismounting  it. 

Remark. 

468.  A  carriage  may  be  dismounted  or  mounted  by 
a  single  lift  in  the  following  manner: 

The  gunner  lays  a  block  under  and  perpendicular  to 
the  stock,  just  in  rear  of  the  axletree.  Nos.  1  and  2 
pass  their  handspikes  under  the  axletree  to  nos.  5  and 
6,  and  are  assisted  by  nos.  7  and  8  and  9  and  10.  Nos. 
3  and  4,  assisted  by  the  chief  of  detachment  and  gun- 
ner, take  off  or  put  on  the  wheels. 


njtushj*jirtj)at. 


MJifOMarvd  So 


I       <        (> 


ART.  3.]  WITH   THE    HANDSPIKE.  1T7 


liESSON     XXXII. 

To  iovner  a  barbette  carriage    from  its  c1ta$si$,   the  piece 

being-  mounted, 
Vo  retuot$nt  the  barbette  carriage  upoti  its  chassis, 
Vo  grease  t/te  rotters  of  a  barbette  carriage,  the  piece  being 

ntounted, 
Vo  grease  tlte  forks  of  the  trarerse  witeels. 


(Plate  XXXIV.) 


469.  The  implements  necessary  are : 

3  Blocks. 

3  Half  blocks. 

4  IVheel  chocks.  ' 

'■i  Planks,  15  feet  long,  beveled  at  the  ends. 
1  Field  limber,  ammunition  box  removed. 

Vo  tower  a  barbette  carriage  from  its  chassis,  the  piece  being 
utounted, 

470.  The  piece  is  in  battery,  and  the  limber  placed 
accurately  in  the  prolongation  of  its  axis,  about  six 
yards  to  the  rear. 

471.  The  instructor  commands: 

Raise  the  trail. 

Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  rollers,  and  place  each  a 
wheel  chock  upon  the  rails  near  the  manoeuvring  staples 


-'  ^ 


178  MECHANICAL  MANGE5UVRES.  [PART  2. 

to  serve  as  fulcrums.  Nos.  5  and  6  embar  upon  these 
chocks  under  the  staples.  No.  2  inserts  his  handspike 
in  the  bore,  and  is  assisted  to  bear  down  by  no.  1.  No. 
4  stands  ready  with  a  block. 

Heave. 

472.  As  the  trail  is  raised  nos.  4  and  3  place  the 
block  on  the  tongue  under  and  perpendicular  to  the 
transom  and  axle-tie. 

Remove  the  traverse  wheels. 

473.  The  gunner  takes  out  the  prop,  and  then  ap- 
plies himself  to  the  end  of  the  tongue  to  lift.  No.  2 
passes  his  handspike  through  the  manceuvring  loop,  and 
is  assisted  by  nos.  1,  7  and  8.  No.  6  crosses  his  hand- 
spike under  the  tongue  near  the  rear  transom,  and  is 
assisted  by  nos.  5,  9  and  10.  All  face  to  the  front. 
Nos.  3  and  4  stand  ready  to  remove  the  traverse  wheels. 

Heave. 

474.  The  rear  of  the  chassis  is  raised.  Nos.  3  and 
4  remove  the  wheels,  and  the  chassis  is  gently  lowered 
upon  the  traverse  circle. 

Place  the  planks. 

475.  Nos.  3  and  4,  assisted  by  nos.  5  and  6,  form  a 
scaffold  of  a  block  and  a  half  block  on  each  side  of  the 
carriage  under  and  perpendicular  to  the  chassis,  about 
four  inches  in  rear  of  the  middle  transom,  and  then 
place  the  planks  resting  on  them,  their  inner  edges 
against  the  rails  of  the  chassis,  and  their  front  ends 
about  four  inches  in  front  of  the  middle  transom, 
beveled  sides  up. 


art.  3.]  with  the  handspike.  179 

-    Back  the  limber. 

476.  The  gunner  and  nos.  7,  8,  9  and  10  back  the 
linnber  up  the  planks;  raise  the  pole  tq  engage  the  pm- 
tle  in  the  lunette;  and  then  bear  down  upon  the  pole  in 
order  to  raise  the  trail.  No.  4  removes  the  block  from 
under  the  trail.     No.  3  keys  the  pintle. 

Run  down  the  piece. 

477.  Nos.  3  and  4  unchock  the  wheels.  All  apply 
themselves  by  hand,  as  in  no.  320,  and  run  the  piece 
carefully  down  the  planks  to  the  terre-plein. 

Vo  reinount  the  barbeite  carriage  upon  iis  chassis, 

478.  The  rear  of  the  chassis  rests  upon  the  traverse 
citcle,  and  the  piece,  limbered,  is  placed  accurately  in 
the  prolongation  of  the  tongue,  about  six  yards  to  the 
rear. 

479.  The  instructor  commands: 

Place  the  planks. 

Nos.  3  and  4,  assisted  by  nos.  5  and  6,  place  the 
planks  as  prescribed  in  no.  475. 

Back  the  piece. 

480.  Nos.  1  and  2  embar  through  the  wheels  near 
the  tire,  under  the  front  manceuvring  bolts.  Nos.  3 
and  4  embar  in  a  similar  way  over  the  rear  manoeu- 
vring bolts.  Nos.  5  and  6  embar  under  the  rear  of  the 
carriage  wheels.  Nos.  7  and  8  and  9  and  10  apply 
themselves  by  hand  to  the  limber  wheels.  The  gun- 
ner directs  the  pole. 


180  mechanical  man(euvres.  [part  2. 

Heave. 

481.  The  piece  is  backed  up  the  planks  into  battery. 
Nos.  3  and  4  chock  the  wheels. 

Raise  the  trail — Draw  out  the  limber. 

482.  The  gunner  and  nos.  7,  8, 9  and  10  bear  down  the 
pole,  while  nos.  4  and  3  place  a  block  under  and  perpen- 
dicular to  the  transom  and  axle-tie.  The  pole  is  then 
raised  to  disengage  the  pintle  from  the  lunette,  and  the 
liiiiber  and  planks  are  removed. 

Replace  the  traverse  wheels. 

483.  Nos.  3  and  4  stand  ready  with  the  traverse 
wheels.  The  men  apply  themselves  to  the  rear  of  the 
chassis,  as  prescribed  in  no.  473. 

Heave. 

484.  As  the  chassis  is  raised,  nos.  3  and  4  put  in  the 
wheels.     The  gunner  replaces  the  prop. 

The  block  under  the  transom  and  axle-tie  is  removed 
by  the  means  prescribed  for  placing  it  in  no.  471  and 
following. 

Remark. 

485.  The  iron  parts  of  carriages  which  are  not 
lackered  should  always  be  kept  well  greased. 

Vo  grease  the  rotters  of  a  barbette  carriage f  t/te  piece  beiug 
mounted, 

486.  The  piece  is  run  from  battery  as  in  no.  102. 
Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  wheels;  place  two  half  blocks 
lengthwise  on  the  rail  of  the  chassis,  one  in  front  and 
the  other  in  rear  of  the  roller  to  be  greased;  and  upon 
them  two  wheel  chocks  to  serve  as  fulcrums.     Nos,  1 


FIATE  34. 


ltJUH:RusK.2 


DMHZMarub  Sc. 


r. 


r'-\ 


^M^ 


ART.   3.]  "WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  181 

and  2  emban,  on  these  fulcrums  under  the  front  and 
rear  manoBUvring  bolts,  and,  assisted  by  nos.  3  and  4, 
raise  the  roller  from  the  rail.  The  gunner  moves  out 
the  roller  about  six  inches;  greases  the  spindle;  and 
pushes  the  roller  back.  Nos.  1  and  2  unbar.  Nos.  3 
and  4  put  on  the  wheels. 

Vo  grease  the  farhs  of  the  traverse  wheels, 

487.  Raise  the  rear  of  the  chassis,  as  prescribed  in 
no.  473,  and  remove  the  nuts  of  the  fork  bolts  with  a 
wrench. 


182  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


l.£SSON     XXXIII. 

Vo  piace  the  chassis  for  a  ii4^dr,  howitser  carriage  for  a 

itanh  casemate  in  position, 
Vo  utount  the  hotcitser, 
Vo  tnount  t/te  carriage  upon  its  clutssis, 
Vo   distnount  ttte  howitxer   carriage  frotn  its   chassis^   the 

piece  being  mounted, 
Vo  disntount  the  howitser. 


488.  The  implements  necessary  are: 


1  Half  roller. 
4  Blocks. 

3  Half  blocks. 

4  Oun   chocks. 
3  8kids. 

1  Hammer'-vrrench. 


Vo  place  the  chassis  for  a  ^4fpdr,  howitser  carriage  for  a 
Hank  casemate  in  position, 

489.  Two  handspikes  are  passed  across  and  imder 
the  chassis,  one  in  rear  of  the  traverse  fork,  the  other 
two  feet  from  the  pintle  hole,  and  four  men,  one  at 
each  end  of  these  handspikes,  lift  the  chassis  and  carry 
it  to  its  place.  The  men  at  the  rear  handspike  raise 
that  end  of  the  chassis.  The  gunner  with  the  wrench 
takes  off  the  three  nuts  which  attach  the  fork  and 
removes  it,  when  the  trail  is  lowered  to  the  ground. 


ART.  3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  183 

Vo  mount  t/te  Itowiizer, 

490.  The  skids  are  laid  in  rear  and  in  prolongation  of 
the  chassis,  their  outer  edges  in  line  with  those  of  the 
chassis. 

The  piece  is  rolled  upon  these  skids,  its  muzzle  even 
with  their  front  ends.  A  handspike  is  run  into  the 
bore,  to  which  four  men  apply  themselves,  and  the 
muzzle  is  raised;  the  half  roller  is  then  laid  across  the 
skids  under  the  junction  of  the  chase  and  reinforce. 
By  alternately  bearing  down  and  raising  the  muzzle  the 
piece  is  raised  upon  the  half  roller,  on  one  block,  and 
one  half  block,  laid  across  the  skids;  the  half  roller 
being  placed  three  or  four  inches  in  front  of  the  junc- 
tion of  the  chase  and  reinforce. 

The  cap-squares  are  removed,  and  the  front  of  the 
carriage  placed  on  the  skids  as  near  the  gun  as  conve- 
nient, the  trail  resting  on  the  ground.  Nos.  1  and  2 
bear  down  on  the  handspike  in  the  bore.  No.  6  passes 
his  handspike  under  the  cascable,  and  is  assisted  to  lift 
by  no.  5.  The  gunner  and  nos.  3  and  4  run  up  the  car- 
riage until  the  trunnion  holes  are  nearly  under  the 
trunnions.  Nos.  3  and  4  put  on  the  cap-squares.  All 
then  run  the  carriage  forward  until  the  head  of  the 
cheeks  touch  the  hurter  bolts. 

Vo  tnottnt  tlie  carriage  upon  its  citassia, 

491.  The  gunner  bears  down  on  the  roller-handspike. 
Nos.  1  and  2,  assisted  by  no.  5,  lift  at  the  handspike  in 
the  bore  and  raise  the  front  of  the  carriage.  The 
others  push  the  carriage  forward  until  the  rollers  in  the 
head  of  the  cheeks  pass  over  the  counter-hurters,  and 
the  guide  on  the  front  transom  enters  into  the  guide 
space. 

The  gunner  bears  down  on  the  roller-handspike. 
No.  2  lays  down  the  handspike,  and  all  push  the  car- 
riage forward;  no.  6  with  a  handspike  at  the  trail 
assisting  to  pass  it  over  the  counter-hurters,  and  guid- 
ing the  flange  of  the  roller  into  the  guide  space.     (To 


184  MECHANICAL   MAN(EUVRES.  [PART  2. 

pass  it  more  conveniently  over  the  counter-hurters,  two 
pieces  of  scantling,  each  about  three  feet  long,  four  by 
three  inches,  the  ends  beveled  on  opposite  sides,  with 
a  mortice  on  the  lower  side  to  receive  the  counter- 
hurter,  may  be  laid  on  the  rear  of  the  rails.  The  car- 
riage will  roll  on  these  over  the  counter-hurters.) 

No.  6  then  passes  his  handspike  across  the  breech  of 
the  piece  under  the  knob  of  the  cascable.  Nos.  5  and 
6  place  themselves  at  each  end  of  this  handspike.  Nos. 
3  and  4  take  hold  of  the  handles.  Nos.  1  and  2  seize 
the  rings  on  each  side  of  the  cheeks.  The  gunner 
b^ars  down  .on  the  roller-handspike.  All  act  together 
and  run  the  piece  up  the  chassis  into  battery. 

Nos.  1,  2,  5  and  6  apply  themselves  to  a  handspike 
placed  across  and  under  the  rear  end  of  the  chassis, 
which  they  raise  and  hold  up,  while  the  gunner, 
assisted  by  nos.  3  and  4,  replace  the  fork  and  nuts, 
and  put  in  the  pintle. 

As  these  carriages  are  sent  to  the  Forts  w^ith  the  tra- 
verse wheels  removed  for  the  convenience  of  transpor- 
tation, the  chassis  may  be  put  in  position,  and  the  piece 
mounted,  before  they  are  put  on. 

Vo  dismtouni  the  hoivitxer   carriage  from   its  chaaaiSf  the 
piece  being  ntounted* 

492.  The  pintle  is  removed,  and  the  carriage  run 
into  battery.  A  handspike  is  passed  under  the  rear  end 
of  the  chassis,  which  is  raised,  and  the  fork  removed 
as  prescribed  in  no.  489;  when  the  trail  is  lowered  to 
the  ground  and  the  skids  placed  in  prolongation  of  the 
chassis.  The  gun  carriage  is  then  run  back  until  the 
ends  of  the  cheeks  touch  the  counter-hurters. 

The  gunner  bears  down  on  the  roller-handspike  to 
raise  the  trail  as  much  as  possible,  and,  assisted  by 
nos.  3  and  4,  who  place  the  beveled  ends  of  their  hand- 
spikes under  the  outer  edges  of  the  trail,  passes  it  over 
the  counter-hurters  on  to  the  skids. 

When  the  front  rollers  touch  the  counter-hurters,  no. 
2  puts   his   handspike   in   the   bore.     Nos.    1   and  2, 


ART.  3.]  WITH    THE    HANDSPIKE.  185 

assisted  by  no.  5,  raise  the  muzzle.  Nos.  3  and  4  lift 
at  the  rings  and  push  back  the  carriage  until  the  front 
rollers  rest  on  the  skids.  The  carriage  is  then  run 
back  on  the  skids  until  the  muzzle  is  over  their  front 
ends. 

Vo  disntount  the  hotvitser, 

493.  No.  2  inserts  his  handspike  in  the  bore,  chocks 
it^elow,  and  bears  down  on  the  muzzle.  No.  4  lays 
the  round  part  of  his  handspike  on  the  cheeks  under 
the  breech.  Nos.  1  and  2,  assisted  by  no.  5,  raise  the 
chase,  and  the  others  push  the  piece  forward  as  far  as 
it  can  go.  Nos.  3  and  4  lay  a  block  and  a  half  block 
across  the  skids,  touching  the  head  of  the  cheeks. 
Nos.  1  and  2  lift  at  the  muzzle,  and  no.  4  places  the 
half  roller  on  top;  the  piece  is  rested  on  this  half  roller. 

Nos.  1  and  2  bear  down  on  the  handspike  in  the 
bore.  Nos.  5  and  6  lift  on  that  of  no.  6,  passed  across 
and  under  the  cascable.  The  gunner  and  nos.  3  and  4 
back  the  carriage  until  its  head  rests  on  the  rear  end  of 
the  skids,  and  the  trail  upon  the  ground.  Nos.  3  and  4 
place  a  block  and  a  half  block  across  the  skids  under 
the  breech. 

The  muzzle  is  raised  and  the  half  block  removed 
from  under  the  half  roller.  The  muzzle  is  lowered 
and  the  half  block  removed  from  under  the  breech. 
The  muzzle  is  again  raised  and  the  block  removed  from 
under  the  half  roller,  which  is  now  placed  under  the 
trunnions.  The  muzzle  is  borne  down  and  the  block 
removed  from  under  the  breech,  it  being  replaced  by  a 
half  block. 

The  piece  may  now  be  slewed  in  any  direction, 
rolled  upon  blocks,  or  placed  in  any  required  position. 


.     16» 


186  MECHANICAL    MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


ARTICLE    IV. 

MANCEUVRES    WITH    MACHINES. 
(  Plates  XXXV,  XXXVI,  XXXVII,  XXXVIII  and  XXXIX. ) 


494.  The  machines  usually  employed  in  the  me- 
chanical manceuvres  are: 

THE  LIFTING  JACK. 

THE  GIN. 

THE  SLING  CART. 

THE  CASEMATE  TRUCK. 

These,  with  the  implements  used  in  the  mechanical 
manceuvres  for  siege  pieces,  enable  the  detachment  to 
manage  the  heaviest  pieces  of  artillery  in  all  cases 
which  the  service  ordinarily  presents. 


AET.  4.] 


WITH    MACHINES. 


W! 


495.  Dimensions,   weights,   and   strength  of  ropes 
used  in  the  mechanical  manoeuvres. 


•2          « 

1          ^ 

ra             O 

T3               "^ 

S                  03 

«0 

<U                 <U 

I 

one 
ther. 

inch 

M 

- 

^«     S-^ 

5  An  eye 
\     with 

(  A  loop 
(     one  e 

•^ 

o    oq    QO    o    o 

00 

,_, 

CO 

O     <M     t^     «0     «£> 

to 

t^ 

•qiSuaajg 

a 

o 

CQ    i-H    CO    Jr-    r-    oj    CO      ,       1 

^•^    <0     O"    ^-^    rf    cf    ^-^      '         1 

l-H      f-H 

00 

O     O     00     O     00 

-If 

o 

l-H      1-1 

•adoj 

»-l 

<-; 

9ioitM  aqj  JO 

a 

5 

O      "^      f-H      1— )      1* 

CO     ^     (M     CO     CI 

l> 

fH      O 

bJO 

I 

•uioq? 

8 

■^ 

00     CO     O     tH     iH 

-IN     -IN 

«o    o 

-Bj  ouo  JO 

a 

^ 

«D     O     r«<     CO     CO 

rH 

o 

•qi3u9q 

1 

o 
t^ 

1  S  85  ?2  ^ 

^ 

2  § 

r-< 

•qvio 

4 

-1* 

->i«    -1*    -1*    n« 
lO     <0     •«'     CO     CO     (M     fH       ' 

. 

^ 

• 

■s 

• 

0} 

i 

"S 

^ 
% 

i 

1 

§ 

S)    c 

> 

H 

'     c     s» 

p 

o 

2 

a 

^  J 

1 

5    c 

.2 

^ —     be     O-    Ci<     *■ 

^   £ 

M 

""  T          1 

S3 

c    c 

5    C 

"11 

Q  a 

3 

188  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

The  prolonges  above  described  are  those  used  in  the 
mechanical  manoeuvres;  they  should  be  designated  by 
their  length,  in  order  to  distinguish  them  from  those 
used  in  field  service. 

The  size  of  a  rope  is  designated  by  its  circumference 
in  inches;  its  length  is  usually  expressed  in  fathoms. 

The  utmost  strength  of  good  hemp  rope  is  sixty-four 
hundred  pounds  to  the  square  inch.  The  weight  which 
it  will  bear  before  breaking  is  expressed  in  tons  by  one- 
fifth  of  the  square  of  the  circumference  in  inches.  In 
practice  a  rope  should  not  be  subjected  to  more  than 
one-half  this  strain.  It  stretches  Irom  one-seventh  to 
one-fifth;  and  its  diameter  is  diminished  from  one- 
seventh  to  one-fourth  before  breaking.  A  difference 
of  quality  in  the  hemp  may  produce  a  difference  of 
one-fourth  in  the  strength  of  ropes  of  the  same  size. 

The  strength  of  Manilla  rope  is  less  than  that  of 
hemp  rope. 

The  above  table  is  calculated  for  hemp  rope. 

The  weight  of  Manilla  rope  is  to  that  of  hemp  as 
811  is  to  1000. 


£tJtJIJiusK,2fArtBeit. 


DMfCLellazbd.  So. 


t 

'*.* 


1^ 


3fe%ft 


'  M 


&  arris  orb  Guv. 


N'l  Braces. 
..    2   Cleacs. 
-    3   Clevis. 
.    4   Clevis  tolt. 
.    5  PidUy. 


Lt.It.KRu3lu2f-Art.  DeU. 


J}.3^ae.Uemd,  Sc. 


%; 


1^ 


f)?^ 

#■ 


^ 


/.,'  n.HJtitsTi .  2^Arc.I>e,lt. 


D.At?CltlUuul  Sc 


V^^^    %^ 


*  *: 


i'*  ,^,.    #^»^ 


¥ 


*^. 

-  ■,#■ 

'  '  t    1*^1 

PLATE  38. 


Lt.IUB:RiLsh,.2^Art.Delt:. 


VMTClelUaicbSc. 


PLATE  39. 


BorrhhardX^r's  knot. 


rJiJI.IULs7i.2fiArei2?elc. 


J>M!'CUUand,  Sc. 


190  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  S 

Nos.  1  and  2  carry  and  work  the  jack. 

Nos.  3  and  4  chock  and  unchock  the  gun,  wheeliS 
&c.,  and  place  and  remove  the  blocks  and  half  rollers 

Nos.  5  and  6  assist  to  bear  down  the  muzzle;  alter 
nate  with  nos.  1  and  2  in  working  the  jack;  and  aid  noE 
3  and  4  to  place  and  remove  the  blocks  and  half  roller* 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    LIFTING  JACK.  191 


MAN(EUVRES    WITH   THE    LIFTING    JACK. 


liESSON     XXXIV. 

A  piece  lying  on  tite  ground  to  place  blochg  under  the  chase 

and  reinforce* 
Vo  retnove  tite  blockt* 


499.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

iS  Blocks. 

6  Crun  checks. 

1  Ijiftiiig   block. 

•<  piece  lying  on  the  ground  to  place  blocks  under  the  chase 
and  reinforce, 

500.  Pass  the  small  end  of  a  handspike  into  the 
bore,  allowing  about  eight  inches  of  the  butt  end  to 
project,  under  which  place  the  foot  of  the  jack.  Raise 
the  piece,  and  put  a  block  under  the  chase  as  far  back 
as  possible. 

Apply  the  foot  of  the  jack  under  the  swell  of  the 
muzzle,  and  move  the  block  to  the  rear  of  the  trun- 
nions, so  that  the  muzzle  will  preponderate  as  the  screw 
is  lowered;  place  a  block  under  the  breech;  raise  the 
muzzle  again,  and  bring  forward  the  front  block  to  the 
desired  position. 


192  MECHANICAL    MANOEUVRES.  [PART  $q 

Vo  retnore  ttte  blocks, 

501.  Apply  the  jack  as  before.  Move  the  front 
block  in  rear  of  the  trunnions,  lower  the  muzzle,  and 
remove  the  breech  block;  raise  the  muzzle  with  the 
jack,  and  bring  the  front  block  towards  the  neck;  insert 
a  handspike  in  the  bore,  as  before,  and  apply  the  foot 
of  the  jack  under  it;  raise  the  muzzle  and  remove  the 
front  block,  letting  the  gun  rest  on  the  ground. 

Remark* 

502.  The  blocks  might  be  placed  and  removed,  by 
first  raising  one  end  of  the  piece  and  then  the  other; 
but  this  would  require  the  lifting  jack  to  be  moved. 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    LIFTING   JACK.  19S 


I4ESI9ON     XXXV. 

2*«  ghifi  a  piece  from,  the  truuuiott  holes  to  its  travettiug  bed, 
Vo  shift  a  piece  from  its  travelling  bed  to  ttte  trunnion  holes. 


503.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

'2  Short  rollers. 
'i  Half  blocks. 

4  Wheel  chocks. 

5  Roller  chocks. 
1  Trace-rope. 

To  shift  a  piece  from,  the  trmn»$ion  holes  to  its  travelling  be4* 

504.  Chock  the  wheels  of  the  carriage,  and  remove 
the  cap-squares;  bear  down  on  the  muzzle,  and  remove 
the  elevating  screw,  placing  at  the  same  time  a  half 
block  against  the  box  of  the  elevating  screw. 

505.  Apply  the  jack  under  the  swell  of  the  muzzle 
and  raise  the  chase,  placing  a  half  block  on  the  head 
of  the  stock;  then  by  a  second  lift  with  the  jack  place 
the  rollers  on  the  stock,  one  just  in  rear  of  the  trun- 
nions, the  other  under  the  reinforce;  chock  the  latter 
roller  towards  the  muzzle,  and  remove  the  half  blocks 
from  the  stock. 

506.  Attach  the  rope  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable, 
and  haul  upon  it  so  as  to  bring  the  breech  over  the 
bolster;  chock  the  rear  roller  towards  the  muzzle. 

17 


194  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

507.  Apply  the  head  of  the  jack  under  the  swell  of 
the  muzzle  and  raise  it,  the  breech  resting  on  the  bol- 
ster; remove  the  rollers;  lower  the  piece  to  its  travel- 
ling position;  untie  the  rope;  replace  the  cap-squares; 
and  unchock  the  wheels. 

Vo  ghifi  a  piece  frotn  its  travellings  bed  to  the  trunnion  ItoUs, 

508.  Chock  the  wheels,  and  remove  the  cap- squares. 

509.  Apply  the  jack  under  the  muzzle  and  raise  the 
chase,  placing  two  rollers  under  the  piece,  one  just  in 
rear  of  the  elevating  screw-box,  the  other  midway  be- 
tween this  and  the  trunnion  holes;  chock  the  former 
towards  the  muzzle,  and  hold  the  latter  in  place  until 
the  piece  bears  upon  it. 

510.  Attach  the  rope  to  the  neck  of  the  gun,  and 
unchock  the  breech  roller;  haul  upon  the  rope  until  the 
trunnions  are  over  the  chin  bolts;  place  a  chock  upon 
the  stock  at  such  distance  from  the  breech  roller  as  to 
allow  the  trunnions  to  come  over  their  position,  and 
untie  the  rope. 

511.  Apply  the  head  of  the  jack  under  the  swell 
inclining  it  towards  the  muzzle,  and  raise  the  chase  so 
as  to  allow  the  trunnions  to  pass  over  the  chin  bolts; 
push  the  piece  forward  until  the  trunnions  are  over  the 
holes;  chock  the  front  roller;  bear  down  on  the  muzzle 
to  remove  the  breech  roller;  and  lay  a  half  block  on 
the  stock  in  rear  of  and  against  the  box  of  the  elevating 
screw. 

512.  Apply  the  jack  under  the  muzzle  and  raise  the 
chase  to  remove  the  chase  roller;  allow  the  piece  to 
descend  into  the  trunnion  holes  by  lowering  the  jack. 

513.  Bear  down  on  the  muzzle  and  remove  the  half 
block  from  the  stock;  replace  the  elevating  screw  and 
cap-squares,  and  unchock  the  wheels. 


ART.  4.]  WITH   THE    LIFTING   JACK.  195 


liESSOIV     XXXVI. 

Vo  Mtouui  a  Siege  Gun, 

To  dismount  the  gutt. 

Vo  mount  an  S-inch  Siege  Mtowitzer, 

Vo  diamount  the  htncitser, 

Vo  change,  to  greate,  or  to  raise  a  ufheel. 


514.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

3  Half  rollers. 
16  Blocks. 

6  Half  blocks. 

4  Wheel  chocks. 
3  Skids. 

Vo  ntount  a  Siege  €tuM, 

515.  The  piece  is  lying  upon  two  blocks,  one  under 
the  base-ring,  the  other  under  the  trunnions;  and  the 
carriage,  unlimbered,  is  on  a  line  with  and  in  front  of 
the  piece,  the  trail  about  two  yards  from  the  muzzle. 

516.  Lay  the  skids  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece 
and  two  inches  outside  of  the  trunnions,  their  ends  on 
a  line  with  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

517.  Insert  the  small  end  of  a  handspike,  beveled 
side  up,  in  the  bore;  apply  the  jack  under  it  and  raise 
the  muzzle,  placing  a  half  roller  under  the  trunnions. 
Lower  the  muzzle  by  bearing  down  upon  the  handspike 
in  the  bore,  and  place  a  half  roller  under  the  reinforce, 
near  the  base-ring. 


\ 


196 


MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


518.  Continue  the  manceuvre  by  alternately  raising 
the  muzzle  with  the  jack,  applying  it  as  may  be  found 
most. convenient,  and  lowering  it  by  means  of  the  hand- 
spike in  the  bore,  as  follows : 


Raise  the  muzzle,  and  ap- 
ply the  foot  of  the  jack 
under  the  swell  of  the 
muzzle,  the  lifting  block 
laid  on  edge. 

Lower  the  muzzle    .... 


Raise  the  muzzle,  the  lift- 
ing block  laid  flat  upon 
the  foot  of  the  jack. 

Raise  the  muzzle,  the  lift- 
ing block  placed  upright. 

Lower  the  muzzle  .... 


Raise  the  muzzle,  the  lift- 
ing block  upright. 

Raise  the  muzzle,  the  head 
of  the  jack  under  the  end 
of  the  handspike  in  the 
bore. 


Place  a  half  block  under 
each  end  of  the  front 
half  roller. 

Place  a  block  under  each 
end  of  the  rear  half  rol- 
ler. 

Place  a  half  block. 

Replace  the  half  block  by 
a  block. 

Place  a  block. 
Place  a  half  block. 


Replace  the  half  block  by 
a  block. 


Lower  the  muzzle  .... 

Raise  the  muzzle,  the  lift- 
ing block  on  edge  upon 
the  head  of  the  jack. 

Lower  the  muzzle    .... 

Raise  the  muzzle,  the  head 
of  the  jack  under  the 
swell  of  the  muzzle,  and 
the  lifting  block  on  edge. 


Place  a  half  block. 
Place  a  half  block. 


Replace  the  half  block  by 
a  block. 


Replace  the  half  block  by 
a  block. 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    LIFTING   JACK.  Wt 

Lower  the  muzzle Place  a  block. 

Raise  the  muzzle,  the  jack 
and  lifting  block  as  be- 
fore. 


Place  a  half  block. 


Raise  the  muzzle;  place 
two  half  blocks  under 
the  bed  of  the  jack,  and 
apply  the  head  under  the 
swell  of  the  muzzle. 


Replace  the  half  block  by 
a  block. 


519.  The  gun  now  rests  upon  two  scaffolds;  the  half 
roller  of  the  rear  scaffold,  which  is  four  blocks  high, 
nearly  under  the  base-ring;  that  of  the  front  scaffold,  of 
four  blocks  and  a  half  block,  under  the  trunnions. 

520.  Back  the  carriage,  the  trail  passing  between  the 
scaffolds,  until  the  rear  of  the  cheeks  touch  the  front 
half  roller,  and  the  muzzle  projects  beyond  the  head  of 
the  cheeks.  Bear  down  on  the  handspike  in  the  muz- 
zle and  place  a  half  block  under  each  end  of  the  half 
roller  on  the  rear  scaffold. 

521.  Apply  the  head  of  the  jack  under  the  swell  of 
the  muzzle;  and  raise  it  sufficiently  high  to  allow  the 
chin  bolts  to  pass  under  the  trunnions;  remove  the  front 
scaffold,  and  back  the  carriage  until  the  trunnions  are 
over  the  trunnion  holes. 

522.  Lower  the  jack  and  let  the  trunnions  descend 
upon  the  ends  of  two  handspikes  inserted  in  the  trun- 
nion holes;  bear  down  on  the  muzzle  and  remove  the 
half  block  from  under  the  half  roller. 

523.  Apply  the  jack  under  the  muzzle  and  raise  it 
sufficiently  to  withdraw  the  handspikes  from  the  trun- 
nion holes,  then  lower  the  trunnions  to  their  places. 

524.  Remove  the  blocks  and  skids;  replace  the  cap- 
squares;  and  unchock  the  wheels. 

17» 


198  MECHANICAL  MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

To  diamaunt  the  gun, 

5'il5.  The  carriage  is  unlimbered. 

526.  Chock  the  wheels;  remove  the  cap-squares; 
lay  the  skids  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece  two  inches 
outside  of  the  trunnions,  the  rear  ends  on  a  line  with 
the  knob  of  the  cascable;  and  place  on  each  skid  a 
scaffold  of  four  blocks  and  a  half  block,  the  middle  of 
each  a  little  in  front  of  the  base-ring. 

Insert  the  small  end  of  a  handspike  in  the  bore; 
lower  the  muzzle  by  bearing  down  on  this  handspike, 
and  place  a  half-roller  on  the  blocks. 

527.  Raise  the  muzzle  with  the  jack  so  as  to  allow 
the  chin  bolts  to  pass  under  the  trunnions;  unchock  the 
wheels,  and  run  the  carriage  forward  until  the  rear 
ends  of  the  cheeks  are  eight  inches  in  front  of  the 
trunnions;  chock  the  wheels. 

528.  Place  upon  each  skid  a  scaffold  of  four  blocks 
B.nd  a  half  block,  the  middle  opposite  to  the  trunnions; 
lay  a  half  roller  on  the  blocks;  lower  the  muzzle  so  as 
to  allow  the  gun  to  rest  upon  the  scaffold;  and  run  out 
the  carriage  until  the  trail  is  two  yards  from  the  muzzle. 

529.  Continue  the  mancBUvre  by  alternately  raising 
and  lowering  the  muzzle  as  in  mounting  the  piece, 
diminishing  the  scaffold  each  time  by  a  half  block,  (by 
replacing  each  block  as  it  is  removed  by  a  half  block,) 
until  the  piece  is  lowered  upon  two  blocks. 

Remark. 

530.  When  the  piece  is  on  its  platform,  by  placing 
the  rear  ends  of  the  skids  even  with  the  rear  of  the 
platform,  and  the  rear  scaffold  as  far  back  as  possible, 
with  the  front  half  roller  on  the  front  end  of  its  support- 
ing blocks,  the  carriage  can  be  run  to  battery,  and  the 
trail  made  to  clear  the  blocks. 


ART.  4.]  WITH   THE    LIFTING   JACK.  199 

To  tMOMui  an  S'inch  Siege  MEotcitser, 

531.  The  piece  is  lying  upon  two  blocks,  one  under 
the  base-ring,  the  other  under  the  trunnions;  and  the 
carriage,  unlimbered,  is  on  a  line  with  and  in  front  of 
the  piece,  the  trail  about  two  yards  from  the  muzzle. 

532.  Lay  the  skids  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece 
sufficiently  far  apart  to  clear  the  cheeks  of  the  carriage, 
and  with  their  rear  ends  projecting  one  foot  beyond  the 
knob  of  the  cascable. 

533.  Raise  the  piece  by  the  method  already  pre- 
scribed for  the  gun,  on  two  scaffolds  of  four  blocks  and 
a  half  roller. 

534.  Move  the  front  scaffold  under  the  trunnions. 
Bear  down  the  muzzle  and  move  the  rear  scaffold  un- 
der the  neck  of  the  cascable,  increasing  its  height  at 
the  same  time  by  one  block. 

535.  Back  the  carriage  until  the  travelling  bolts 
touch  the  front  half  roller;  insert  the  small  ends  of  two 
handspikes  in  the  bore  with  a  chock  over  them  to  keep 
them  steady  and  even,  and  place  the  jack  under  their 
projecting  ends. 

536.  Lay  the  lifting  block  on  the  head  of  the  jack, 
which  is  raised  on  a  block,  and  run  up  the  screw  until 
the  piece  is  raised  from  the  front  half  roller;  take  away 
the  front  scaffold;  back  the  carriage  until  the  trunnions 
are  over  their  holes,  and  lower  the  screw  until  the  trun- 
nions settle  in  them;  remove  the  rear  scaffold,  and  put 
on  the  cap-squares. 

Vo  digtnonut  ilte  houfiiset: 

537.  The  carriage  is  unlimbered. 

538.  Chock  the  wheels;  remove  the  cap-squares; 
and  lay  the  skids  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  piece,  far 


200  MECHANICAL   MANOBUVRES.  [PART  2.      i 

enough  apart  to  clear  the  cheeks,  the  rear  ends  pro- 
jecting one  foot  beyond  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

539.  Bear  down  the  muzzle  so  as  to  raise  the  breech 
sufficiently  high  to  place  under  it  a  scaffold  of  five 
blocks  and  a  half  roller,  and  rest  the  neck  of  the  casca- 
ble on  the  half  roller. 

540.  Insert  two  handspikes  in  the  bore,  as  prescribed 
in  no.  535,  and  place  the  jack,  supported  on  a  block  to 
give  it  sufficient  height,  under  their  ends.  Raise  the 
piece  until  the  trunnions  clear  the  chin  bolts;  unchock 
the  wheels;  back  the  carriage  as  close  to  the  jack  as 
possible,  and  chock  the  wheels. 

541.  Place  a  scaffold  of  four  blocks  and  the  half 
roller  under  the  trunnions,  or  as  nearly  so  as  the  tra- 
velling bolts  will  permit,  the  front  ends  of  the  blocks 
opposite  to  the  trunnions;  lower  the  piece  until  it  rests 
on  the  half  roller;  remove  the  jack,  and  run  out  the 
carriage. 

Lower  the  piece  to  the  ground  as  prescribed  for  the 
gun. 

Remark. 

542.  This  mancevre  can  be  performed  on  the  rectan- 
gle of  the  platform  as  prescribed  for  the  gun  (no.  530). 

Vo  change,  to  grease,  or  to  raise  a  veheet, 

543.  Apply  the  jack  under  the  head  of  one  of  the 
cheeks,  or  at  the  end  of  the  axletree. 


ART.  4.]  THE    GIN.  201 


THE     OIIV 


544.  There  are  three  kinds  of  gins  used  in  service, 
the  Field  and  Siege,  the  Garrison,  and  the  Casemate. 
The  last  two  differ  from  each  other  only  in  height;  the 
first  differs  from  the  others  in  construction  and  size. 

Either  of  them  may  be  used  as  shears,  for  garnish- 
ing with  their  guns  such  works  as  are  without  ramps. 


.202  MECHANICAL   MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


THE     FI]SI.]>     AIVD     SIEOE     OIN. 


(  Plate  XXXV. ) 


545.  When  the  gin  is  put  together  and  raised,  that 
part  included  between  the  legs  and  pry -pole  is  called 
the  inside;  the  outside  being  the  part  without  the  legs; 
the  right  corresponding  to  the  right  hand  of  a  man 
standing  at  the  middle  and  outside  of  the  windlass, 
facing  towards  it;  the  left  corresponding  to  his  left 
hand. 

546.  The  detachment  is  composed  of  the  same  num- 
ber of  men,  and  told  off  in  the  same  manner,  as  pre- 
scribed in  no.  238.  It  having  been  marched  to  the 
gin,  the  instructor  teaches  the  men  its  nomenclature, 
and  explains  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements. 

547.  The  odd  numbers  are  placed  on  the  right,  and 
the  even  numbers  on  the  left  side  of  the  gin. 

548.  The  gunner,  or  the  chief  of  detachment,  car- 
ries the  head  of  the  gin  (when  put  together);  passes 
the  fall  around  the  pullies  at  the  head  of  the  gin; 
secures  the  loose  end  of  the  fall  to  the  sling;  hooks  the 
single  block  to  it;  and  superintends  the  tieing  of  all 
knots. 

No.  1  carries  the  foot  of  the  right  leg;  works  the 
right  handspike;  and  assists  in  passing  the  fall  over  the 
pullies,  in  slinging  the  piece,  and  in  moving  the  car- 
riage. 


ART.   4.]  THE    FIELD    AND    SIEGE    GIN.  203 

No.  2  carries  the  foot  of  the  left  leg;  works  the  left 
handspike;  and  assists  in  passing  the  fall  over  the  pul- 
lies,  in  slinging  the  piece,  and  in  moving  the  carriage. 

No.  3  puts  the  braces  in  the  mortices  of  the  right 
leg;  works  the  inside  handspike  on  the  right;  keys  and 
unkeys  the  right  cap-square;  and  assists  in  moving  the 
carriage. 

No.  4  puts  the  braces  in  the  mortices  of  the  left  leg; 
works  the  inside  handspike  on  the  left;  keys  and  un- 
keys the  left  cap-square;  and  assists  in  moving  the  car- 
riage. 

No.  5  carries  the  top  of  the  right  leg;  places  the 
handspikes  of  nos.  1  and  3  in  the  mortices;  and  assists 
in  placing  the  sheaves,  and  in  moving  the  carriage. 

No.  6  carries  the  top  of  the  left  leg;  places  the  hand- 
spikes of  nos.  2  and  4  in  the  mortices;  and  assists  in 
placing  the  sheaves,  and  in  moving  the  carriage. 

Nos.  7  and  8  wrap  the  running  end  of  the  fall  around 
the  windlass;  hold  on  or  ease  off;  and  assist  in  carrying 
sheaves  and  handspikes,  in  moving  the  carriage,  &c. 

Nos.  9  and  10  assist  in  carrying  implements,  in 
moving  the  carriage,  &c. 


••'  $ 


204 


MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


MANOEUVRES  WITH  THE  FIELD  AND  SIEGE  GIN. 


I^ESSOIV     XXXVII. 

To  put  itte  gin  together. 

Vo  reeve  the  fall, 

Vo  carry  tlie  gin  when  put  together, 

Vo  raise  the  gin, 

Vo  move  the  gin  n)hen  ratted, 

Vo  lower  the  gin. 


549.  The  implements  necessary  are : 

5  Handspikes. 
1  Fall. 
1  Sling. 
1  li  asking-line. 
1  nammer-wrench. 

3  Pieces  of  plank,  with  a  small  hole  in  each  to  receive 
the  points  of  the  gin. 

Vo  put  the  gin  together, 

550.  The  different  parts  of  the  gin  having  been 
brought  to  the  place  designated,  the  instructor  com- 
mands : 

Put  the  gin  together. 

Nos.  1  and  2  bring  up  the  windlass.  Nos.  3  and  5 
bring  the  right  leg,  and  lay  it  with  its  outside  under- 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    SIEGE    GIN.  266 

neath,  in  its  proper  position  with  reference  to  the  wind- 
lass. Nos.  4  and  6  bring  up  the  left  leg,  and  place  it 
in  a  corresponding  position.  Nos.  7  and  8  bring  the 
sheaves,  bolts,  and  fall,  and  place  them  near  the  head  of 
the  gin.  Nos.  9  and  10  bring  up  the  braces  and  pry- 
pole,  and  assist  nos.  3  and  4  in  putting  the  braces  into 
the  mortices  of  the  left  leg,  and  then  into  those  of  the 
right.  Nos.  1  and  2  put  in  the  windlass.  Nos.  5  and 
6  bring  the  tops  of  the  legs  together  and  bolt  them, 
when  they  put  in  the  sheaves  and  pry -pole.  The  gun- 
ner pins  the  braces. 

Vo  reeve  tite  fail, 

551.  The  gin  being  put  together,  and  still  lying 
upon  the  ground,  the  instructor  commands: 

Reeve  the  fall. 

Nos.  5  and  6  raise  the  pry-pole  until  it  clears  the 
pullies.  The  gunner  receiving  from  nos.  1  and  2  one 
end  of  the  fall,  passes  it  through  the  left  sheave  from 
below,  and  hands  it  back  to  them.  They  pass  it 
through  the  sheeve  of  the  single  pulley,  (hooked,  for 
convenience,  on  the  middle  brace,)  and  return  it  to  the 
gunner,  who  passes  it  through  the  right  sheave  from 
below,  and  gives  it  to  no.  1,  by  whom  it  is  secured  by 
wrapping  it  around  the  middle  brace. 

552.  If  the  gin  has  been  raised,  the  instructor  gives 
the  same  command,  when  the  gunner,  mounting  upon 
the  upper  brace,  receives  from  nos.  1  and  2  one  end 
of  the  fall,  which  he  passes  over  the  left  sheave  from 
without  to  within.  The  fall  is  then  reeved  in  the  man- 
ner prescribed. 


Vo  carry  the  gin  uthen  pui  together, 

553.  The  gin  is  lying  upon  the  ground,  its  outside 
downwards. 

18 


206  JHECHANICAL   MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

554.  The  instructor  commands: 

Carry  the  gin. 

The  gunner  applies  himself  at  the  head.  Nos.  5  and 
6  apply  themselves  at  the  ends  of  the  upper  braces. 
Nos.  3  and  4  apply  themselves  at  the  ends  of  the  mid- 
dle braces.  Nos.  1  and  2  apply  themselves  at  the  ends 
of  the  lower  braces. 

555.  The  instructor,  having  indicated  the  direction, 
commands: 

March. 

The  men  lift  the  gin  together,  and  march  off,  keep- 
ing step. 

556.  The  handspikes,  fall,  and  sling  may  be  carried 
either  on  the  gin  or  by  the  remaining  men. 

2V»  raige  the  gin. 

551.  The  instructor  commands: 

Raise  the  gin. 

The  gunner  applies  himself  at  the  head  of  the  gin, 
Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  apply  themselves  near  the  upper 
brace.  Nos.  5  and  6  each  place  a  foot  against  the 
lower  ends  of  the  legs  to  steady  them. 

Heave. 

558.  The  gin  is  raised.  Nos.  5  and  6  take  hold  of 
the  pry -pole  as  soon  as  there  is  no  longer  any  danger 
of  the  legs  slipping,  and  by  pulling  down  upon  it  assist 
in  raising  the  gin. 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    SIEGE    GIN.  W7 

Vo  move  the  gin  ufhen  raitetl, 

559.  The  instructor  wishing  to  move  the  gin  a  short 
distance,  commands: 

Move  the  gin. 

Nos.  1  and  2  place  each  a  handspike  under  the 
windlass  from  without,  retaining  the  small  ends;  nos, 
3  and  4  seize  the  butt  ends.  Nos.  5  and  6  apply  them- 
selves at  the  handle  of  the  pry-pole. 

March. 

560.  The  gin  is  lifted  with  care,  and  placed  in  the 
desired  position. 

Wo  tower  the  gin, 

561.  The  gin  is  lowered  in  a  similar  manner  to  that 
prescribed  for  raising  it.  Nos.  5  and  6  raise  the  pry- 
pole  and  assist  in  easing  the  gin  to  the  ground,  the  out- 
side downwards. 


208  MECHANICAL    MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2- 


IiES!§OI¥     XXXVIII. 

Vo  MtouHt  a  Gun, 

Vo  di$tuouni  a  Gnn, 

Vo  numnt  a  MMmvitser, 

TTo  disnuntnt  a  JOLowitzer, 

Vo  sting  a  JfKortar  mounted  on  its  bed, 

Vo  sting  a  JfKortar  untttout  its  bed. 


562.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

5  Handspikes. 
1  Fall. 
1  Sling. 
1  Ijashing-line. 
1  Hammcr-M'rench. 

3  Pieces  of  plank,  with  a  small  hole  in  each 
to  receive  the  points  of  the  gin. 

Vo  mount  a  Chtn, 

It  is  immaterial  upon  which  side  of  the  piece  the 
legs  of  the  gin  are  placed,  but  for  uniformity  they  are 
generally  placed  on  the  right. 

563.  The  gin  being  placed  with  its  pullies  directly 
over  the  trunnions,  and  the  foot  of  the  pry -pole  thirteen 
feet  from  the  lower  brace,  the  instructor  commands : 

Mount  the  piece. 

No.  1  puts  a  handspike  in  the  bore.  No.  2  passes 
the  eye  or  loop  end  of  the  sling  around  the  knob  of  the 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    SIEGE    GIN.  $Q^ 

cascable;  no.  1  passes  the  other  end  under  the  hand- 
spike in  the  bore  and  hands  it  to  no.  2,  who  draws  it 
through  the  loop  and  fastens  it  either  by  a  knot  or  with 
the  lashing-rope.  The  gunner  hooks  the  single  pulley 
to  the  sling  just  in  rear  of  the  trunnions,  and  fastens 
the  loose  end  of  the  fall  to  the  sling  near  the  same 
place.  Nos.  1  and  2  then  go  to  their  places  at  the 
windlass.  The  gunner  applies  himself  to  the  handspike 
in  the  bore  to  steady  the  piece.  Nos.  7  and  8  pass  the 
running  end  of  the  fall  from  the  outside  under  the 
windlass,  and  take  three  turns  with  it  from  right  to  left 
around  the  left  of  the  windlass;  they  then  step  back 
three  paces  holding  on  by  the  running  end  or  slack. 
No.  7  being  nearest  the  windlass. 

Heave. 

564.  Nos.  1  and  2,  or  3  and  4,  according  to  the  po- 
sition of  the  windlass,  place  their  handspikes  in  the  upper 
mortices,  and  bear  down  until  the  ends  of  their  hand- 
spikes are  near  the  ground,  the  other  two  handspikes 
being  inserted  in  the  then  upper  mortices.  No.  1  gives 
the  command  Heave,  at  which  the  first  two  handspikes 
are  withdrawn  and  tossed  to  the  inside  of  the  gin,  the 
small  ends  resting  on  the  lower  brace  and  against  the 
legs.  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  bear  down  on  the  handspikes. 
Nos.  5  and  6  in  the  mean  time  put  the  disengaged  hand- 
spikes in  the  upper  mortices.  The  operation  is  thus 
continued  until  the  piece  is  raised  to  the  required 
height;  no.  1  always  giving  the  command  Heave,  and 
nos.  5  and  6  placing  the  disengaged  handspikes  in  the 
upper  mortices. 

Secure  the  windlass. 

565.  The  men  at  the  handspikes  secure  the  windlass 
by  allowing  the  handspikes  in  the  upper  mortices  to  bear 
against  the  middle  brace  and  legs. 


18* 


tilO  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

Run  up  the  carriage. 

566.  All  the  men,  except  nos.  7  and  8,  bring  up  the 
carriage  as  in  no.  369,  until  the  trunnion  holes  are 
directly  under  the  trunnions. 

Slack  off. 

567.  Nos.  7  and  8  slack  off  the  fall  slowly;  the  gun^ 
ner  steadies  the  piece  by  means  of  the  handspike 
in  the  bore;  and  the  piece  is  lowered  into  its  proper 
position.  Nos.  3  and  4  put  on  the  cap-squares,  and 
key  them. 

Remark.    ' 

568.  If,  from  any  circumstance,  it  is  not  convenient 
to  sling  the  piece  in  the  manner  prescribed,  it  may  be 
slung  with  a  short  piece  of  rope  passed  around  each 
trunnion,  and  the  ends  fastened  together  on  the  top  of 
the  piece;  or,  the  trunnion-rings  may  be  put  on. 

Hook  the  pulley  to  this  sling  or  to  the  trunnion-rings; 
bear  down  with  one  or  two  men  on  the  handspike  in 
the  bore  to  balance  the  piece,  and  when  it  is  raised 
sufficiently  high  run  the  carriage  under  it,  and  place  a 
piece  of  handspike  in  the  trunnion  holes,  and  a  block 
on  the  stock  (or  on  the  rear  transom  in  a  casemate  car- 
riage) to  receive  the  breech.  Lower  the  gun,  the 
trunnions  directly  over  the  trunnion  holes,  until  the 
lower  surface  of  the  gun  bears  on  the  piece  of  hand- 
spike. Remove  the  sling  from  the  trunnions,  and  run 
the  carriage,  with  the  gun  on  it,  back  until  the  head  of 
the  cheeks  are  in  rear  of  a  perpendicular  let  fall  from 
the  head  of  the  gin.  Pass  the  sling  around  the  chase; 
hook  the  pully  to  it;  and  work  the  gin  until  the  weight 
no  longer  bears  on  the  piece  of  handspike  in  the  trun- 
nion holes;  remove  this  piece,  and  lower  the  trunnions 
to  their  places;  bear  down  on  the  muzzle,  and  remove 
the  block  from  under  the  breech. 


I 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    SIEGE    GIN.  311 

To  dUimmtnt  a  €iun, 

569.  The  gin  is  placed  in  the  same  position  with 
reference  to  the  piece  as  prescribed  for  mounting  it. 

570.  The  instructor  commands: 

Dismount  the  piece. 

The  piece  is  slung,  the  cap-squares  taken  off,  and 
the  running  end  of  the  fall  passed  around  the  windlass, 
in  the  same  manner,  and  by  the  same  men,  as  pre- 
scribed for  mounting  it. 

The  commands  Heave,  Secure  the  windlass, 
Run  out  the  carriage,  and  Slack  off,  are  then 
given  and  executed  in  the  manner  already  prescribed. 

Remark. 

571.  If  the  ground  is  not  firm,  pieces  of  plank  pre- 
pared for  this  purpose,  must  be  placed  under  the  legs 
and  the  pry-pole  before  raising  the  piece. 

Vo  mount  a  BJmviiser, 
To  distnouni  a  Mowitser. 

A  howitzer  is  slung,  mounted,  and  dismounfed  in 
the  manner  already  prescribed  for  the  gun. 

Vo  sling  a  JfEorta§-  ntounied  on  it»  bed, 

572.  The  sling*  is  passed  under  the  front  notches, 
then  crossed  over  the  top  of  the  mortar  and  passed  un- 
der the  rear  notches.  The  single  pulley  is  hooked  to 
the  sling  where  it  crosses  the  top  of  the  mortar.  The 
mortar  is  raised  or  lowered  by  the  gin  in  the  manner 
prescribed  for  the  gun. 


*Made  of  4^  in.  white  rope,  24  feet  long,  with  the  ends  spliced 
together. 


S12  MECHANICAL   MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

Vo  sting  01  JfMortmr  without  its  bed, 

573.  The  sling  is  passed  around  the  trunnions. 

2V»  shift  ttte  rati. 

574.  As  the  turns  gain  once  the  diameter  of  the  fall 
at  each  revolution  of  the  windlass,  they  will,  when  the 
weight  has  been  raised  a  considerable  height,  come 
against  the  opposite  leg;  the  instructor  then  commands: 

Halt — Shift  the  fall. 

The  windlass  is  secured  as  in  no.  6Q6.  Nos.  7  and 
8  hold  on  to  the  slack.  The  numbers  at  the  handspikes 
on  the  side  towards  which  the  turns  on  the  windlass 
have  gained,  overhaul  a  sufficient  length  of  the  end  of 
the  fall  and  make  a  double  hitch  with  it  around  the  leg 
below  the  lower  crossbar,  passing  the  end  inside  of  the 
windlass  and  braces  to  the  chief  of  detachment,  who 
mounts  on  the  windlass,  and  makes  with  it  a  rolling 
hitch  on  the  standing  part  of  the  fall,  near  the  upper 
brace,  when  he  descends. 

Ease  away. 

575.  No.  7  slacks  off  until  the  weight  bears  on  the 
end  of  the  fall. 

Shift  the  fall. 

576.  Nos.  7  and  8  ease  the  slack.  The  men  at  the 
handspikes  shift  the  turns  on  the  windlass  to  its  oppo- 
site end.     Nos.  7  and  8  tighten  them  and  hold  on. 

The  men  work  at  the  windlass  until  the  weight  bears 
on  the  fall,  when  the  windlass  is  secured.  The  chief 
of  detachment  unties  the  rolling  hitch^  and  the  manoeu- 
vre is  resumed. 


ART.  4.]  WITH   THE   SIEGE   GIN.  213 

Remarks. 

577.  Six  men  (including  the  chief  of  detachment) 
are  sufficient  for  mounting  or  dismounting  any  siege 
piece  by  the  siege  gin;  but  for  the  purpose  of  instruc- 
tion, this  gin  being  more  easily  handled  than  the  case- 
mate and  garrison  gins,  the  same  number  of  men  have 
been  prescribed  as  are  necessary  for  them. 

In  this  case  nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  work  the  handspikes, 
no.  5  holds  on  to  the  running  end  of  the  fall;  and  the 
chief  of  detachment  steadies  the  piece. 


214  MECHANICAL  MANCEUVRES.  [PART   2. 


HARRISON    ANI>    CASEMATE    OINS. 


(Plate  XXXVI.) 


578.  The  garrison  and  casemate  gins  differ  from  the 
siege  gin  in  having  two  braces  of  iron  instead  of  the 
three  wooden  crossbars  or  braces,  and  in  having  the  pry- 
pole  inserted  between  the  legs,  which  are  kept  together 
by  the  clevis  bolt.  The  upper  pulley  (generally  treble) 
is  hooked  to  the  clevis. 

579.  The  gin  is  put  together  on  the  ground,  and 
raised  by  moving  up  the  legs  and  pry-pole  towards 
each  other.  The  pry-pole  has  cleats  nailed  to  it,  to 
enable  a  man  to  mount  to  the  head  of  the  gin  to  hook 
on  the  pulley  and  to  reeve  the  fall. 

580.  The  gin  is  lowered  by  gradully  drawing  out  the 
legs  and  pry-pole  until  the  men  can  get  near  enough 
towards  the  head  to  support  it;  it  is  then  lowered  upon 
the  piece  or  on  the  ground,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Ratchet  windlass. 

581.  A  ratchet  windlass  is  now  applied  to  gins, 
and  the  handspike  is  inserted  in  a  box  to  which  a  pawl 
is  attached.  This  pawl  catches  in  the  notches  of  the 
ratchet  when  the  handspike  is  borne  down,  and  slides 
over  them  as  it  is  raised.  Another  pawl  is  hung  from 
the  legs  which  catches  in  the  opposite  notches  of  the 
ratchet,  and  prevents  the  windlass  from  turning  back 
wards. 

As  the  handspikes  are  kept  in  such  a  position  that 
the  men  can  apply  themselves  with  advantage,  one 
man  is  enabled  with  this  windlass  to  raise  double  the 
weight  he  could  with  one  of  the  old  pattern. 


ART.   4.]  THE    GIN    AS    SHEARS.  215 


THE    USE    OF   THE    GIN   AS   SHEARS 


582.  By  removing  the  pry-pole  the  legs  of  the  gin 
may  be  used  as  shears. 

When  the  garrison  or  casemate  gin  is  to  be  thus 
used,  a  block  of  wood  of  the  same  dimensions  as  the 
head  of  the  pry-pole,  with  a  hole  in  it  large  enough  to 
receive  the  clevis  bolt,  must  be  inserted  in  place  of  the 
pry-pole. 

583.  The  detachment  is  composed  of  the  same  num- 
ber of  men  and  told  off  in  the  same  manner  as  in  no. 
238.     The  posts  of  the  men  are: 

Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  at  the  handspikes. 
Nos.  5  and  6  at  the  guys. 
Nos.  7  and  8  at  the  slack  of  the  fall. 
Nos.  9  and  10  at  the  counter  guy. 


216  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


MANCEUVRES    WITH    THE   GIN    AS   SHEARS 


iiS:ssoN   XXXIX. 


Vo  raite  a  piece  over  the  crest  of  a  parapet  or  edge  of  a  wait. 
To  tower  a  piece  over  the  crest  of  a  parapet  or   edge  of  a 

watt  into  the  ditch, 
Vo  raise  a  piece  and  pass  it  tlwrongh  a  casemate  etnhraxure 

or  any  simitar  opening. 
To  pass  a  piece  through  a  casentMle  euthrasure  or  any  sinti' 

tar  opening  and  tower  it  into  tt$e  ditch. 


584.  The  implements  necessary  are : 

5  Handspikes. 

1  Fall.    Or  more,  if  the  heig-ht  requires  it. 

1  Ti'iuuiion-sling.    Strong"  rope,  the  ends  knotted  or 

spliced  together. 
1  Double  prolonge.    For  the  counter  g-uy. 
3  Single  prolonged.    Two  for  gxiys  to  the  gin,  and  one 

for  steadying  the  gun. 
1  Trace-rope. 
9  Hi  ashing  lines. 
1  Single  pulley  and  fall.     Extra. 
3  mianls. 

6  Stakes.    5|  feet  long,  their  heads  banded  with  iron. 
1  Collar.    For  the  head  of  the  gin. 

Vo  raise  a  piece  over  the  crest  of  a  parapet  or  edge  of  a  watt, 

585.  The  lower  brace  is  removed.     A  piece  of  plank 
two  and  a-half  to  three   inches  thick,  with  holes  to 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    GIN    AS    SHEARS.  M^ 

receive  the  points,  is  placed  under  the  gin.  If  the 
ground  is  not  sufficiently  firm  this  may  be  placed  upon 
two  other  pieces  laid  perpendicularly  to  it,  and  under 
the  holes  made  to  receive  the  points. 

586.  The  gin  is  lying  on  the  ground,  its  outside 
downwards,  the  feet  towards  the  ditch,  and  the  head 
raised  on  a  block  placed  under  the  right  leg. 

The  implements  are  placed  two  yards  from  the  head 
of  the  gin,  the  handspikes  laid  parallel  to  the  braces. 

587.  The  instructor  commands: 

Equip  the  gin. 

The  chief  of  detachment  moves  five  paces  from  the 
head  of  the  gin  and  places  himself  in  the  prolongation 
of  its  axis,  when  he  marks  a  point  for  a  stake  at  four 
paces  to  the  right,  and  another  at  four  paces  to  the  left 
of  his  position.  No.  5  places  a  stake  at  the  first,  and 
no.  6  one  at  the  second  point.  Nos.  7  and  8  take  each 
a  maul  and  assist  nos.  5  and  6  to  drive  these  stakes, 
giving  them  a  considerable  inclination  from  the  gin; 
they  then  drive  two  others,  inclined  as  the  first,  two 
paces  beyond  them,  in  the  direction  the  guys  will  take 
when  the  gin  is  raised.  (In  practice  these  distances 
cannot  be  observed;  but  the  guys  should  be  given  as 
nearly  this  inclination  as  possible,  and  advantage  taken 
of  any  permanent  objects  to  attach  them  to.) 

No.  9,  directed  by  the  chief  of  detachment,  places 
himself  in  prolongation  of  the  axis  of  the  gin,  facing 
towards  it,  and  about  fifteen  paces  from  the  foot  of  the 
wall,  and  there  places  a  stake;  assisted  by  no.  10  he 
drives  this  stake,  inclining  it  from  the  gin,  and  then 
drives  a  second  stake,  inclined  as  the  first,  two  paces 
beyond  it. 

The  chief  of  detachment  and  nos.  1  and  2  reeve  the 

fall,  &c.,  as  prescribed  in  no.  551;  attach  the  single 

prolonges  to  the  collar,  and  pass  their  ends  to  nos.  5 

and  6,  who  stretch  them  in  the  direction  of  their  stakes; 

19 


218  MECHANICAL    MANffiUVRES.  [PART  2. 

attach  the  double  prolonge  to  the  opposite  side  of  the 
collar;  pass  the  end  (into  the  ditch)  to  nos/9  and  10; 
and  then  place  the  collar  on  the  head  of  the  gin  so  as 
to  allow  each  guy  to  take  its  proper  direction. 

Raise  the  gin. 

588.  The  chief  of  detachment  and  nos.  1,  2,  3,  4, 
7  and  8  raise  the  gin — nos.  5  and  6  slacking  up  their 
guys,  and  nos.  9  and  10  assisting,  by  hauling  oq  the 
counter  guy — and  place  it  about  two  paces  from  the 
crest.  Nos.  5  and  6  take  each  a  turn  of  his  guy  around 
the  first  stakes,  and  slack  or  tighten  it  as  directed  by 
the  chief  of  detachment. 

The  gin  being  raised  until  its  head  is  slightly  inclined 
towards  the  ditch,  the  guys  are  fastened  to  the  second 
stakes  by  a  double  hitch,  and  the  counter  guy  is 
attached  to  its  stakes  in  a  similar  manner. 

Sling  the  piece. 

589.  Nos.  9  and  10  pass  the  trunnion-sling  over  the 
trunnions.  Nos.  1  and  2  overhaul  the  fall,  and  lower 
the  pulley  into  the  ditch.  Nos.  9  and  10  pass  the  hook 
of  the  pulley  through  the  bight  of  the  sling,  and  attach 
a  single  prolonge  to  the  sling  to  serve  as  a  guy  to  guide 
or  steady  the  gun  while  being  raised. 

Raise  the  piece. 

This  is  done  as  prescribed  in  no.  563. 

590.  To  tighten  the  knots  and  stretch  the  ropes,  the 
instructor  will  cause  the  weight  to  be  partly  raised  and 
then  lowered;  and  without  altering  the  ropes  he  will 
have  the  feet  of  the  gin  moved  forward  to  within 
twenty-five  inches  of  the  crest  of  the  parapet  or  edge 
of  the  wall. 

591.  The  inclination  of  the  gin,  measured  from  the 
middle  of  the  line  joining  the  feet  to  a  perpendicular 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    GIN    AS    SHEARS.  21© 

let  fall  from  its  head,  should  not  exceed  twenty-five 
inches;  the  heavier  the  weight  the  greater  the  neces- 
:^ity  for  not  allowing  this  inclination  to  be  exceeded. 

592.  When  the  gin  is  placed  in  its  new  position, 
work  the  windlass  and  raise  the  piece;  nos.  5  and  6 
observing  their  stakes  and  giving  notice  if  any  thing 
becomes  deranged.  After  the  weight  bears  fairly  upon 
the  stakes,  nos.  5  and  6  may  be  employed  in  other  du- 
ties if  required. 

593.  When  the  trunnions  are  about  one  foot  above 
the  crest,  the  instructor  commands: 

fHALT — Bring  in  the  piece. 
The  men  cease  heaving  at  the  windlass,  and  secure 
it  by  letting  the  upper  handspikes  bear  on  the  legs. 
The  chief  of  detachment  mounts  on  the  second 
brace;  receives  from  no.  4  a  single  pulley,  which  he 
hooks  to  the  third  brace  near  the  left  leg,  the  point  of 
the  hook  turned  from  the  ditch;  doubles  (with  the  case- 
mate or  garrison  gin)  the  end  of  a  rope  which  he 
attaches  by  a  timber  hitch  to  the  left  leg  (when  the 
muzzle  is  turned  towards  the  left,  and  vice  versa)  as 
high  up  as  he  can  conveniently  reach  while  standing 
on  the  second  brace,  and  passes  the  hook  of  the  single 
pulley  through  the  bight;  and  receives  from  no.  2  the 
end  of  a  fall,  which  he  passes  through  the  pulley. 
No.  4  overhauls  the  end  of  the  fall  towards  the  ditch, 
and  attaches  it  to  the  neck  of  the  piece  by  a  timber 
hitch  on  the  top  of  the  gun. 

The  muzzle  is  supposed  to  be  towards  the  left  leg;  if 
it  is  reversed,  the  duties  here  prescribed  for  the  even 
numbers  will  then  be  performed  by  the  odd  numbers. 

The  chief  of  detachment  descends  and  takes  a  hand- 
spike. No.  3  attaches  a  lashing-rope  to  the  knob  of 
the  cascable  by  a  double  hitch,  and  passes  the  end  un- 
der the  windlass  between  the  legs.  Nos.  3  and  4  haul 
on  this  rope. 


■'  41 


220  MECHANICAL    MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2- 

Nos.  1  and  2  and  the  chief  of  detachment  with  their 
handspikes,  and  nos.  3  and  4  at  the  rope,  pass  the 
piece  between  the  legs  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to 
the  windlass,  assisted  in  this,  if  necessary,  by  nos.  5, 
6,  7  and  8;  in  which  case  the  slack  of  the  fall,  held  by 
nos.  7  and  8,  must  be  made  fast.  Nos.  5  and  6  lay 
planks  on  each  side  of  the  piece  at  a  suitable  distance 
to  receive  rollers.  The  chief  of  detachment  places  a 
roller  near  the  base-ring  and  chocks  it  on  both  sides. 
Nos.  1  and  2  haul  on  the  fall  attached  to  the  neck,  and 
raise  the  muzzle  a  little  higher  than  the  breech,  keep- 
ing it  tight,  and  then  take  three  turns  with  it  around 
the  windlass  and  hold  on  to  the  slack. 

Lower  the  piece — Ease  away. 

594.  Nos.  7  and  8  ease  the  slack  of  their  fall  until 
the  chase  is  lower  than  the  breech,  and  the  weight  is 
transferred  to  the  fall  attached  to  the  neck. 

Halt. 

595.  Nos.  3  and  4  unhook  the  pulley  at  the  trun- 
nions, and  hang  it  on  the  second  brace.  Nos.  5  and  6 
steady  the  piece  with  the  rope  at  the  cascable.  Nos. 
7  and  8  remove  the  fall  from  the  windlass,  and  then 
hold  on  by  the  slack  of  the  fall,  now  held  by  nos.  1 
and  2. 

Raise  the  piece. 

596.  The  chief  of  detachment  unchocks  the  roller 
with  a  handspike. 

The  windlass  is  worked,  and  the  chief  of  detach- 
ment, as  soon  as  he  can,  places  a  second  roller  in  front 
of  the  trunnions,  and  the  piece  is  rolled  back  on  the 
level  on  which  the  gin  stands. 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    GIN    AS    SHEARS.  221 

7Co  Unner  a  p^iece  over  the  crest  of  a  pa/rapet  or   edge   of  a 
wail  iuio  the  ditch, 

597.  The  piece  is  passed  under  the  windlass  of  the 
gin  on  the  rollers,  the  muzzle  towards  the  ditch,  and  is 
pushed  forward  until  the  trunnions  are  nearly  over  the 
crest,  when  the  gin  is  equipped,  and  the  piece  slung 
as  prescribed  in  no.  589. 

598.  The  windlass  is  worked,  and  when  the  trun- 
nions are  about  a  foot  above  the  crest,  the  instructor 
commands: 

Halt — Pass  the  piece. 

The  men  cease  heaving,  and  leave  the  handspikes  in 
the  upper  mortices  bearing  against  the  legs.  The  chief 
of  detachment  takes  a  handspike.  No.  3  attaches  a 
rope  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  passes  it  under  the 
windlass  between  the  legs,  and  carries  it  to  the  right  of 
the  gin.  Nos.  3  and  4  haul  on  this  rope.  The  chief 
of  detachment  and  nos.  1  and  2  with  their  handspikes, 
and  nos.  3  and  4  at  the  rope,  assisted,  if  necessary,  by 
the  spare  men,  pass  the  piece  between  the  legs  and 
place  it  parallel  to  the  windlass,  the  breech  to  the  right. 
No.  3  unties  the  rope  from  the  cascable;  fastens  a  pro- 
longe  to  the  trunnion-sling;  and  throws  the  end  to  the 
men  in  the  ditch. 

Lower  the  piece — Ease  away. 

599.  Nos.  7  and  8  slack  off  the  fall  slowly,  and  the 
piece  is  allowed  to  descend  into  the  ditch. 

STo  rmite  a  piece  a»td  pass  it  through  a  caseuuite  eutbraswre 
or  any  siiniiar  apeniug, 

600.  The  additional  implements  necessary  are : 

4  Handpikcs. )  j^  ^^^^  casemate. 
3  Rollers.  ) 

1  Gnu  sling.     (Or  a  piece  of  fall,  about  three  times  the  leng^th  of 
the  gxm.)     In  the  ditch. 

19» 


222  MECHANICAL  MANffiUVRES.  [PART  2. 

Besides  the  usual  detachment  for  working  the  gin, 
four  additional  men  are  required,  who,  with  the  chief 
of  detachment,  are  stationed  at  the  embrazure  to  re- 
ceive the  gun. 

601.  The  piece  is  in  the  ditch,  the  breech  to  the  wall. 
The  gin  is  equipped  as  before  on  the  edge  of  the 

parapet,  over  the  embrazure  through  which  the  piece 
is  to  pass. 

602.  The  men  in  the  ditch  attach  each  end  of  the 
sling  to  the  neck  by  a  timber  hitch,  the  bight  of  which, 
laid  on  top  of  the  gun,  should  reach  nearly  to  the  vent; 
the  hook  of  the  pulley,  attached  to  the  fall  of  the  gin,  is 
passed  into  this  bight;  the  middle  of  a  prolonge  is  made 
fast  to  the  cascable  by  a  double  hitch,  and  the  ends 
passed  over  the  sling  beyond  the  hook  of  the  pulley; 
these  ends  are  then  passed  under  the  reinforce,  brought 
up  on  top,  drawn  tight,  and  tied  in  a  right  knot. 

Several  turns  are  taken  around  the  piece  and  over 
the  sling  with  a  lashing-line  a  little  in  rear  of  the  trun- 
nions, and  the  ends  fastened  on  top  with  a  right  knot. 
(These  knots  may  be  made  with  a  bow,  or  a  tool  handle 
may  be  inserted  in  them,  so  that  they  can  be  easily 
untied.)  A  prolonge  is  fastened  around  the  trunnions 
to  serve  as  a  guy  to  steady  the  piece  while  raising  it. 

The  gin  is  worked  as  previously  prescribed,  and  the 
piece  raised  breech  foremost. 

603.  When  the  trunnions  are  as  high  as  the  sole  of 
the  embrazure,  the  instructor  commands: 

Halt — Bring  in  the  piece. 

The  chief  of  detachment  places  a  roller  on  the  sole 
to  receive  the  breech  of  the  piece,  chocks  it  towards 
the  ditch,  and  then  unties  the  knot  of  the  prolonge 
which  is  around  the  breech.  The  assistants  haul  on 
the  end  of  this  rope. 


I 


I 


art.  4.]  with  the  gin  as  shears.  223 

Raise  the  piece. 

604.  The  gin  is  worked  and  the  piece  raised;  the 
assistants  allowing  the  prolonge  to  slip  out  gradually. 
When  the  prolonge  no  longer  bears  on  the  sling,  the 
chief  of  detachment  uncrosses  its  ends  and  returns 
them  to  the  assistants,  who,  pulling  on  them,  draw  the 
piece  in  on  the  roller. 

The  chief  of  detachment  then  unties  the  lashing- 
rope.  The  assistants  receive  and  hold  on  the  ends, 
allowing  them  to  slip  out  gradually,  while  the  gin  is 
worked  and  the  piece  raised  and  drawn  in.  The  chief 
of  detachment  places  a  second  roller  under  the  piece. 
The  assistants  haul  on  the  lashing-rope,  and  the  piece 
is  brought  into  the  embrazure. 

Vo  past  a  piece  through  a  cageutate  embraxure  or  any  ainti' 
lar  t^ening  and  loiver  it  into  the  ditch. 

>    For  the  additional  implements  and  men  required  see 
no.  600. 

605.  The  chief  of  detachment  fastens  to  the  knob  of 
the  cascable  the  middle  of  a  prolonge,  intended  to  bind 
the  sling  to  the  piece  as  prescribed  in  no.  602;  attaches 
the  sling  to  the  neck  of  the  piece  as  prescribed  in  no. 
602,  the  bight  reaching  a  little  in  rear  of  the  trunnions, 
so  as  to  allow  the  muzzle  to  preponderate;  and  attaches 
to  the  cascable  another  rope  which  is  used  to  steady 
the  piece  when  running  it  out  of  the  embrazure. 

The  carriage  is  run  from  battery  and  chocked  firmly 
in  its  position.  The  assistants  take  a  turn  with  each 
end  of  the  prolonge  attached  to  the  cascable,  around 
the  rollers,  or  the  naves  of  the  wheels,  or  around  a  post, 
or  any  other  suitable  fixture. 

The  piece  is  moved  forward  on  rollers  by  handspikes, 
until  the  trunnions  are  near  the  edge  of  the  embrazure; 
the  hook  of  the  pulley  from  the  gin  is  then  passed  into 
the  bight  of  the  sling,  which  is  lashed  to  the  piece  as 
prescribed  in  no.  602. 


224  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

The  piece  being  steadied  with  the  rope  at  the  casca- 
ble,  is  pushed  forward  until  the  trunnions  are  over  the 
edge  of  the  embrazure  and  the  muzzle  inclines  down- 
wards. 

Raise  the  piece. 

606.  The  gin  is  worked  until  the  weight  bears  on  the 
fall,  when  the  instructor  commands : 

Halt. 

The  assistants  remove  their  rope  from  the  cascable, 
asten  it  around  the  trunnions,  and  throw  the  end  to 
he  men  in  the  ditch. 

Lower  the  piece — Ease  away. 

607.  The  piece  is  allowed  to  descend  gradually  into 
the  ditch,  where  the  men  place  two  blocks  to  receive 
it,  one  under  the  muzzle,  the  other  under  the  breech. 


ART.  4.]  THE   8LING    CART. 


TH£     $»I.  IIVCl     €A 


(  Plates  XXXVII  and  XXXVIII. ) 


608.  The  sling  cart  is  used  for  moving  pieces  of 
artillery  short  distances.  It  is  a  lever  on  wheels,  and 
may  be  used  simply  as  such. 

There  are  two  kinds:  one  for  the  heaviest  calibres, 
which,  being  limbered  with  a  siege  limber,  may  be 
drawn  by  horses;  and  the  other,  called  the  hand  sling 
cart,  designed  for  moving  siege  pieces  in  the  trenches. 

609.  The  siege  limber  may  also,  in  case  of  necessity, 
be  used  as  a  sling  cart. 

610.  The  detachment,  including  the  chief  of  detach- 
ment, is  composed  of  five  men,  except  for  slinging 
the  10-inch  columbiad,  which  requires  five  men  addi- 
tional. 


"  $ 


226  MECHANICAL   MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


MAN(EUVRES    WITH   THE    SLING    CART. 


Vo  »Hng  a  Siege  ChiUf  MMbwiiserf  or  JftoritJtr, 
Vo  tower  a  Siege  Cruu,  MMmritserf  or  Jftoriar  to  the  ground, 
Vo  sling  a  Sea^oaat  MIowitser  or  Columbiad, 
Vo  sling  a  lO-inch  Cotumhiad, 
Vo  sting  a  Siege  J}Iortar  tnounted  on  its  bed, 
Vo  sling  a  Sea^coast  ifKortar, 

Vo  transport  a  siege  piece  sitort  distances  by  a  limber, 
Vo  raise  a  piece  upon  one  or  more  blochs  by  a  liutber, 
Vo  sling  apiece  on  two  iiutbers  so  that  it  may   be   traus" 
ported  with  horses. 


611.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

3  Blocks. 

4  lYheel  chocks. 

1  Sling-chain.     Of  36  links,  with  a  short  hook  at  each  end. 
1  Two  and  one-half  inch  rope.    45  feet  long*. 
1  Sling-chain.    Additional,  for  a  siege  mortar  mounted  on 
its  bed. 

Vo  sling  a  Siege  Gun,  MMowitser,  or  JfKortar, 

612.  The  instructor  commands: 

Back  the  cart  over  the  piece. 

Nos.  1  and  2  go  to  the  end  of  the  pole.  Nos.  3  and 
4  and  the  chief  of  detachment  apply  themselves  at 
the  wheels.  The  cart  is  then  backed  over  the  piece, 
the  pole  being  in  the  direction  of  the  breech,  and  the 


p 


ART.   4.]  WITH    THE    SLING   CART.  227 

axle  directly  over  the  trunnions.     Nos.  3  and  4  chock 
the  wheels. 

Sung  the  piece. 

613.  No.  1  fastens  the  middle  of  the  prolonge  to  the 
end  of  the  pole.  Nos.  3  and  4  carry  one  end  of  the 
prolonge  to  the  rear  of  the  cart.  Nos.  1  and  2  raise 
the  pole  by  hand,  nos.  3  and  4  at  the  same  time  apply- 
ing themselves  at  the  prolonge. 

When  the  pole  thus  raised  is  nearly  vertical,  nos.  1 
and  2  seize  the  other  end  of  the  prolonge  to  steady  the 
pole.  The  chief  of  detachment  lays  the  middle  of  the 
sling-chain  over  the  piece  in  rear  of  the  trunnions,  car- 
ries each  end  around  the  trunnions  from  the  rear  to  the 
front,  and  hooks  them  around  the  axle  hooks,  being 
careful  to  take  up  all  the  slack.  Nos.  1  and  2,  assisted, 
if  necessary,  by  nos.  3  and  4,  haul  upon  the  prolonge 
until  the  end  of  the  pole  can  be  reached  by  hand,  when 
they  seize  and  bear  it  to  the  ground.  The  chief  of 
detachment  hooks  the  cascable  chain  around  the  knob 
of  the  cascable  in  such  a  manner  that  the  piece  will 
swing  level  when  the  pole  is  horizontal.  Nos.  1  and 
2  raise  the  pole  until  it  rests  on  the  pole-prop. 

The  piece  is  thus  raised  about  eight,  inches  from  the 
ground. 

614.  For  transportation  it  should  ordinarily  be  raised 
higher;  which  can  readily  be  done  by  blocking  up  the 
piece  and  raising  it  again  in  the  manner  above  pre- 
scribed. 

Vo  Uneer  a  Siege  €htu,  MIotHtser,  or  Jflortar  io  the  gramttd, 

615.  The  piece  is  lowered  to  the  ground  by  the  same 
means,  but  in  an  inverse  manner  to  that  just  prescribed. 

Nos.  1  and  2  bear  the  end  of  the  pole  to  the  ground. 
The  chief  of  detachment  unhooks  the  cascable  chain. 
Nos.  1  and  2  allow  the  pole  to  rise  gently  until  it  is 
nearly  vertical.     If  the  piece  does  not  then  rest  upon 


228  MECHANICAL    MAN(EUVRES.  [PART  2. 

the  ground,  it  is  blocked  up  and  unslung;  when,  by 
repeating  the  manoeuvre,  it  may  be  lowered  to  the 
ground. 

After  the  piece  has  been  unslung,  nos.  3  and  4  ease 
the  pole  down  carefully  by  means  of  the  prolonge  until 
nos.  1  and  2  can  reach  it  with  their  hands;  the  latter 
then  assist  them  in  easing  it  down. 

Vo  sling  a  Sea^oast  MEowiiser  or  ColumMad» 
TCo  sling  a  lO-inch  Colutubiad, 

Executed  as  prescribed  for  a  siege  piece  in  no.  612 
and  following. 

Vo  sling  a  Siege  tWortar  mounted  on  its  bed* 

The  instructor  gives  the  same  commands,  and  the 
duties  are  performed  by  the  same  numbers,  as  prescribed 
for  a  siege  piece  in  no.  612  and  following. 

616.  The  sling  cart  is  backed  over  the  morter,  the 
pole  being  in  the  direction  of  the  breech,  and  the  axle 
directly  over  the  trunnions. 

If  the  bed  is  resting  on  the  ground,  it  may  be  slung 
by  first  raising  the  pole  nearly  vertical,  passing  the 
sling-chain  around  the  front  manoeuvring  bolts,  hooking 
it  over  the  axle  hooks,  and  hauling  upon  the  prolonge. 

It  is  then  blocked  up,  and  the  sling  taken  off  the 
bolts  and  passed  under  the  bed  just  in  front  of  the  cap- 
square  bolts;  this  brings  the  sling  a  little  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  mortar  and  bed. 

The  pole  being  now  horizontal,  nos.  1  and  2  bear 
down  upon  it  until  the  end  rests  upon  the  ground. 
Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  blocks.  The  chief  of  detach- 
ment passes  the  other  sling  chain  around  the  rear  ma- 
noeuvring bolts  and  over  the  pole,  and  then  hooks  it  in 
such  a  manner  that  the  bed  will  be  level  when  nos.  1 
and  2  raise  the  pole  until  it  rests  on  the  pole-prop.  - 

The  bed  is  thus  raised  about  eight  inches  from  the 
ground. 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    SLING   CART.  229 

If  necessary  it  may  be  blocked  up,  and  raised  higher 
by  a  similar  mancBUvre. 

617.  The  breech  should  always  slightly  preponderate 
in  order  to  prevent  the  pole  from  flying  up. 

618.  Sea-coast  mortars  and  their  beds  must  be  slung 
separately. 

619.  The  mortar  is  raised  by  passing  the  sling-chain 
through  the  clevis,  over  the  axle,  and  hooking  it  around 
the  pole  at  its  junction  with  the  axle,  the  pole  having 
been  previously  raised  for  this  purpose. 

The  bed  is  raised  and  slung  in  a  similar  manner  to 
that  already  prescribed  for  the  siege  mortar  on  its  bed. 

2*0  irtin$port  a  riege  piece  short  Mstmneet  by  a  liMtber, 

620.  The  piece  is  raised  upon  two  blocks,  one  under 
the  breech,  the  other  under  the  muzzle,  when  a  chain 
is  passed  around  the  piece  just  in  front  of  the  reinforce, 
or  about  six  inches  in  front  of  the  trunnions. 

The  limber,  its  pole  being  in  the  direction  of  the 
breech,  is  run  over  the  piece  until  the  pintle  is  over 
the  chain,  when  the  pole  is  slightly  raised,  and  the 
chain  passed  over  the  pintle  and  fastened.  The  pole 
is  borne  to  the  ground,  the  front  block  removed,  and  a 
rope  fastened  over  the  pole  and  around  the  knob  of  the 
cascable.  The  pole  is  then  raised  and  the  rear  block 
removed. 

621.  If  the  chain  is  passed  around  the  piece  any 
nearer  to  the  trunnions  than  prescribed,  the  pole  will 
have  too  great  a  tendency  to  fly  up. 

f'-        Vo  raise  a  piece  upon  one  or  more  block*  by  a  litnber, 

622.  The  trunnion-loops,  or  an  ordinary  chain,  is 
passed  over  the  knob  of  the  cascable  and  over  the  pin- 

20 


230  MECHANICAL   MANOEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

tie,  and  made  fast  while  the  pole  is  raised.  The  piece  is 
then  raised  by  bearing  down  the  pole. 

623.  The  wheels  should  not  be  chocked,  as  they  will 
soon  find  their  proper  bearing. 

Vo  gting  a  piece  on  two  limtberg  ao  that  it  utm/   be  trans* 
ported  with  horgea. 

624.  The  pole  of  one  of  the  limbers  is  removed;  a 
block  is  placed  under  the  trunnions;  and  the  limber 
run  forward  with  its  fork  over  the  piece,  the  pintle 
over  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

The  muzzle  is  raised  and  the  front  block  removed. 
The  muzzle  is  borne  down  and  the  pintle  fastened  to 
the  knob  of  the  cascable  with  the  chain  or  lashing-rope. 
The  fork  is  borne  down  to  the  piece  and  lashed  to  it 
around  the  reinforce. 

The  other  limber  is  backed  over  the  neck  of  the 
piece;  when  the  pole  is  raised  and  the  neck  attached 
to  the  limber  by  taking  two  turns  with  a  prolonge 
around  the  pintle,  and  two  turns  over  the  fork  in  front 
of  the  axletree,  so  that  the  weight  will  balance  the 
pole;  the  end  of  the  prolonge  being  fastened  with  a 
jamming  hitch.  The  piece  is  then  raised  by  bearing 
down  the  pole. 


ART.  4.]  THE   CASEMATE   TRUCK.  23^1 


THE     CASEiriATC:     TRUCK. 


(  Plate  XXXVIII. ) 


625.  This  machine  is  intended  for  moving  sea-coast 
pieces  and  their  carriages  in  the  galleries  of  casemate 
batteries. 

626.  The  detachment  is  composed  of  the  same  num- 
ber of  men,  and  told  off  in  the  same  manner,  as  pre- 
scribed in  no.  238. 


233  MECHANICAL   MANGEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


MANOEUVRES    WITH    THE   CASEMATE   TRUCK. 


Vo  piaee  a  casemate  chassis  on  the  truck. 

Vo  tower  the  chassis  to  tite  grownd, 

Vo  rentore  tite  chassis  from  the  casemate, 

Vo  place  a  gun  carriage  on  the  truch. 

To  Mower  the  gun  carriage  to  the  grouttd, 

Vo  shift  the  gun  carriage  from,  tite  truch  to  its  chassis. 

Vo  shift  the  gun  carriage  from  its  chassis  to  the  truch. 


627.  The  implements  necessary  are : 

1  liong  roller. 

2  Blocks. 

S  Half  blocks. 
4  Bricoles. 

Vo  plaee  a  casemate  chassis  on  the  trttck, 

628.  The  chassis  is  on  the  ground;  the  truck  near 
it  with  its  front  wheel  and  tongue  removed. 

629.  Two  handspikes  are  passed  across  and  under 
the  front  part  of  the  tongue  of  the  chassis.  Eight 
men,  two  at  each  end  of  each  handspike,  raise  the  end  of 
the  chassis.  Nos.  9  and  10  and  the  chief  of  detach- 
ment run  the  truck  under  the  chassis  near  the  men, 
and  turn  it  so  that  its  axis  may  be  in  the  same  vertical 
plane  with  that  of  the  chassis,  the  end  of  the  truck 


ART.  4.]  WITH   THE    CASEMATE    TRUCK.  233 

from  which  the  wheel  has  been  removed  being  on  the 
ground  towards  the  rear  of  the  chassis. 

630.  The  men  at  the  handspikes  lift,  and  the  truck 
is  run  to  the  rear,  until  the  centre  of  the  wheels  are 
four  and  one-half  to  five  feet  from  the  centre  of  the 
rear  transom,  and  the  chassis  is  balanced  on  the  truck. 
Nos.  1  and  2  support  and  direct  the  front  of  the  chas- 
sis, and  the  gunner  and  nos.  9  and  10  its  rear.  Nos. 
3,  4,  7  and  8  take  bricoles  and  hook  into  the  rings. 
Nos.  5  and  6  carry  a  handspike  on  each  side  opposite 
to  the  wheels,  to  work  at  the  bolts  when  it  is  necessary 
to  overcome  any  obstacle. 

All  move  the  chassis  to  its  embrazure,  the  tongue 
near  the  tongue  hole. 

Vo  tower  the  chas»is  to  the  grou*ul, 

631.  Two  blocks  are  placed  lengthwise  under  each 
rail,  and  a  half  block  crosswise  on  the  top  of  them, 
near  the  middle  of  the  chassis  and  near  the  truck. 
The  rear  of  the  chassis  is  raised.  Nos.  1  and  2  bear 
down  on  the  front  of  the  tongue.  The  gunner  and  nos. 
8  and  9  take  out  the  truck,  and  lower  the  chassis  on 
the  blocks. 

632.  The  men  move  to  the  front  of  the  chassis  and 
raise  it.  Nos.  9  and  10  remove  the  blocks.  The  gun- 
ner places  a  long  roller  under  the  front  transom.  If 
the  pavement  is  uneven  the  long  roller  should  be  placed 
on  two  boards. 

633.  The  men  move  to  the  rear  of  the  chassis.  Nos. 
1  and  2  embar  with  their  handspikes  under  the  rear 
transom  to  raise  the  rear  traverse  wheels  from  the 
pavement.  All  push  the  chassis  forward.  The  gun- 
ner sees  that  the  tongue  goes  fairly  into  its  opening. 

634.  If  the  roller  runs  out  before  the  chassis  is 
placed,  the  gunner  calls  the  handspike  men  to  the  front 

20* 


234  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 

transom,  raises  it,  and  replaces  the  roller.     When  the 
traverse  wheels  are  on  their  circle  he  puts  in  the  pintle. 

970  retnoi}e  the  chassis  front  the  casemate, 

635.  The  pintle  is  taken  out.  With  two  handspikes 
passed  under  the  front  transom,  the  front  of  the  chassis 
is  raised,  and  the  long  roller  placed  under  the  rails. 
The  rear  of  the  chassis  is  raised;  the  tongue  run  out 
of  the  tongue  hole;  and  the  chassis  placed  upon  the 
truck  as  prescribed  in  no.  629  and  following. 

Remark. 

636.  To  prevent  injury  to  the  pavement  planks 
should  be  laid  under  the  wheels  of  the  truck. 

Vo  pMace  a  gun  carriage  on  the  trttck, 

637.  The  gun  carriage  is  on  the  ground  standing  on 
the  head  of  its  cheeks;  the  truck  near  it  with  its  front 
wheel  and  tongue  removed. 

638.  The  truck  is  run  up,  the  end  on  the  ground  un- 
der the  guides,  and  its  wheels  chocked;  the  trail  of  the 
carriage  is  lowered  upon  it.  The  trail  is  borne  down 
and  the  head  of  the  carriage  raised  sufficiently  high  for 
the  gunner  and  assistants  to  replace  the  truck  wheels 
and  tongue.  Nos.  1  and  2  apply  themselves  at  the 
tongue.  The  others  apply  themselves  as  prescribed  in 
no.  630.  The  carriage  is  then  moved  on  the  truck  to 
its  place. 

Vo  lower  the  gun  carriage  to  ttte  ground, 

639.  The  front  wheel  of  the  truck  is  removed,  and 
its  front  transom  rested  on  the  ground.  The  carriage 
is  then  raised  on  the  head  of  its  cheeks. 

Vo  shift  ttte  gun  carriage  from  the  trttck  to  its  chassis, 

640.  The  front  of  the  truck  is  placed  at  right  angles, 
or  nearly  so,  to  the  chassis,  and  as  near  to  the  front 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    CASEMATE    TRUCK.  235 

transom  as  possible.  The  front  wheel  is  removed,  and 
the  front  transom  of  the  truck  rested  on  the  rail  of  the 
chassis,  when  the  wheels  are  chocked. 

The  carriage  is  turned  up  on  the  head  of  its  cheeks, 
as  near  the  front  transom  of  the  chassis  as  it  can  be 
placed,  and  slewed  until  its  axis  is  in  a  line  with  that 
of  the  chassis.     The  trail  is  then  lowered  to  its  place. 

2V>  shift  the  gun  carriage  front,  its  chassis  to  tite  truck, 

641.  The  gun  carriage  is  turned  up  on  the  head  of 
its  cheeks,  and  slewed  so  as  to  have  the  guides  turned 
towards  the  truck,  which  is  placed  as  prescribed  in  no. 
640.  The  trail  is  then  lowered  upon  the  truck;  the 
wheel  replaced;  and  the  carriage  moved  off. 


236  MECHANICAL   MANGEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


I^ESSON     Xlill. 

Vo  pJUKe  a  Iteary  Gun  on  the  trtick, 

Vo  remove  a  heavy  Cfun  front  the  truth,  and  place  it  on  ttvo 

blocks* 
Vo  place  a  heavy  Gttn  on  the  truch  by  a  gin. 


642.  The  implements  necessary  are: 

1  ILiifting  jack. 
S  Half  rollers. 

8  Blocks. 

4  Half  blocks. 
4  Cr un  chocks. 
4  IVheel  chocks. 

9  ISkids. 

Vo  place  a  hea/vy  €run  on  the  truck, 

643.  The  gun  is  on  two  blocks. 

644.  The  skids  are  laid  as  prescribed  in  no.  516; 
then  by  means  of  handspikes,  or  the  lifting  jack,  the 
gun  is  raised  on  a  half  roller  under  the  trunnions;  the 
half  roller  resting  on  one  block  on  each  skid.  The 
muzzle  is  borne  down  and  two  blocks  placed  on  the 
ground  lengthwise  side  by  side,  their  middle  under  the 
base-ring,  and  two  others  crosswise  upon  them;  thus 
forming  a  scaffold  of  three  blocks  high  for  the  base-ring 
to  rest  on. 

The  muzzle  is  raised  with  the  lifting  jack;  the  truck, 
with  the  wheel  and  tongue  out,  passed  under  the  gun; 
the  front  of  the  truck  (which  now  rests  on  the  ground) 


ART.  4.]  WITH    THE    CASEMATE    TRUCK.  237 

under  the  breech,  the  trunnions  of  the  gun  nearly  over 
the  middle  transom,  and  between  it  and  the  wheels  of 
the  truck.  The  wheels  are  then  chocked;  the  gun 
lowered  upon  the  truck;  and  the  jack  removed. 

The  muzzle  is  borne  down — the  gun  pressing  on  the 
rear  transom  of  the  truck  will  raise  the  front  part  under 
the  breech — the  wheel  and  tongue  inserted,  and  the 
gun  moved  to  its  place. 

Vo  remove  a  heavy  Gun  from  the  iruek  and  place  it  ou 
two  blocks* 

645.  The  muzzle  is  borne  down  and  the  truck  wheel 
and  tongue  removed.  The  blocks  are  placed  under  the 
breech  as  for  mounting;  the  muzzle  raised  with  the 
jack;  and  the  truck  removed.  The  skids,  blocks,  and 
half  roller  are  placed,  and  the  piece  lowered  on  two 
blocks.     (See  no.  644.) 

646.  In  mounting  guns  in  a  casemate  gallery,  the 
carriage  farthest  from  the  door  of  entrance  is  to  be 
placed  first,  and  its  gun  put  in  position,  before  the  next 
gun  and  carriage  is  brought  in. 

ZV  place  a  heavy  €h§n  oh  the  truck  by  m  g4»$, 

647.  The  gun  is  raised  by  means  of  the  gin,  and  the 
truck  run  under  it.  The  gun  is  then  lowered  to  its  place; 
the  trunnions  just  over  the  front  of  the  middle  transom. 


338  MECHANICAL   MANCEUVRES.  [PART  2. 


liESSON      Xlilll 


Vo  tnouHt  a  Chut, 
Vo  distnount  a  Gutt, 


648.  The  implements  necessary  are  the  same  as  pre- 
scribed in  no.  627,  with  the  addition  of  a  casemate  gin. 

Vo  ntount  a,  Chtn 

649.  The  carriage  is  traversed  to  one  side;  and  the 
gun — on  blocks,  or  on  the  truck  cart — is  near  the  mid- 
dle of  the  casemate,  the  muzzle  towards  the  embra- 
zure.  The  gin  is  over  the  gun  and  carriage;  the  latter 
on  the  side  of  the  pry-pole. 

650.  The  gun  is  slung  in  the  usual  manner.  The 
gin  is  worked  until  the  gun  is  raised  sufficiently  high, 
when  the  chassis  is  traversed  under  it,  and  the  gun  car- 
riage so  placed  that  the  trunnion  holes  come  exactly 
under  the  trunnions.  The  gun  is  then  lowered  to  its 
place,  the  sling  removed,  and  the  gin  carried  to  the 
next  casemate. 

651.  To  prevent  the  pavement  from  being  injured 
by  the  points,  a  truck  wheel,  or  a  piece  of  three-inch 
plank  with  holes  to  receive  them,  is  placed  under  each 
foot. 

Vo  distnottni  a  Gun, 

Executed  in  the  inverse  manner  to  that  prescribed 
for  mounting  in  no.  649.  The  gun  is  placed  on  the 
truck,  or  on  blocks. 


ART.  4.]  "WITH    THE    CASEMATE    TRUCK.  239 


liESSON     Xl.1V. 

To  remwoe  or  to  greage  the  trttek  tvheeig  when  the  gum  is 
tnoHUtetf, 


.  652.  The  implements  necessary  are : 

1  manaenrring  handspike.     Sieg-e. 
1  TFheel  chock.     Sieg-e. 

653.  The  gun  carriage  is  run  from  battery.  Nos.  3 
and  4  remove  the  linch  pins.  Nos.  1  and  2  place  the 
chock  on  the  rail  close  to  the  front  of  the  axletree,  and 
embar  with  the  handspike,  on  the  chock  as  a  fulcrum, 
under  the  understrap  of  the  side  of  the  carriage  to  be 
raised. 

Nos.  3  and  4  remove  the  truck  wheel.  The  gunner 
greases  it  as  well  as  the  spindle.  Nos.  3  and  4  replace 
the  wheel. 

Remarks. 

654.  The  traverse  wheels  cannot  be  greased  when 
the  gun  is  mounted. 

655.  When  necessary,  the  piece  should  be  dis- 
mounted, the  gun  carriage  removed,  and  the  chassis 
withdrawn  and  turned  over;  the  caps  of  the  journal- 
boxes  taken  off,  and  the  axles  greased  and  replaced. 

65Q.  The  truck  and  traverse  wheels  should  be  greased 
before  mounting  with  hog's  lard,  or  a  mixture  of  fish- 
oil  and  tallow. 


240  MECHANICAL   MAN(EUVRES.  [PART  2. 

657.  Carriages  that  have  been  standing  some  time 
should  be  greased  before  being  used. 

658.  A  wrench  should  be  provided  for  each  battery, 
and  the  nuts  always  tightened  before  the  carriage  is 
used. 


PART    III. 

MISCELLANEOUS 

ARTICLE    I 


TO  EMBARK  AND  DISEMBARK  ARTILLERY  AND  ORD- 
NANCE STORES. 

659.  When  artillery  and  its  stores  are  to  be  shipped 
for  an  expedition,  prepare  first  a  list  of  all  the  articles, 
stating  their  number,  individual  weight,  and  the  total 
weight  of  each  kind. 

660.  In  estimating  the  weights,  allow  double  for  that 
of  bulky  articles  which  occupy  much  space  without 
weighing  much. 

661.  Divide  the  total  quantity  to  be  transported 
among  the  vessels,  and  make  statements  in  duplicate 
of  the  articles  on  board  each  vessel,  one  of  which  lists 
should  go  with  the  vessel,  and  the  other  remain  with 
the  officer  shipping  the  stores. 

662.  The  articles  must  be  divided  among  the  vessels 
according  to  the  circumstances  of  the  case;  but  as  a 
general  rule  place  in  each  vessel  every  thing  necessary 
for  the  service  required  at  the  moment  of  disembarka- 

21 

'■■  ^ 


242  MISCELLANEOUS.  [PART  3. 

tion,  so  that  there  will  be  no  inconvenience  should  other 
vessels  be  delayed. 

663.  If  a  siege  is  to  be  undertaken,  place  in  each 
vessel  with  each  piece  of  artillery  its  implements,  am- 
munition, and  the  carriages  necessary  to  transport  the 
whole  or  a  part;  the  platforms,  tools,  instruments,  and 
materials  for  constructing  batteries;  skids,  rollers, 
scantling,  and  plank. 

664.  If  a  particular  calibre  of  gun  is  necessary  for 
any  operation,  do  not  place  all  of  one  kind  in  one 
vessel,  to  avoid  being  entirely  deprived  of  them  by  an 
accident  to  it. 

665.  Dismount  the  carriages,  wagons,  and  limbers  by 
taking  off  the  wheels  and  boxes,  and,  if  absolutely 
necessary,  the  axletrees.  Place  in  the  boxes  the  linch- 
pins, washers,  &c.,  with  the  tools  required  for  putting 
the  carriage  together  again.  Number  each  carriage, 
and  mark  each  detached  article  with  the  number  of  the 
carriage  to  which  it  belongs. 

666.  The  fixed  ammunition  must  be  carefully  packed 
in  its  prescribed  boxes.  The  cartridge  bags,  fuzes  for 
shells,  and  their  ammunition,  either  in  substantial 
boxes  with  rope  handles,  or  in  barrels.  Powder  in  bar- 
rels, in  a  magazine  constructed  in  a  vessel  to  hold  it. 

667.  Sponges,  rammers,  worms,  and  ladles  should 
be  united  in  bundles.  Other  implements,  intrenching 
tools,  levels,  rules,  &c.,  in  bundles  or  boxes.  Imple- 
ments in  bundles  and  boxes  of  complete  sets,  as  far  as 
practicable. 

668.  Small  arms  should  be  in  their  prescribed  boxes. 

669.  The  contents  of  each  box,  barrel,  or  bundle 
should  be  marked  distinctly  upon  it.     The  boxes  should 


ART.    1.]  EMBARKING  ARTILLERY,  ETC.  243 

be  made  small  for  the  convenience  of  handling,  and 
have  rope  handles  to  lift  them  by. 

670.  The  position  of  the  different  articles  in  each 
vessel  should  be  noted  in  a  column  in  the  list  on  board. 

671.  Place  the  heaviest  articles  below,  beginning 
with  the  shot  and  shells  (empty),  then  the  guns,  plat- 
forms, carriages,  wagons,  limbers,  ammunition  boxes, 
&c.  Boxes  of  small  arms  and  ammunition  in  the  dry- 
est  and  least  exposed  part  of  the  vessel.  The  skids, 
scantling,  and  boards  may  be  in  the  more  exposed 
parts,  or  in  the  run. 

Articles  required  to  be  disembarked  first  should  be 
put  in  last,  or  so  placed  that  they  can  be  readily  got  at. 

If  the  disembarkation  is  to  be  performed  in  front  of 
the  enemy,  some  of  the  field  pieces  should  be  so  placed 
that  they  can  be  disembarked  immediately,  with  their 
carriages,  implements,  and  ammunition;  also  the  tools 
and  materials  for  throwing  up  temporary  intrenchments 
on  landing. 

672.  When  there  are  several  vessels  laden  with 
artillery  and  stores  for  an  expedition,  each  vessel  should 
have  on  each  quarter,  and  on  a  signal  at  mast-head,  a 
number  that  can  be  easily  distinguished  at  a  distance. 
The  same  number  should  be  entered  on  a  list  of  sup- 
plies shipped  in  each  vessel.  The  commander  can 
then  know  exactly  what  resources  he  has  with  him. 
Some  vessels,  distinguished  by  a  particular  signal, 
should  be  laden  solely  with  such  powder  and  ammuni- 
tion as  may  not  be  required  for  the  immediate  service 
of  the  pieces. 

673.  If  it  is  necessary  to  reship,  or  leave  any  arti- 
cles on  board  the  vessels,  care  should  be  taken  to  note 
them  on  the  list. 

674.  Boats  of  proper  capacity  must  be  provided  for 


244  MISCELLANEOUS.  [PART  3. 

the  disembarkation,  according  to  the  circumstances  in 
each  case. 

675.  It  may  be  necessary  to  establish  temporary 
wharves  on  tressels,  and  to  erect  shears,  cranes,  or 
derricks. 

676.  On  a  smooth  sandy  beach,  heavy  pieces,  &c., 
may  be  landed  by  rolling  them  overboard  as  soon  as 
the  boats  ground,  and  hauling  them  up  with  sling  carts. 


ART.  2]  TABLES.      .  245 


ARTICLE    II. 

TABLES  OF  DIMENSIONS  AND  WEIGHTS  OF  GUNS,  CAR- 
RIAGES, SHOT,  SHELLS,  MACHINES,  AND  IMPLEMENTS; 
OF  CHARGES  FOR  SHELLS;  OF  RANGES  FOR  HEAVY 
ORDNANCE,  &c. 


21- 


MISCELLANEOUS.  [PART  3. 

677.     Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  Guns. 


CM  0        00                    CO        w                      CM        OS 

00 

.S5=H-*W               t-OlOOO        -^OOtOlrtCD 

050 

(M 

g     •     •     •     •                •     •     •  CO           

iO(M 

• 

1-H 

►^T^        C0(M00«»00OO     -^  <M  t- -<*<  ^  ^  CO 

0  (M  0  i-H              00    rf<i-l.-l              to 

CO 

1 

r-<          — 1  i-<                 i-H  rH 

UO  uo 

1, 

CO        CO         lOt-CO         ^           UO               lOlrt 

CO  0 

00 

.eOr-J       10        (M  oc)  as  to  0  "5  t^  00  CO  t- 00 

h^irj    'oiO'^eooJcorH^cooJ  «oirt  ■^  t- 

05^  CM 

TS 

rH 

A 

OCJ^<M                 rHo     Tj^.^r-H                 CO 

■^ 

S 

1 

,_<          r-li-l                 1-1  i-l 

C^-*        CO                    0?        ^                      CM        C?> 

01/0 

i 

.oOi-H      xn          i>  t^      0      "^      00      0 

05CM 

(» 

t^irj    '  00  06 -*  3;  d  i-^  T-( "  CO  ^  00 10  liO  oti 

c-  (M 

cd 

OrH-HCMr-l          rHo-^CMr-t                 CO 

W5 

IX 

rH          r-(^                 1-H  rH 

iO          00 

oco 

.■^rHCOt-        CMCM  t-               (M">!l<t'-^        to 

oco 

•Tl 

g 

(M  ■^ 

4J 

CO 

**;C0        t-CO-<*irti-lt^(M        (MCMOCOCOQO 

03 

Or-d-KMi-l        f-H        -^C^C^J               CO 

t- 

8 

, 

1 

1 

<M 

4fHt^              CMrr          jCM-*              UOCO 

S5 

rj5 

•*-(  l>     'oui  t^OlCM  06  i«        OOTl5cMJ>COO 

<£ 

"i 

1-H,-^^OJ^          -H         '«<(M(M                 t- 

1— t          »— (  rH                  f— ( 

1 

a 

' 

JJ 

1 

........        .-2               .13 

c* 

•    • 

1 

....1. ....!....{ 

i^ 

•   • 

•  face 

emu 
metei 

0  rea 
tofa( 

'     •     •  m2     '       -SS-*"-          ..02 

«w)     ^^^      ^2          § 

bore 

re   . 

re  in  diame 
of  base-rir 
the  piece 
the  base-rii 
the  swell  0 
these  semi 
sight      . 
r  of  base-ri 
lase-ring 
the  rimbas 
runnions 
nnions    . 
is  of  trunni 

•    • 

'   • 

leter  of  the 
windage 
th  of  the  bo 
th  of  the  bo 
th  from  rear 
le  length  of 
•diameter  of 
•diameter  of 
nee  between 
ral  angle  of 
nee  from  rea 
eter  of  the  b 
nee  between 
eter  of  the  t 
th  of  the  tru 
nee  from  axi 

•1 

g«bCbJDW)0.i.A_gsrfg^gW3^ 

ART.  2.] 


TABLES. 


247 


678.  Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  Columbiads 
and  Howitzers. 


CO  a>  rj<  Tj<  ©1  05  CO  lO  i-I  tX  T)<  CO  <N  CO  T)H  lO      _? 


1        "? "-;  <?i  "^  o        •        °°. 

lO  CO  U3        (M  i-H  1-^  (M 


(NCO 


iO      osaiaoCTOcocoot^oi-iG^ii-taioco    ,^ 

-^         OJ  r-<<N(M  rH^^O     Tf  coco         ^  t-      ^ 


.11 


o  o 


3 


^ a  .3 


N 


ho 


ai 


33 


.5 


^ 


*.-Q 


-SbflOC^ 


^«  „•>  «  o  g  o  °  2  g 


32  2"S 


si 

§.2  43 

S   H  o 

§g.S 
^  ©  eS 

OS'S   « 


;  3  C  fl  S  C  fl^  S  S^S 


V  c  2  13  «  fl5  «  d 


fcUDg 


248  MISCELLANEOUS.  [PART  3. 

679.  Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  Mortars, 


Diameter  of  the  bore     ..... 

True  windage 

Length  of  the  bore,  exclusive  of  the 

chamber 

Length  of  the  bore,  exclusive  of  the 

chamber,  in  diameters     .... 
Superior  diameter  of  the  chamber  (at 

the  bottom  of  the  shell)        .     .     . 
Inferior  diameter  of  the  chamber 

Length  of  the  chamber 

Whole  length  of  the  mortar  .  .  . 
Distance  from  face  of  muzzle  to  front 

of  trunnions 

Distance  between  the  rimbases  .  . 
Length  of  the  trunnions  .... 
Diameter  of  the  trunnions  .... 

Weight 


Heavy. 


13-in.    10-in 


In. 

13 
.13 

26 

2 

9.5 
7.25 

13 

53 

41 
36 

8.5 
12 

Lbs. 
11,500 


In. 

10 
.13 

25 

2.5 

7.15 
5.64 

10 

46 

37 
27.5 

6.5 

9 

Us. 
5,775 


Light. 


lO-in.    8-in 


In. 

10 
.13 

15 

1.5 

7.6 

5 

5 

28 

20 

20.5 
5 

8 

Lbs. 
1,852 


In 

8 
.12 

12 

1.5 

6.08 
4 
4 
22.5 

16.5 
16.25 

4 

6 

Lbs. 
930 


680. 


Dimensions  and  weights  of  shot. 


13-in. 

12-in. 

10-in. 

8-in. 

42 

32 

24 

18 

12 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

in. 

In. 

Diameter    . 

12.87 

11.87 

9.87 

7.88 

6.84 

6.25 

5.68 

5.17 

4.52 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Weight      . 

294 

231 

128 

65 

42.7 

32.6 

24.4!l8.5 

12.3 

ART.  2.] 


TABLES. 


240^ 


681. 


Dimensions  and  weights  of  shells. 


i 

<n 

, 

<M        •^tOifi        -^ 

• 

■^ 

(M 

JS 

to  t^  t^  (X)  O  05  l^ 

^ 

1— I 

•Tj*                              .-1 

'^ 

£ 

r^      ■^;o  vO       OJ 

■^ 

0) 

00 

s 

r-<  0»  OJ  CB  CO  Oi  «0 

J? 

t— 1 

Ift                            .-H 

^ 

T-l 

1 

00 

'  ffi 

;^ 

^ 

00        lO  lO  W5        OS 

«0  OJ  05  00  «0  05  «o 

a 

1               TS 

o              1-t 

i            e 

§ 

00 

(7<        O  OlCOOi  to 

• 

Ift 

S 

o 

^ 

^ 

3 

il 

•^      myn          m 

. 

c« 

JS 

00<MQ»r-iQO        I- 

3 

•— t 

rf 

•^ 

«0  i-H  <-(  .-H -^  rH 

CO 

tars. 

i 

^ 

1 

^ 

^ 

.s 

^ 

ty                           ITS  I— 1 

00  «D  t- iC  CO  t- »0 

J? 

o 

!    1 

1—1 

•-• 

a>  ^  .-H  r-H  ,-H  tH  .^  ?0 

•-5 

SB 

C5 

a 

. 

f        lO  O              00 

• 

t~ 

i-H 

^ 

00  ^  CSf  OS  ^  00 '■«' 

a 

2 

c*  d  ©j -H  C^  r-t  .-1  r- 

.,_, 

on 

§8o2§^^S? 

-o  «   2 

^ 

J!^ 

•l?s 

ob 

•^ 

t,-H^„C^pH,-HUO 

»^ 

S 

um 
sea 
wit 

c 

i^                   \n 

1— 1 

§|« 

6 

»^ 

00          rHOJ         ^ 

OS  Ol(?j  ^  CO  I-H -^  «o 

a 

o 

<a        «  o  *-  -, 

•  „iJ-  0-S.2  £ 

.     §2§-«SS3g 

.HOJ|H^  § 

'"^-t       o-^l 

§3  S       S£  fei« 

Diamet 

Thickn 

sides 

botto 

Thickn 

Diamet 

fuze 

Distanc 

-f 

^ 

250  MISCELLANEOUS.  [PART    3. 

682.  Dimensions  and  weights  of  spherical  case  shot, 

18 


Diameter 

Thickness  of  C  True    .     .    . 

metal  at     <  Greatest    .     . 

the  sides.  ( Least  .  .  . 
Thickness  of  metal  at  fuze 

hole 

Radius  of  reinforce  at  fuze 

hole 

Diameter  of  (  Exterior     .    . 

fuze  hole.  /  Interior      .    . 


Mean  weight 


8-in. 

42 

32 

24 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

7.88 
.7 

.725 
.675 

6.84 
.65 
.675 
.625 

6.25 
.60 
.625 
.575 

5.68 
.55 
.575 
.525 

1.6 

1.5 

1.5 

1.1 

3 
1.2 

.96 

2.75 
1.2 
.975 

2.5 
1.2 
.975 

2.3 
.9 
.735 

Lhs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

30 

20.32 

16 

11.86 

In. 

5.17 
.5 
.525 

.475 

1.1 

2.1 

.9 
.735 

Lbs. 

8.7 


The  thickness  of  metal  at  the  fuze  hole  is  supposed  to     / 
be  measured  in  the  axis  of  the  fuze  hole  between  the 
spherical  surfaces  of  the  shell  and  the  reinforce.     The 
fuze  holes  of  shells  and  spherical  case  shot  taper  .  15 
in.  to  one  inch. 


683. 

Weights  of  carcasses. 

-     . 

13-in. 

10-in. 

8-in. 

42 

32 

24 

18 

12 

Mean  weight    .    . 

Us. 
194 

Lbs. 
86 

Lbs. 
43 

Lbs. 
30 

Lbs. 
21.60 

Lbs. 
16 

Lbs. 
12.5 

Lbs. 
8 

Carcasses  are  shells  having  three  additional  holes  of 
the  same  dimensions  as  the  ifuze  hole,  pierced  at  equal 
distances  apart  in  the  upper  hemisphere  of  the  shell, 
with  their  exterior  openings  touching  the  great  circle 
which  is  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  fuze  hole. 


ART.  2.]  TABLES.  iJ5l 

684.       Dimensions  and  weights  of  grape  shot. 


8-in. 

42 

32 

24 

18 

12 

Diameter  of  large  gauge, 
Diameter  of  small  gauge, 

Mean  weight  .... 

In. 

3.60 
3.54 

U>s. 
6.1 

In. 

3.17 
3.13 

Us. 
4.2 

In. 

2.90 
2.86 

Us. 
3.15 

In. 

2.64 
2.60 

Us. 
2.4 

In. 

2.40 
2.36 

Us. 

1.8 

In. 

2.06 
2.02 

L&s. 
1.14 

685.      Dimensions  and  weights  of  canister  shot. 


c 

ts 

24-pdr.  and 
8-inch  Siege 
Howitzer. 

i 

12-pdr.  and 
32-pdr. 
Howitzer. 

In. 

/n. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

Diameter  of  large  gauge, 
Diameter  of  small  gauge, 

2.26 
2.22 

2.06 
2.02 

1.87 
1.84 

1.70 
1.67 

1.49 
1.46 

Us. 

Us. 

Us. 

Us. 

Us. 

Mean  weight    .... 

1.5 

1.14 

.86 

.64 

.43 

686.       DimemMons  and  weights  of  grenades. 

Six-pounder  spherical  case  shot  may  be  used  for 
hand  grenades,  and  shells  of  any  calibre  for  rampart 
grenades. 


252  MISCELLANEOUS.  [PART  3. 

687.         Dimensions  and  weights  of  canisters. 


Height  of  finished  canis- 
ter  

Number  of  tiers  of  shot  . 

Number  of  shot  in  each  of 
the  three  lower  tiers 

Number  of  shot  in  fourth 
tier 

Whole  number  of  shot    . 


Weight  of  finished  canis- 
ter      


Siege  and  garrison 
Guns. 


42 


In. 

8.7 
4 


6 
27 

Lbs. 

48 


32  i  24 


In.  i  In. 

8.17.35 
4       4 


6       6 
27  I  27 

Lbs.  Lhs. 

37     29 


18     12 


In.  In. 

6.8  6 

4  4 

7 


6 
27 

Lbs. 

23 


6 
27 

Lbs. 

15 


8-inch 
Howitzers. 


Siege. 


In. 

12.03 
4 

12 

12 

48 

Lbs. 
53.5 


Sea- 
coast. 


In. 

12.35 
4 

12 

12 

48 

Lbs. 
54.5 


688.  Dimensions  and  weights  of  a  stand  of  grape. 


8-in. 

42 

32 

24 

18 

12 

Height  of  stand  between  the 
outsides  of  the  plates    .     . 

Weight  of  stand  complete    . 

In. 

9.85 

Lbs. 
74.5 

In. 

8.75 

Lbs. 
51.25 

In. 

8.2 

Lbs. 
39.75 

In. 

7.5 

Lbs. 
30.61 

In. 

6.8 

Lbs. 
22.15 

In. 

5.8 

Lbs. 
14.84 

A  stand  of  grape  consists  of  nine  shot,  put  together 
by  means  of  two  cast  iron  plates,  two  rings,  and  one 
nin  and  nut. 


pin  and  nut. 


ART.  2.] 


TABLES. 


•253 


689.  Principal  dimensions  of  siege  gun  carriages  and 
limbers. 


Height  of  axis  of  trunnions  above  the  ground , 

r  Above  the  hori-  (  Gun     .     . 

Vertical  field  1      zontal  line  .     .  \  Howitzer, 

of  fire,        j  Below  the  hori-  \  Gun     .     . 

1^     zontal  line  .     .  {  Howitzer, 

Distance  between  the  points  of  contact  of  the 

wheels  and  trail  with  the  ground  line  .  . 
Distance  from  the  front  of  the  wheels  to  the 

end  of  the  trail ,  the  piece  being  in  battery  . 
Distance  of  the  muzzle  fGun,  in    front  of 

of  the  piece  in  battery  j      wheels    .      •     . 

from  the  front  of  the  j  Howitzer,  in  rear 

wheels,  1^     of  wheels     .     . 

Length  of  gun  carriage,  without  wheels  .  . 
Length  of  limber,  without  wheels  .  .  . 
Length  of  limber,  without  wheels  or  pole  . 
Length  of  limber,  with  wheels  and  pole  .  . 
Length  of  the  carriage,  limbered  up    .     .     . 

Whole  length  of  the  axletree 

Track  of  the  wheels 

Height  of  the  wheels 

Disk  of  finished  wheel 


In. 

52.2 
13° 


100 
141 
30.74 


130 
176.65 

59.8 
184.9 
278.9 

81.8 

60 

60 
2 


S 


S3 
.00  .-a 

-^^^ 

4§tU 


In. 

52.6 
12° 


101 
142 
35.35 


133 
176.65 

59.8 
184.9 
280.9 

81.8 

60 

60 
2 


In. 

53 
12° 
15° 

4° 
10° 

101 

142 

35.34 

7.66 
133.6 
176.65 

59.8 
184.9 
280.9 

81.8 

60 

60 
2 


22 


254 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


[part  3. 


690.  Principal  weights  of  siege  gun  carriages  and 
limbers. 


Gun  carriage,  without  wheels 

Limber,  without  wheels 

One  wheel 

Gun  carriage  complete,  without  implements. 

Limber  complete 

Gun  carriage  and  limber  without  implements. 


C5 


Lhs. 

1,440 
585 
404 
2,248 
1,393 
3,641 


00 


Lbs. 

1,542 
585 
404 
2,350 
1,393 
3,743 


SO.- 
rt'O    o 


Lbs. 

1,714 
585 
404 
2,522 
1,393 
3,915 


691.       Dimensions  and  weights  of  mortar  beds. 


Length 

Exterior  width,  including   manoeu- 
vring bolts 


Weight 


Siege. 


8-in.     10-in. 


In. 
42 


34 


Lbs. 
920 


In. 

51.8 

40 

Lbs. 
1,830 


In. 
31 

15 

Lbs. 
132 


> 
o 
a. 


In. 
22 

22 

Us. 
280 


ART.  2.] 


TABLES. 


t55 


692. 


Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  barbette 
carriages. 


t-          lo  '-I      CO  o 

.    ■^          o  c-  trscofo 

• 

«O00  t^t-OOTf 

•an£)  -Jpd-g^ 

^  ^^^^|^|S  ' 

3 

•jazjiMOH 

.     t^              ^^SoM^iO 

caooi--i-coo 

qoui-8   puB 
uary  -jpd-sg 

"•  ^^""'gg^ISS? 

a 

■^OOii-I^CO 

oToT 

>o          oao      cooi 

.    •*           t^eo  lOco  (M 

• 

in  CO  tT' t^  Oi -^ 

•uno  upd-f-g 

^  ?ih°^gss^^s  * 

a 

cooaii-iuo^ 
i-<co          oico 

.»  v> 

I— (  fH 

to              to      cfivn 

a 

lO  00  r^  t^  «o  Tjt 

•un£)  -jpd-gt 

■^  pi^^SS^aS  * 

Sg^-^ggJ 

1—4          1— 1 

<"^  1-H 

.     t^              lOO  krt  00 

in  00 1- 1- CO -rj* 

•uno  Mpd-sx 

-H       1— 1 

^ 

COOOif-HCOOJ 

1-Hco          toe* 

•  • 

.  .  .  ^  .  . 

03      • 

•  •  .  s  •  • 

1 

1      • 

ette 

tils 
wh( 

•^ 

aj    . 

g  .ss  .  . 

g 

2 

—     <«  §3 

e 

? 

O        Frt    03 

g 

S                   Cl           03  t^           03 

•| 

the 
ine 
ne 
to  re 

ront 
treo 
n    . 
»witz 

1 

CO 

1 

in  battery  above 
the  horizontal  li 
the  horizontal  li 
front  of  wheels 

tre  of  pintle  to  fi 
re  of  pin  tie  to  cen 
tre  of  pin-  (  Gu 
in  battery,  \  He 

m 

H 

s 

i 

> 

3 

c 

'a, 

a 

5 

runnions  i 
S  Above 
■'  i  Below 
iage  from 
e  chassis 

from  ceni 
from  cent] 

from  cen 
the  piece. 

1 

and  fork 
tern) 

ete,  witho 
athout  pii 

of  axis  of  ti 
,1  field  of  fire 

of  gun  carri 
length  of  th 
ntal  distance 
ntal  distance 
ntal  distance 

the  face  of  i 

ti  carriage  ro 
n  carriage  w 
verse  wheel 
Jtle  (new  pat 
rriage  compl 
» complete,  v 

•"      Oj303OOOO 

5  3  sJ.ii  al.S 

Lengt 
Whol 
Horiz 
Horiz 
Horiz 
tlet 

1 

O 

^i3 
<o 

S 

P 

1 

S3 

5 

i 

256 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


[part  3. 


693.  Principal  dimensions  and  weights  of  casemate 
carnages. 


t 
•I" 

3 

•a 


^ 


•jazjT 

g       •    •     •    • 

5 

S^S 

-MOH'Jpd^S 

^    ^            ^gg^^ 

coco 

irt              O  lOtO 

•peiq 

.      «3                CJr-Hr-4 

• 

C»  CO  O  OS  O  0< '*  00 

^  ^^^sg^i 

a 

(Mc^ooseoojt-io 

-uin[o5  'UT-g 

-i<^  CO                      O  QO 
1-H       (N                   T-ICI 

in          u?s  lo  ;o 

.CO            "^^"^ 

• 

o  cc  lO  cr>  o  {?« «o  eo 

•un£)  'jpd-s^ 

►^    oa)%ijr^cncoir5 

3 

(M  Ot  I- OS  CO  05  <X)  CO 
i-H  (N  U5                     '^'^ 

O              <X»Q0-^g5 

r-?       of                    ^Ci 

O           lO  »oo 

.  oj      '^'-:'^ 

• 

•<**cooa500}ooo 

tOOiC0O5C0O5i~l00 
Od  "^                 uo«> 

•un£)  -jpd-gf? 

t^    oi  &  ^  t-^  en  "^  "5 

a 

«50O^g. 

1-H         Ci                       rHoT 

.      t-              CO  1-H 

. 

OOCOOOiO(?*'«*00 

•uno  -jpd-^g 

>^     0005  rf  t^OTOO 

a 

OCMCNOTCOOSiOlr- 

^              O^QO^gJ 

ci            .-Tcf 

circli 

I  roll 
fork 

ssis 

«  •  --ss  -^ 

aver 

oft] 
tong 

of'c 

" 

is               jh   rtj        "13 

. .  .||  .§ 

W     03     Oi     _      J-             U 

above 
tal  lim 
tal  lin 
seks  tc 
hesfo 
s   .     . 
to  rea 

'   G   G   «^   O  r=   <u 

tc 

2 

attery, 
horizo 
horizo 
It  of  ch 
ng  3  in 
e  of  ra 
if  pintl 

CO 

2 

O 

C5 

jn 

Q 

sight  of  axis  of  trunnions,  in  b 

rUeal  field  of  fire,  ft.'-Ct 
ngth  of  gun  carriage  from  fron 
hole  length  of  chassis  (includi 
idth  of  chassis  between  outside 
>rizontal  distance  from  centre  c 

1 

ruck  whee 
wheel     . 
rse  wheels 

"a! 

11 

rG     O 

m  carriage  without  t 
e  gun  carriage  truck 
assis,  without  travel 
e  rear  traverse  whee 
e  front  traverse  whei 
e  nintle  .     .     . 

|i.2 

s  t£  ^S^ffi 

s 

o 

c 
O 

-G 

u 

o 

C 

O 

O 

bI 

1 

ART.  2.]  TABLES. 

694.  Weight  of  lifting  jack. 


267 


Lifting  jack      ...... 

Lifting  block  for  lifting  jack    . 


m 

, 

0) 

•5 

^ 

^ 

H 

In. 

In. 

In. 

. 

. 

. 

12 

5.5 

3.5 

L&s. 
160 
4.5 


695.         Dimensions  and  weights  of  gins. 


DIMEMSIOKS. 


^ 

j3 

c 

o 

(^ 

O 

Jtl. 

In. 

175.5 

256.5 

Lbs. 

Lbs. 

55 

224 

455 

823 

37 

. 

, 

65 

• 

84 

Length  of  legs 


Of  pry-pole  . 

Of  gin  without  blocks 


Of  pulley  blocks,  <  Double 
f  Treble 


C  Single 
hi 


In. 
172.5 

Lbs. 

175 
642 

65 

84 


22* 


258  MISCELLANEOUS.  [PART  3. 

696.    Dimensions  and  weight  of  the  sling  cart. 


DIMENSIONS. 


Large. 


Hand. 


Length  from  rear  of  wheels  to  front  end  of  pole 

Length  of  axletree 

Height  of  wheels 

Distance  between  the  wheels  on  the  ground    . 

WEIGHTS. 

One  wheel 

Whole  weight  (without  sling  chains)     .     .     . 

Trunnion-chain  and  rings 

Sling-chain 


In. 

242.4 
92 
96 

58.75 

Us. 

701 

2,282 

23 

84 


In. 

160.75 
75.50 
72 
60.4 

Us. 
1,115 


697.    Dimensions  and  weight  of  the  mortar  wagon. 


DIMEKSIONS. 


Length 

Whole  length  when  limbered  up 

WEIGHTS. 

Carriage  body  without  wheels 

One  wheel 

Limber  without  wheels 

Carriage  and  limber  complete  (without  implements) 


Inches. 


143.6 

287.85 

Us. 

984 

404 

585 

3,185 


ART.  2.]  TABLES.  259 

698.    Lengths  and  weights  of  finished  implements. 


•SP 


•uuo^ 


•8IPB7 


j;^  t^  t^  t'  t-  «> 


o;  r-  I— <  ^'      00 

I[3  «»5  CO  OJ  O  l^ 


j-JQUIUIB-JI 


•oSuodg 


•  ift     in     \n 

»S  t^  -^  1— (     CO 

■^^  05  00  00  00  t^ 


00  05  t~ 


;3  o o ci 00  t^ (M •-<    *oo    *o 


t^       0<       00 

C0OC0(M 


i 


•q^Suaq 


.  OOOOOOOOOOOOOOQOOOOOOOCOO        COO-^J'-'tOO 
J»  CM  CM  OKM  OJ  «  C^  CM  rH  CM  CI  o  00        IT)  00  ""sf  CO  f-l 


s  • 


p    3    3    03    (U    « 

too  &n  tJ)  ^""^  '>JD  S 

c  c  c  o  o  £ 

O    O    O    Q_  Q_  03 

S     0     b     lU     (h 

a  3  ?2   c3   «s 
Si)  be  t>X)  bfl  iiC 

«  S  =  c  c 
§  §  §  §  § 

O    O    03    O    0) 

«    i  bx  be  fcuo 


!Li    tM    ^    ;^    L, 
13  "O  "TS  ID  "TS 

CuC.  a.  CO. 


J3 

«  s 

ft-      »H 

^^  ^ 

<D    03    2 

bi)  bjog 

o  o  c 

Q.Q.  «5 


«  o 


O  J3 

c  o 


I" 

»  Oj::-r  o 


13 -Co  00 

03     "U  —-_£-■  -C 

.1^  u  CO  ;z;  (3 


lob   ob^s: 


699. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 

Weights  of  implements. 


[part  3. 


Trail-handspike     .     . 
Manoeuvring-handspike 
Long  imanoeuvring-hand 

spike    ... 
Truck-handspike 
Roller-handspike 
Pass-box       .     . 
Budge-barrel 
Gunner's  havresack 
Pointing-wire     . 
Gunner's  gimlet 
Vent-punch  .     . 
Fingerstall    .     . 
Breech-sight 
Vent-cover    .     . 
Lanyard  (for  friction 

mers)  .  .  . 
Fuze-setter  .  . 
Fuze-mallet  .  . 
Fu2:e-saw  .  . 
Fuze-rasp  .  . 
Fuze-auger  .  . 
Fuze-gimlet  .  . 
Shell-plug  screw 
Fuze-plug  reamer 
Fuze  extractor  . 
Gunner's  pincers 
Gunner's  callipers 
Gunner's  quadrant  (wood) 


prr 


Lbs. 


7.25 
8.25 


5 

86 
.08 
.08 
.08 
.003 
.65 
.45 


.1 
2.66 
2.75 

.75 

.75 

.3 

.1 

.31 

.3 
3.53 

.85 

.5 

.84 


Lbs. 


Gunner*s  level  .  . 

Maul    .     .     .     .  . 
Gluoin    (for    siege 

tars)      .     .     .  . 

Chock      .     .    .  . 

Plummet  .     .     .  , 

Scraper    .     .     .  . 
Gunner's  sleeve 

Basket      .     .     .  . 


Tarpaulin.,  Il'-gf    ;    ; 

Mortar tompions,  \  in'-"' 

Broom  (corn)    .     .     .     . 

Shell-hooks 

Funnel 


10 

7 

1.4 
1 

2.3 
.25 
4 
54 
9 
5 
7 
1 
2 


Powder  measures 


'1  1 


Tar  bucket    .     . 
Watering    bucket 

ther)  . 
Shovel  . 
Pickaxe  . 
Felling  axe 
Handbill  . 
Drag-rope 
Men's  harness 


oz. 

oz. 
,  .lb. 
[3  lbs. 


(lea- 


25 


.32 

.3 

.5 

.75 
1.6 

7 

8 

4.75 

6.5 

6 

2 

16.5 
23 


ART.  2.]  TABLES. 

700.  Dimensions  of  cartridge  bags. 


m 


M 
^ 


s 

1 

•ui-8 

^ 

CO           '  ^<^ 

ico 

en 

(4 

CS 

in      00 

05       ^, 

H 

W 

•"I-OT 

^ 

t^           '  ODi-* 

3  2 

O 

i-H  I— 1 

a 

CM 

. 

•aSaig  -ui-g 

4 

>*        OJrt-CS 

a- 

, 

OD 

2 

, 

Oi        tfi 

• 

< 

•qoui-8 

^ 

CO        'oc* 

a  s 

i 

<M^ 

s 

M 

t= 

U5        CO 

• 

e 

•qoui-OT 

4 

t^            *^^ 

as 

u 

CM  1-1 

(M                irj 

« 

•jpd-gi 

4 

I— 1 

3  « 

»A 

. 

CO        t- 

oj      "^ 

•jpd-8T 

■s 

f— 1 

3^ 

ifi 

•jpd-^5 

4 

ifi        i-HOOOJ 

a» 

CO 

. 

l«     ^     in 

• 

' 

•jpd-gg 

^ 

t— (  l-H 

;3  00 

00 

Oi 

«  »« 

•jpd-s^ 

4 

CO           *00i-H 

So 

1-H  1—1 

•    Vi       •       •       • 

o 

'^    .    .    . 

•  ^  •  •  • 

* 

O 

•    CL    •     •     * 

* 

.   ,         *»  'C 

&■%  •«.-= 

1 

a|  .5  8, 

a 

»f  cart 
one  p 
ridge 
gth  of 
cartri( 

o 

"<^  r  a^ 

n? 

meter 
gtho 
a  cai 
olele 
gtho 

^ 

CJ 

13 

5   C   Cj:5   C 

3 

3^-^^ 

s 

s 

CO 


c« 


03 

n3 


O 


262  MISCELLANEOUS. 

701.  Manner  of  strapping  shells. 


[part  3. 


Sabots  for  shells  for  heavy  guns,  howitzers,  and 
columbiads  are  made  of  plank. 

The  shells  are  placed  in  the  sabot,  and  the  straps  put 
on  in  such  a  manner  that  the  fuze  hole  may  fall  in  one 
of  the  angles  between  two  straps,  and  that  the  axis  of 
the  fuze  hole  may  stand  at  an  angle  of  about  45°  with 
that  of  the  sabot.  The  eyes  of  the  shell  should  not  be 
covered  by  the  straps.  The  straps  are  fastened  at  each 
end  with  two  nails  in  the  side,  and  two  in  the  bottom 
of  the  sabot.  In  loading  the  piece  care  must  be  taken 
to  place  the  fuze  hole  in  the  upper  part  of  the  bore. 


702. 


Charges  for  shells  for  Mortars. 


CHARGE. 

13-in. 

10-in. 

8-in. 

To  fill  the  shell 

lhs.  oz. 

11    0 

6  0 
0    6 

7  0 

0    8 

U)s.  oz. 

5    0 

2  0 
0    5 

3  0 

0    6 

Lbs.  oz. 

2      9 
1      0 

0  4 

1  12 

0      6 

To  burst  the  shell 

To  blow  out  the  fuze 

•n J-          (Of  cannon  powder     .     . 

servfce     MO^i»^^"^^^^y  "^^'^^  ^^ 
service,        ^     other  composition  .     . 

ART.  2.] 


TABLES. 


263 


703.  .Charges  for  shells  for  Columbiads  and  heavy 
Guns, 


COLUMBIADS. 

GUNS. 

10-iD. 

S-in. 

42 

32 

24 

18 

12 

Lbs.oz. 

Lbs.oz. 

L6s.  oz. 

Lbs.oz. 

L6s.  oz. 

Lbs.  oz. 

Lbs.oz. 

To  fill  the  shell, 

3    4 

1  12 

1    8 

1    5 

1    0 

0  11 

0    8 

To    burst    the 

shell    .     .     . 

1    6 

1    0 

0  12 

0  11 

0    8 

0    7 

0    5 

To  blow  out  the 

fuze  plug     . 

0  10 

0    8 

0    6 

0    2 

0    2 

0    U 

0     1 

For     ordinary 

service     .     . 

3    0 

1    8 

1    4 

1    0 

0  12 

0  10 

0    7 

The  fuzes  for  these  shells  are  made  with  paper  cases, 
and  are  inserted  at  the  time  of  loading  the  piece.  The 
fuze  plugs  are  made  of  wood,  or  of  brass,  driven  or 
screwed  into  the  fuze  hole;  they  are  covered  with  a 
cap  of  peculiar  construction  which  contains  the  priming 
of  the  fuze.  The  size  of  the  plug  is  indicated  by  that 
of  the  fuze  hole  in  the  shell.  The  bursting  charge  is 
poured  into  the  shell  through  the  hole  in  the  fuze  plug. 


704. 


The  number  of  balls  in  a  pile. 


In  the  following  table  of  the  number  of  balls  in  a 
pile,  the  second  line  shows  the  number  in  a  triangular 
pile,  the  base  of  which  is  the  corresponding  number  in 
the  first  line.  The  other  numbers  show  the  contents 
of  square  and  oblong  piles;  the  length  and  width  of  the 


264 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


[part  3. 


base  being  in  the  upper  line  and  in  the  left  hand  column 
respectively. 


a 

'^ 

o 

OJ 

l-H 

^ 

^ 

8 

S 

§ 

-H 

1 

1 

5 

OS 

I-H 

s 

CO 

1— ( 

00 

—  - — -                                CO 

g 
t- 

o 

Oi 
I-H 

1 

U5 

i 

i 

CO 

i-H 

o 

560 
1015 

l-H 

s 

1 

in 

CO 

o 
in 

i 

t 

CO 

1—t 

in 

lO 

05 
00 

o 

Si 

^H 

1 

g 

i 

CO 

1 

?3 

Ci 

'■£> 
CO 

o 

i 

CO 

88 

as 

o 

1 

00 

i 

(M 

1 

1-H 

1 

i 

i 

o 

CO 

i 

03 

l-H 

1 

o 

i 

1 

^ 

•«1< 

in 

C3^ 

i 

in 

8 

o 

CO 
CO 

in 

ir- 

o 

i 

i 

i 

o> 

I— t 

i-O 

1 

IT- 
CO 

s 

T 

lO 
CO 

o 
In 

in 

i 

in 

CO 

i 

g 

i 

00 

§ 

^1^ 

l-H 
CO 

00 

s 

■^ 

s 

■^ 

1 

i 

S 

i 

i 

t^ 

00 

s 

1 

s 

i 

i 

1 

00 

CO 
CO 
CO 

CO 

1 

1 

00 

CO 

1 

<o 

^ 

OS 

(M 

2 

g 

s 

l-H 

00 

§5 

i 

1 

o 

CO 

i 

CO 
CO 

1 

in 

lO 

CO 

IS 

o 

^ 

1 

Jh 

s 

1— 1 

in 

o 

Oi 

o 

^ 

i 

i 

i 

Si 

«5 
(M 

•^ 

§ 

^ 

o 

g 

§ 

^ 

§ 

o 

05 

1 

o 
— ^ 

l-H 

§ 

l-H 

f-H 

l-H 

s 

l-H 

1 

1 

o 

03 

CO 

o 
I— 1 

•er 

g 

CO 
CM 

?5 

^ 

^ 

§ 

:^ 

s 

g 

s 

S 

§ 

g 

1 

o 

f-H 

CO 

l-H 

CM 

■^ 

»n 

00 

l-H 

r-l 

T-f 

g 

S5 

^ 

^ 

g? 

lO 
CO 

00 

CO 

l-H 

■>:*< 
"«*< 

rr 

S 

s 

5§ 

S 

g 

(N 

CO 

Tf< 

UO 

as 

i- 

00 

05 

o 
l-H 

l-H 

CJ 

CO 

-* 

in 

CO 

l-H 

00 

03 
l-H 

S 

ART.  2.]  TABLES.  265 

705.  Ranges  of  Heavy  Ordnance, 

The  range  of  a  gun  or  howitzer  in  this  table  is  the 
first  graze  of  the  ball  on  the  horizontal  plane  on  which 
the  carriage  stands. 


c 

Kind  of  Ordnance. 

o 

> 

s 

Remarks. 

o 

'rt 

ai 

^ 

oq 

W 

A 

Us. 

0        , 

Yds. 

18-PDR.     SIEGE    AND 

4.5 

Shot. 

1    0 

641 

GARRISON    GUN. 

4.5 

(( 

2    0 

950 

On  barbette  carriage. 

4.5 

(( 

3    0 

1,256 

4.5 

(( 

4    0 

1,450 

4.5 

(( 

5    0 

1,592 

24-PDR.     SIEGE    AND 

6 

Shot. 

0    0 

412 

GARRISON   GUN. 

6 

C( 

1    0 

842 

On  siege  carriage. 

6 

C( 

1  30 

953 

6 

" 

2    0 

1,147 

6 

(< 

3    0 

1,417 

6 

(( 

4    0 

1,666 

6 

(( 

5    0 

1,901 

8 

(( 

1    0 

883 

8 

(( 

2    0 

1,170 

8 

<( 

3    0 

1,454 

8 

(( 

4    0 

1,639 

8 

5    0 

1,834 

32-PDR.     SEA-COAST 

6 

Shot. 

1  45 

900 

GUN. 

8 

(( 

1    0 

713 

On  barbette  carriage. 

8 

(( 

1  30 

800 

8 

(( 

1  35 

900 

8 

(( 

2    0 

1,100 

8 

(( 

3    0 

1,433 

8 

(( 

4    0 

1,684 

8 

(( 

5    0 

1,922 

10.67 

(< 

1    0 

780 

10.67 

<( 

2    0 

1,155 

10.67 

(( 

3    0 

1,517 

23 

266 


MISCELLANEOUS. 

Ranges  of  Heavy  Ordnance, 


[part  3. 


s 

Kind  of  Ordnance. 

'5 

1 

s. 

Remarks. 

^ 

— 1 

;> 

c 

o 

cS 

fS 

«5 

Ph 

pa 

W 

P^ 

Lbs. 

o        / 

Yds. 

42-PDR.     SEA-COAST 

10.5 

Shot. 

1    0 

775 

GUN. 

10.5 

(( 

2    0 

1,010 

On  barbette  carriage. 

10.5 

(( 

3    0 

1,300 

10.5 

(( 

4    0 

1,600 

10.5 

(( 

5    0 

1,955 

14 

(( 

1    0 

770 

14 

(( 

2    0 

1,128 

14 

(( 

3    0 

1,380 

14 

(( 

4    0 

1,687 

14 

(( 

5    0 

1,915 

Shell. 

10-INCH     SEA-COAST 

12 

90  lbs. 

1    0 

580 

HOWITZER. 

12 

(( 

2    0 

891 

Time  3  sec. 

On  barbette  carriage. 

12 

<( 

3    0 

1.185 

Time  4  sec. 

12 

(( 

3  30 

1,300 

12 

(C 

4    0 

1,426 

Time  5.25  sec. 

12 

<( 

5    0 

1,650 

Time  6  sec. 

Shot. 

8-INCH     COLUMBIAD. 

10 

65  lbs. 

1    0 

919 

Axis  of  gun  16 

On  barbette  carriage. 

10 

(( 

2    0 

1,116 

feet  above  the 

10 

ti 

3    0 

1,402 

water. 

10 

C( 

4    0 

1,608 

10 

(( 

5    0 

1,813 

10 

(( 

6    0 

2,010 

10 

<< 

8    0 

2,397 

Shot  ceased   to 

10 

(( 

10    0 

2,834 

ricochet  on  wa- 

10 

(C 

15    0 

3,583 

ter. 

10 

(( 

20    0 

4,322 

10 

(( 

25    0 

4,875 

* 

10 

(( 

27    0 

4,481 

15 

(( 

27  30 

4,812 

ART.  2.] 


TABLES. 


267 


Ranges  of  Heavy  Ordnance. 


c 

--^-      -    =: 

Kind  of  Ordnance. 

^ 

_o 

Remarks. 

(S 

1 

s 

& 

Lbs. 

Shell. 

O          1 

Yds. 

8-INCH  COLDMBIAD  — 

10 

50  lbs. 

1    0 

919 

Continued. 

10 

2    0 

1,209 

10 

3    0 

1,409 

10 

4    0 

1,697 

10 

5    0 

1,813 

10 

6    0 

1,985 

10 

8    0 

2,203 

10 

10    0 

2,657 

10 

15    0 

3,556 

10 

20    0 

3,716 

10 

25    0 

4,387 

10 

27    0 

4,171 

15 

27  30 

4,468 

Shot. 

10-INCH  COLUMBIAD. 

18 

128  lbs 

0    0 

394 

Axis  of  gun  16 

On  barbette  carriage. 

18 

1    0 

752 

feet  above  the 

18 

2    0 

1,002 

water. 

18 

3    0 

1,230 

18 

4    0 

1,570 

18 

5    0 

1,814 

18 

6    0 

2,037 

Shot  ceased    to 

18 

,, 

8    0 

2,519 

ricochet  on  wa- 

18 

<* 

10    0 

2,777 

ter. 

18 

15    0 

3,525 

18 

20    0 

4,020 

18 

25    0 

4,304 

18 

<« 

30    0 

4,761 

18 

(( 

35    0 

5,433 

20 

39  15 

5,654 

Shell. 

12 

100  lbs 

1    0 

800 

12 

(( 

2    0 

1,012 

12 

(( 

3    0 

1,184 

12 

<( 

4    0 

1,443 

268 


MISCELLANEOUS.  *    [PART  3. 

Ranges  of  Heavy  Ordnance, 


c 

Kind  of  Ordnance. 

o 

5 

s, 

Remarks. 

^ 

— -" 

> 

c 

o 

KJ 

— 

cii 

CU 

M 

H 

ed 

Lbs. 

Shell. 

O          / 

Yds. 

10-IN.  COLUMBIAD — 

12 

100  lbs 

5    0 

1,604 

Continued. 

18 

(( 

0    0 

448 

18 

(( 

1    0 

747 

18 

(( 

2    0 

1,100 

18 

(( 

3    0 

1,239 

18 

(( 

4    0 

1,611 

18 

(( 

5    0 

1,865 

18 

(( 

6    0 

2,209 

18 

(( 

8    0 

2,489 

18 

(( 

10    0 

2,848 

18 

C( 

15    0 

3,200 

18 

(( 

20    0 

3,885 

18 

(( 

25    0 

4,150 

18 

C( 

30    0 

4,651 

18 

ii 

35    0 

4,828 

Time  35  sec. 

Shell. 

12-INCH  COLUMBIAD. 

20 

172  lbs 

10    0 

2,770 

Time  11  sec. 

20 

(( 

15    0 

3,731 

Time  16  sec. 

20 

(( 

22    0 

4,280 

Time  20  sec. 

20 

it 

25    0 

4,718 

Time  26  sec. 

20 

a 

30    0 

5,004 

20 

(( 

35    0 

5,339 

Time  32  sec. 

20 

(( 

37    0 

5,266 

Time  31  sec. 

20 

(( 

39    0 

5,064 

25 

(( 

10    0 

2,881 

Time  11. 5  sec. 

25 

(C 

15    0 

3,542 

Time  15  sec. 

25 

<( 

30    0 

5,102 

25 

(( 

35    0 

5,409 

Time  32  sec. 

25 

(( 

37    0 

5,373 

Time  32  sec. 

25 

(( 

39    0 

5,506 

Time  36  sec. 

25 

180  lbs 

35    0 

5,644 

25 

(( 

39    0 

5,615 

28 

(< 

35    0 

5,671 

28 

(( 

39    0 

5,761 

3^  miles.   Time 

''*'"^"  I 

36  sec. 

ART.  2.] 


TABLES. 


269 


Ranges  of  Heavy  Ordnance. 


c 

Kind  of  Ordnance. 

O 

^ 

.2 

1 

Remarks. 

(U 

■  PQ 

W 

P5 

Lbs. 

Shell. 

O          t 

Yds. 

13-INCH  SEA-COAST  > 
MORTAR.             S 

20 

200  lbs 

45    0 

4,325 

12-mCH  SEA-COAST  ) 
MORTAR.              j 

20 

Shell. 
200  lbs 

45    0 

4,625 

ExpeFimental. 

10-INCH  SEA-COAST  ) 
MORTAR.              I 

10 

98  « 

45    0 

4,250 

Time  36  sec. 

Shell. 

8-INCH     SIEGE   HOW- 

45 lbs. 

0    0 

251 

Time  |  sec. 

ITZER. 

(( 

1    0 

435 

Time  1^  sec. 

On  siege  carriage. 

(( 

2    0 

618 

Time  2  sec. 

(( 

3    0 

720 

Time  3  sec. 

(( 

4    0 

992 

Time  4  sec. 

(( 

5    0 

1,150 

Time  5  sec. 

4 

(( 

12  30 

2,280 

Shell. 

8-INCH    SEA-COAST 

45  lbs. 

1    0 

405 

MORTAR. 

. 

(( 

2    0 

652 

On  barbette  carriage. 

4 

<< 

3    0 

875 

« 

4    0 

1,110 

*' 

5    0 

1,300 

6 

(( 

1    0 

572 

6 

C( 

2    0 

828 

6 

(( 

3    0 

947 

6 

(( 

4    0 

1,168 

6 

<( 

5    0 

1,463 

8 

(( 

1    0 

646 

8 

(( 

2    0 

909 

8 

tt 

3    0 

1,190 

8 

n 

4    0 

1,532 

8 

(( 

5    0 

1,800 

270 


MISCELLANEOUS. 

Ranges  of  Heavy  Ordnance. 


[part  3. 


Kind  of  Ordnance. 

u 
o 

■ 

i 

Remarks. 

^ 
fS 

1 

s 

Us. 

Shell. 

O        f 

Yis. 

10-lNCH  SIEGE  MOR- 

1 

90  lbs. 

45    0 

300 

Time  6.5  sec. 

TAR. 

1.5 

(( 

45    0 

700 

Time  12  sec. 

2   ' 

tc 

45    0 

1,000 

Time  14  sec. 

2.5 

(( 

45    0 

1,300 

Time  16  sec. 

3 

(( 

45    0 

1,600 

Time  18  sec. 

3.5 

(( 

45    0 

1,800 

Time  19  sec. 

4 

(( 

45    0 

2,100 

Time  21  sec. 

Shell. 

8-IN.  SIEGE  MORTAR. 

0.8 

45  lbs. 

45    0 

209 

Time  6.75  sec. 

0.12 

(( 

45    0 

376 

Time  9  sec. 

1.0 

C( 

45    0 

650 

Time  11.5  sec. 

1.4 

(( 

45    0 

943 

Time  14  sec. 

1.8 

(( 

45    0 

1,318 

Time  16.5  sec. 

1.12 

(( 

45    0 

1,522 

Time  18.5  sec. 

2.0 

(( 

45    0 

1,837 

Time  20.5  sec. 

'> 


4 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


■'"»•  39  t94(> 


DEC 


..Jul'bSFC 


CIS.  Otci^'^ 


APR  151904 


MA 


WWr 


i\m.  > 


te-OJJSsa 


MAY  17,19^  ' 


Q-  C.  BERK.^LEY 


.?>.  1 1  ^@ 


$tP26l9B 


iteresLSEp  9 '80 


LD  21-100m-7," 


¥ 


C 


U.C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


co^bo^2fl^^ 


j/44342 


OF\60 


L 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


I 


